Samsung 24" LED HDTV Монитор серии 3 T24B301 T24B301EW - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels - Samsung
Samsung 24" LED HDTV Монитор серии 3 T24B301 T24B301EW - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels- Samsung
SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
- Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung
- Revenir à l'accueil

Описание
|
Дата выпуска 
|
Язык
|
Файл 
|
руководство пользователя |
2012.06.29 |
Русский |
10.6 MB
 |
руководство пользователя |
2012.06.29 |
АНГЛИЙСКИЙ |
10.4 MB
 |
http://www.samsung.com/ru/support/model/LT24B301EWH/CI-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120629104248077/BN46-00196T-Rus.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120629100902967/BN46-00196T-Eng.pdf
Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :
Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels
Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels
SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels
Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels
Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels
Samsung-910MP-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels
Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels
Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels
Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels
Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels
Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels
Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels
Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels
Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels
Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels
Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels
17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels
40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels
CLX-3185FW Manuels
Galaxy Ace GT-S5830
Galaxy S II GT-I9100
Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16
Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16
Galaxy YGT-S5360
LE32C350 LE32C350D1W
LE40C630 LE40C630K1W
MM-C330D
MM-D330D
Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels
N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels
N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels
RSH5UEPN
SGH-F490
Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000
Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000
Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels
T23A550 T23A550
UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS
UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels
Wave 575 GT-S5750E
Wave II GT-S8530
16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung
16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung
samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels
Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels
PRODUITS SAMSUNG : |
Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S |
Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide |
Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S |
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 |
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets |
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes |
Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S |
Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360° |
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung |
Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir |
Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800 |
G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100 |
Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet |
Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir |
Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB |
Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830 |
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes |
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes |
Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique) |
Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire |
Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace |
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir |
Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note |
Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret |
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830 |
Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830 |
Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100 |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom |
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA |
QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 |
QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED |
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste |
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD |
Samsung B5722 Double SIM |
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles |
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310 |
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB |
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E |
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST |
Samsung batterie SLB-10A |
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS |
Samsung BD-E5300 |
Samsung BD-E5500 3D |
Samsung BD-E6100 3D |
Samsung BD-E8300 3D |
Samsung BD-ES5000 |
Samsung BD-ES6000 3D |
Samsung C3050 Stratus |
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1" |
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung |
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100 |
Samsung CB20A12 |
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir |
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB |
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir |
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB |
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
Samsung CLP-C300A |
Samsung CLP-K300A |
Samsung CLP-M300A |
Samsung CLP-Y300A |
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi |
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0 |
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet |
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire |
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series |
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series |
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX |
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170 |
Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 |
Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile |
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel |
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose |
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi |
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui |
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi |
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui |
Samsung E1150 - Silver |
Samsung ES90 Noir |
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir |
Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir |
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir |
Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S |
Samsung EX1 |
Samsung Flash SEF15A |
Samsung Flash SEF20A |
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android) |
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android) |
Samsung Galaxy Note |
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc |
Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue |
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc |
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir |
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre |
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet |
Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go |
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi |
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android) |
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android) |
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir |
Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB |
Samsung HMX-F80 Noir |
Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir |
Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir |
Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" |
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
Samsung HT-D330 |
Samsung HT-D350 |
Samsung HT-D4500 |
Samsung HT-D5000 3D |
Samsung HT-E4200 3D |
Samsung HT-E4500 3D |
Samsung HT-E5200 3D |
Samsung HT-E5530 3D |
Samsung HT-ES4200 3D |
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D |
Samsung HT-ES8200 3D |
Samsung HW-E350 |
Samsung HW-E450 |
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android) |
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1" |
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX |
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220 |
Samsung kit HDMI |
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm |
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm |
Samsung LE32E420 |
Samsung LE40D503 |
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500 |
Samsung ML-2010D3 |
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi |
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome |
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
Samsung MLT-D1052S |
Samsung MLT-D1082S |
Samsung MLT-D1092S |
Samsung MM-D430D |
Samsung MM-E320 |
Samsung MV800 Noir |
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir |
Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED |
Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED |
Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED |
Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS |
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8 |
Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200 |
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100 |
Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED |
Samsung PL210 Noir |
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go |
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal |
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante |
Samsung PS43E450 |
Samsung PS43E490 3D |
Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung PS51E450 |
Samsung PS51E490 3D |
Samsung PS51E530 |
Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go |
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go |
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED |
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes |
Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display |
Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED |
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED |
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D |
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED |
Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED |
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED |
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED |
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions |
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions |
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi |
Samsung SCX-4200A |
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi |
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0 |
Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0 |
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50 |
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000 |
Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi |
Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi |
Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi |
Samsung ST65 Noir |
Samsung ST65 Rouge |
Samsung ST66 Noir |
Samsung ST77 Blanc |
Samsung ST77 Noir |
Samsung ST77 Rouge |
Samsung ST77 Violet |
Samsung ST88 Noir |
Samsung station d'accueil |
Samsung station d'accueil HD2 |
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR |
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED |
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED |
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D |
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX |
Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD |
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir |
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED |
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED |
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED |
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED |
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED |
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED |
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED |
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
Samsung UE37ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE40D5000 LED |
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D |
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED |
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D |
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED |
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED |
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D |
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D |
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir |
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise |
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron |
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose |
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10 |
Samsung Wave 575 |
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi |
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi |
Samsung WB690 Noir |
Samsung WB700 Noir |
Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS |
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale |
Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD |
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go |
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go |
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go |
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose |
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go |
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go |
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go |
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go |
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go |
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go |
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go |
Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go |
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go |
T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York |
Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan |
Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan |
Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir |
Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir |
Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta |
Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta |
Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners |
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune |
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune |
Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir |
We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0 |
We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0 |
Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche |
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire |
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire |
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc |
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir
Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U
Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B
SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung E2550
Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur
Samsung ES30 Noir
Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D423
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE40D550
Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir
Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB
SAMSUNG ME106V-SX
Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction
SAMSUNG ME82V-SX
SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S
Samsung PL170 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43D450
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS59D530
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SC4340 noir ébène
Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19D4010 LED
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32D5000 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D5710 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB750 Noir
Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
LED TV MONITOR (MFM TV)
user manual
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
TB300
TB350English 2
Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.
Product design and specifications may be changed without notice.
Digital LED display notice
1. Functionalities related to Digital TV (DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC) digital terrestrial signals are
broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible DVB-C (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AAC) cable-TV service. Please check with your local
dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal.
2. DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and DVB-C is that for the broadcast
transmission of digital LED display over cable.
3. Although this LED display set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future DVB-T digital
terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed.
4. Depending on the countries/areas where this LED display set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for such a service and
you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business.
5. Some Digital LED display functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with some cable service
providers.
6. For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre.
✎ The reception quality of LED display may be affected due to differences in broadcasting method between the countries. Please check the LED
display performance in the local SAMSUNG Authorized Dealer, or the Samsung Call Centre whether it can be improved by reconfiguring LED
display setting or not.
Still image warning
Avoid displaying still images (like jpeg picture files) or still image element (like LED display programme logo, panorama or 4:3 image format, stock or news
bar at screen bottom etc.) on the screen. Constant displaying of still picture can cause ghosting of screen, which will affect image quality. To reduce risk of
this effect, please follow below recommendations:
• Avoid displaying the same LED display channel for long periods.
• Always try do display any image on full screen, use LED display set picture format menu for best possible match.
• Reduce brightness and contrast values to minimum required to achieve desired picture quality, exceeded values may speed up the burnout process.
• Frequently use all LED display features designed to reduce image retention and screen burnout, refer to proper user manual section for details.
Securing the Installation Space
Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product.
✎ The actual appearance of the LED display may differ from the images in this manual, depending on the model.
✎ Be careful when you touch the LED display. Some parts can be somewhat hot.
Installation with a stand. Installation with a wall-mount.
• An administration fee may be charged if either
– (a) an engineer is called out at your request and there is no defect in the product
(i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual).
– (b) you bring the unit to a repair centre and there is no defect in the product
(i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual).
• The amount of such administration charge will be advised to you before any work or home visit is carried out.
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm3
ENGLISH
English
Check the Symbol!
This function can be used by pressing the
t TOOLST
button on the remote control.
Note
Indicates additional information.
Contents
Getting Started
4
4 Safety Precautions
11 Accessories
12 Viewing the Control Panel
13 Viewing the Remote Control
Connections
14
14 Connecting to an Antenna
14 Setup (Initial Setup)
15 Connecting to an AV Device
16 Connecting to a COMMON INTERFACE slot
17 Connecting to a Audio device and PC
19 Changing the Input Source
Basic Features
19
19 How to Navigate Menus
20 Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide)
20 Using the Channel Menu
22 Channel Menu
23 Picture Menu
25 Sound Menu
27 System Menu
30 Support Menu
Advanced Features
31
31 Using the Media Play
Other Information
38
38 Analogue Channel Teletext Feature
39 Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand
40 Anti-theft Kensington Lock
41 Troubleshooting
45 Specifications4
Getting Started
English
Safety Precautions
Icons used for safety precautions
WARNING
Failing to follow the precautions marked with this sign may result in a serious injury or even
a fatality.
CAUTION
Failing to follow the precautions marked with this sign may result in a personal injury or
property damage.
Do not perform.
Must be followed.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER ALL SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
This symbol indicates that high voltage is present
inside. It is dangerous to make any kind of contact
with any internal part of this product.
This symbol alerts you that important literature
concerning operation and maintenance has been
included with this product.
¦ Power Related
✎ The following images are for your reference and may differ depending on models and countries.
Warning
Avoid using a damaged power cord
or plug or a loose power outlet.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock or fire.
Avoid connecting multiple electric
appliances to a single wall outlet.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire due
to overheating of the wall outlet.
Avoid plugging in or unplugging the
power supply with wet hands.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock.
!
Plug the power plug in firmly.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire.
!
Make sure to connect the power
cord to a grounded wall outlet (for
insulation class 1 equipment only).
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock or injury.
Avoid bending or twisting the power
cord excessively and avoid placing
heavy objects on the cord.
x Otherwise, it may result in electric
shock or fire due to a damaged
power cord.
Getting Started5
Getting Started
English
Keep the power cord and the
product away from a heater.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock or fire.
!
If the pins of the power plug or the
wall outlet are covered in dust, clean it
using a dry cloth.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire.
Caution
Avoid unplugging the power plug
while the product is operating.
x Otherwise, it may damage the
product due to electric shock.
!
Make sure to use only the power cord
supplied by our company. In addition,
do not use the power cord of another
electric appliance.
x Otherwise, it may result in electric
shock or fire.
!
When unplugging the power plug
from the wall outlet, make sure to
hold it by the plug and not by the
cord.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock or fire.
!
Connect the power plug to a wall
outlet that can be easily reached.
x When a problem occurs with the
product, you must unplug the
power plug to cut the power off
completely. You cannot cut the
power off completely using only
the power button on the product.
¦ Installation Related
Warning
Avoid placing burning candles,
mosquitorepellentor cigarettes on
the product.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire.
!
Ask an installation engineer or relevant
company to install the product onto
the wall.
x Otherwise, it may result in injury.
x Make sure to use the specified
wall mount.
Avoid installing the product in a
badly-ventilated location such as
inside a bookshelf or closet.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire
due to internal over-heating.
!
Keep the plastic bags used to pack
the product away from children.
x If children place the plastic
bags over their heads, they may
suffocate.
Avoid installing the product in a
location that is unstable or exposed
to excessive vibration such as on an
unstable or slanted shelf.
x The product may fall and this
may result in damage to the
product or injury.
x If you use the product in a
location exposed to excessive
vibrations, it may result in a
problem with the product or fire.
!
Avoid installing the product in a
location exposed to dust, moisture
(sauna), oil, smoke or water (rain
drops) and installing it within a vehicle.
x This may result in electric shock
or fire.6
Getting Started
English
Avoid installing the product in a
location exposed to direct sunlight
and installing the product near a heat
source such as a fireplace or heater.
x This may shorten the product
life cycle or cause fire.
Avoid installing the product where
children may reach it.
x If a child touches the product,
the product may fall and this may
result in injury.
x Since the front part is heavier,
install the product on a flat and
stable surface.
!
Bend the outdoor antenna cable
downwards at the location where it
comes in the house so that rainwater
does not flow in.
x If rainwater enters the product,
it may result in electric shock
or fire.
!
Install the antenna far away from any
high voltage cables.
x If the antenna touches or falls
onto a high voltage cable, it may
result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
!
Do not let the product drop while
moving it.
x This may result in a problem
with the product or injury.
Do not place the product face down
on the floor.
x This may damage the panel of
the product.
When installing the product on a
console or shelf, make sure that
the front of the product does not
protrude out of the console or shelf.
x Otherwise, this may cause the
product to fall off and result in a
malfunction or injury.
x Make sure to use a cabinet or
shelf suitable to the size of the
product.
!
When putting the product down,
handle it gently.
x Otherwise, it may result in a
problem with the product or
injury.
SAMSUNG
!
If the product is installed in a location
where the operating conditions
vary considerably, a serious quality
problem may occur due to the
surrounding environment. In this
case, install the product only after
consulting one of our service
engineers about the matter.
x Places exposed to microscopic
dust, chemicals, too high or
low temperature, high humidity,
airports or stations where the
product is continuously used.7
Getting Started
English
¦ Cleaning Related
Warning
!
Before cleaning the product, unplug
the power cord.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock or fire.
When cleaning the product, do not
spray water directly over the product
parts.
x Make sure that water does not
enter the product.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire,
electric shock or a problem with
the product.
Caution
Avoid spraying cleansing agent
directly onto the product.
x This may result in discoloration
or cracking of the exterior of the
product or the panel coming off.
!
When cleaning the product,
disconnect the power cord and clean
the product with the supplied cleaning
cloth.
x Avoid using chemicals such as
wax, benzene, alcohol, thinner,
mosquitorepellent, fragrance,
lubrication or cleansing agent
when cleaning the product.
This may result in the exterior
being deformed or the print being
removed.
!
If you can't get the product clean
with just the supplied cloth, use a
soft, damp cloth with a "monitorexclusive cleansing agent" and wipe
the product with it.
x If no monitor-exclusive cleansing
agent is available, dilute a
cleansing agent with water at a
ratio of 1:10 before cleaning the
product.
!
Since the exterior of the product is
easily scratched, be sure to use the
supplied cleansing cloth.
¦ Usage Related
Warning
Since a high voltage runs through
the product, never disassemble,
repair or modify the product yourself.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire or
electric shock.
x If the product needs to be fixed,
contact a service centre.
!
To move the product, turn the power
off and unplug the power cord, the
antenna cable and any other wires
connected to the product.
x Otherwise, it may result in electric
shock or fire due to the damaged
power cord.8
Getting Started
English
!
If the product generates a strange
noise, a burning smell, or smoke,
unplug the power plug immediately
and contact a service centre.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock or fire.
Avoid letting children hang or climb
onto the product.
x Otherwise, it may result in the
product falling and this may result
in injury or death.
If you drop the product or the case
is damaged, turn the power off and
unplug the power cord. Contact a
service centre.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire or
electric shock.
Avoid placing objects such as toys
and cookies on top of the product.
x If a child hangs over the product
to grab an object, the object or
the product may fall and this may
result in injury or even death.
!
When thunder or lighting occurs,
unplug the power cord and under
no circumstance touch the antenna
cable as this is dangerous.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock or fire.
!
Avoid dropping an object over the
product or cause impact to the
product.
x Otherwise, it may result in electric
shock or fire.
Avoid moving the product by pulling
the power cord or antenna cable.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock, fire or a problem
with the product due to damage
to the cable.
!
GAS
When a gas leak occurs, do not touch
the product or the power plug and
ventilate immediately.
x A spark may result in an
explosion or fire.
x During a thunder or lighting
storm, do not touch the power
cord or antenna cable.
Avoid lifting up or moving the
product by holding only the power
cord or signal cable.
x Otherwise, it may result in
electric shock, fire or a problem
with the product due to damage
to the cable.
!
Avoid using or placing inflammable
spray or objects near the product.
x This may result in an explosion
or fire.
Take care not to block the vent by a
table cloth or curtain.
x Otherwise, it may result in fire
due to internal overheating.
100
Avoid inserting metal objects such
as a chopsticks, coins or hairpins, or
inflammable objects into the product
(the vents, ports, etc).
x If water or substances enters
the product, turn the power
off, unplug the power cord and
contact a service centre.
x Otherwise, it may result in a
problem with the product, electric
shock or fire.9
Getting Started
English
Avoid placing a liquid container such
as a vase, flowerpot, beverage,
cosmetics or drugs, or a metal
object over the product.
x If water or substances enter
the product, turn the power
off, unplug the power cord and
contact a service centre.
x Otherwise, it may result in a
problem with the product,
electric shock or fire.
Do not press down hard on the
product. The product may become
deformed or damaged.
Caution
!
Displaying a still image for a long
time may create a persistent image
or stain on the screen.
x If you do not use the product
for a long time, use the
power-saving mode or set the
screensaver to the moving
picture mode.
-_-
!
When not using the product for a
long time such as leaving your home,
unplug the power cord from the wall
outlet.
x Otherwise, it may cause dust
accumulation and result in fire
caused by overheating or short
circuit or result in an electric
shock.
!
Set the appropriate resolution and
frequency for the product.
x Otherwise, it may result in eye
strain.
Avoid turning the product upside
down or move the product holding
only the stand.
x This may cause the product to
fall, resulting in damage to the
product or injury.
!
Watching the product from too
close a distance continuously may
damage your eyesight.
Avoid using a humidifier or cooker
near the product.
x Otherwise, it may result in electric
shock or fire.
!
It is important to give your eyes
some rest (5 minutes every hour)
when viewing the product screen for
long periods of time.
x This will alleviate any eye strain.
Since the display panel is hot after
using it for a long time, do not touch
the product.10
Getting Started
English
!
Keep the small accessories in a
location out of the reach of children.
!
Take care when adjusting the angle of
the product or the height of the stand.
x If your hand or finger is caught,
you may be injured.
x If the product is tilted excessively,
the product may fall and this may
result in injury.
Avoid placing a heavy object over
the product.
x Otherwise, it may result in a
problem with the product or
injury.
When using headphones or
earphones, do not turn the volume
too high.
x Having the sound too loud may
damage your hearing.
Be careful that children do not place
the batteries in their mouths when
removed from the remote control.
Place the battery in a location that
children or infants cannot reach.
x If children have had the battery
in their mouths, consult your
doctor immediately.
!
When replacing the batteries, insert
them with right polarity (+, -).
x Otherwise, the battery may
become damaged or it may
cause fire, personal injury or
damage due to leakage of the
internal liquid.
Use only specified standard
batteries. Do not use new and used
batteries together.
x This may cause a battery to
break or leak and may cause
fire, injury, or contamination
(damage).
!
The batteries (and rechargeable
batteries) are not ordinary refuse
and must be returned for recycling
purposes. The customer is
responsible for returning the used or
rechargeable batteries for recycling.
x The customer can return used
or rechargeable batteries to a
nearby public recycling centre or
to a store selling the same type
of the battery or rechargeable
battery.11
Getting Started
English
Accessories
✎Please make sure the following items are included with your LED display. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
✎The items’ colours and shapes may vary depending on the models.
✎Cables not included in the package contents can be purchased separately.
✎Check that there is no accessory hidden behind packing materials when you open the box.
[CAUTION: INSERT SECURELY LEST SHOULD BE DETACHED IN SET
x User Manual x Quick Setup Guide
x Remote Control & Batteries (AAA x 2) x Cleaning Cloth
x Warranty Card / Safety Guide (Not available in some locations) x Power Cord
y Stand Connector y Stand Base y D-Sub Cable y Stereo Cable
Input Cables (Sold Separately)
y HDMI to DVI Cable y Audio Cable y Component Cable y Optical Cable
y HDMI Cable12
Getting Started
English
Viewing the Control Panel
✎The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
SOURCE
E
Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as
you would use the ENTERE button on the remote control.
MENU Displays an on-screen menu, the OSD (on screen display) of your LED display's features.
Y Adjusts the volume. In the OSD, use the Y buttons as you would use the l and r
z buttons on the remote control.
Changes the channels. In the OSD, use the z buttons as you would use the u
and d buttons on the remote control.
P (Power) Turns the LED display on or off.
Power Indicator Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in standby mode.
Remote control sensor Aim the remote control towards this spot on the LED display.
Standby mode
Do not leave your LED display in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on a holiday, for example). A small
amount of electric power is still consumed even when the power button is turned off. It is best to unplug the power cord.
Control Panel13
Getting Started
English
Viewing the Remote Control
✎This is a special remote control for the visually impaired and has Braille points on the Channel and Number buttons.
Installing batteries (Battery size: AAA)
Turns the TV on and off.
Have direct access to channels.
Alternately select Teletext ON, Double,
Mix or OFF.
Displays the Content Home, which
includes Channel List, Guide, Media
Play, Schedule Manager, and Source.
Quickly select frequently used functions.
Displays the main on-screen menu.
Returns to the previous menu.
PIP: Turns the PIP on or off.
P.SIZE: Selects the Picture Size.
AD/SUBT.: Turns the audio description
on and off (not available in some
locations). / Displays digital subtitles.
Move the cursor and select an item.
Confirm the setting.
Use these buttons according to the
direction on screen.
Adjusts the volume.
Displays and selects the available video
sources.
Returns to the previous channel.
Cuts off the sound temporarily.
Displays channel lists on the screen.
Displays the EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide).
Displays information on the TV screen.
Exits the menu.
Using these buttons in Media Play
mode.
Changes channels.Connections
Connecting to an Antenna
When the LED display is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically.
✎Preset: Connecting the mains and antenna.
ANT OUT
Power Input
Setup (Initial Setup)
English 14
When the LED display is initially powered on, a sequence of on-screen prompts will assist in configuring basic settings. Press the
POWERP button. Setup is available only when the Input Source is set to TV.
✎Before turning on the LED display, make sure the antenna cable is connected.
1
Selecting a menu
language
Press the u or d button to select a menu language. Press ENTERE button
2 or
Selecting
Home Use
Store Demo
twice when done.
Press the
x Select the
u or
Home Use
d button, then press the
mode. Store Demo
ENTER
Mode is for retail environments.
E button. P
x To return the unit’s settings from Store Demo to Home Use (standard):
Press the volume button on the LED display. When you see the volume
OSD, press and hold MENU for 5 sec.
x Store Demo is only for shop display. If you select it, several functions are
not able to use. Please select Home Use when you watch at home.
3
Selecting an area Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate area by pressing the u or d button.
Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice.
4
Auto Tuning Press the u or d button to select correct option, and then press ENTERE button twice. Let’s
find and store channels on your TV. Do you need to search for channels?
x Yes, I need to. All the channels available will be found and stored on your TV. (Auto Tuning
necessary)
x No, I don’t need to. My set-top box provides all the channels that are available, so I don't
need to search for channels.
✎ You can complete Setup by selecting it.
x Air / Cable: Select the antenna source to memorise.
Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the channel source to memorise.
✎ You can check more details on page22.
5
Setting the Clock Mode Set the Clock Mode automatically or manually.
x Auto: Select the time zone (depending on the country) where you are located.
x Manual: Allows you to manually set the current date and time.
✎ If the customer chooses "No, I don’t need to." in step 4, the clock just
can be set manually.
6
Complete Press the ENTERE button.
If You Want to Reset This Feature...
Select System - Setup (Initial Setup). Enter your 4 digit PIN number. The default PIN number is “0-0-0-0”. If you want to change the
PIN number, use the Change PIN function.
You should do Setup (MENU → System) again at home although you did in shop.
✎If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence in Standby mode, which resets the PIN
to “0-0-0-0”: POWER (off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (on).English 15
Connections
Connecting to an AV Device
Using an HDMI or an HDMI to DVI cable (up to 1080p)
Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, HD cable box, HD STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver, VCR
✎HDMI IN(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
x If an HDMI to DVI cable is connected to the HDMI IN(DVI) port, the audio does not work.
x The picture may not display normally (if at all) or the audio may not work if an external device that uses an older version of
HDMI mode is connected to the LED display. If such a problem occurs, ask the manufacturer of the external device about
the HDMI version and, if out of date, request an upgrade.
x Be sure to purchase a certified HDMI cable. Otherwise, the picture may not display or a connection error may occur.
x A basic high-speed HDMI cable or one with ethernet is recommended. This product does not support the ethernet
function via HDMI.
Using a Scart Cable
Available devices: DVD, VCR
✎In Ext. mode, DTV Out supports MPEG SD Video and Audio only.
DVI OUT
HDMI OUT
AUDIO OUT
W
R
DVD /
Blu-ray player
DVD /
Blu-ray player
EXT (RGB)
EXT
VCR / DVDEnglish 16
Connections
Using a Component (up to 1080p) or Audio/Video (480i only) Cable
Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, cable box, STB satellite receiver, VCR
PR PB
COMPONENT
/ AV IN
R
W
R
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO OUT
R W R B G
R W R B G
R W
W
W
R B
R
R
G
Y
Y
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
COMPONENT OUT
PR PB Y
R W Y
✎When connecting to AV IN, the colour of the AV IN [Y/VIDEO] jack (green) will not match the video cable (yellow).
✎For better picture quality, the Component connection is recommended over the A/V connection.
Connecting to a COMMON INTERFACE slot
(Just for Europe, Turkey,Algeria,South Africa, and CIS area)
Using the “CI or CI+ CARD”
To watch paid channels, the “CI or CI+ CARD” must be inserted.
x If you don’t insert the “CI or CI+ CARD,” some channels will display the message
“Scrambled Signal”.
x The pairing information containing a telephone number, the “CI or CI+ CARD” ID
the Host ID and other information will be displayed in about 2~3 minutes. If an error
message is displayed, please contact your service provider.
x When the configuration of channel information has finished, the message “Updating
Completed” is displayed, indicating the channel list is updated.
✎NOTE
x You must obtain a “CI or CI+ CARD” from a local cable service provider.
x When removing the “CI or CI+ CARD”, carefully pull it out with your hands since dropping the “CI or CI+ CARD” may cause
damage to it.
x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” in the direction marked on the card.
x The location of the COMMON INTERFACE slot may be different depending on the model.
x “CI or CI+ CARD” is not supported in some countries and regions; check with your authorized dealer.
x If you have any problems, please contact a service provider.
x Insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” that supports the current antenna settings. The screen will be distorted or will not be seen.
Audio Cable
(Not Supplied)
Video Cable
(Not Supplied)
Audio Cable
(Not Supplied)
Red White Red Bule Green Red White Yellow
Device
Device
Component Cable
(Not Supplied)English 17
Connections
Digital audio system
Connecting to a Audio device and PC
Using an Optical (Digital) or a Headphone Connection
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL)
TB300 series have not headphone and Optical interface.
✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
x When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack, decrease the volume of both the
LED display and the system.
x 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when the LED display is connected to an external device supporting 5.1 CH.
x When the receiver (home theatre) is set to on, you can hear sound output from the TV’s optical jack. When the TV is
receiving a DTV signal, the TV will send 5.1 CH sound to the home theatre receiver. When the source is a digital component
such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only
2 CH audio will be heard from the home theatre receiver. If you want to hear 5.1 CH audio, connect the digital audio out jack
from your DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver directly to an amplifier or home theatre.
✎Headphones H: You can connect your headphones to the headphones output on your set. While the headphones are
connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled.
x Sound function may be restricted when connecting headphones to the LED display.
x Headphone volume and LED display volume are adjusted separately.
Using an HDMI cable or an HDMI to DVI cable or a D-sub cable
✎Connecting through the HDMI cable may not be supported depending on the PC.
HDMI Cable
(Not Supplied)
HDMI to DVI
(Not Supplied)
Stereo Cable
Stereo Cable
D-Sub Cable English 18
Connections
Display Modes (D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input)
Optimal resolution : 1366 x 768 pixels (T19B300 model only)
Display Mode Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
Pixel Clock
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
Mode Resolution (H/V)
IBM 720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
MAC 640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
VESA DMT 800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
MAC 832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+
VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+
Optimal resolution : 1920 x 1080 pixels
Display Mode Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency(Hz)
Pixel Clock
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H/V)
Mode Resolution
IBM 720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
MAC 640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
VESA DMT 800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
MAC 832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
VESA DMT 1152 x 864 75Hz 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+
MAC 1152 x 870 75Hz 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/-
VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 800 60Hz 49.702 59.810 83.500 -/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 60Hz 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 75Hz 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+
VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+
VESA DMT 1440 x 900 60Hz 55.935 59.887 106.500 -/+
VESA DMT 1600 x 900RB 60Hz 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+
VESA DMT 1680 x 1050 60Hz 65.290 59.954 146.250 -/+
VESA DMT 1920 x 1080 60Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+
✎NOTE
x The interlace mode is not supported.
x The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.
x Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG(Sync On Green) is not supported.English 19
Connections
Basic Features
How to Navigate Menus
Before using the LED display, follow the steps below to learn
how to navigate the menu and select and adjust different
functions.
1 ENTERE / Direction button: Move the cursor and select
an item. Confirm the setting.
2 RETURN button: Returns to the previous menu.
3 MENU button: Displays the main on-screen menu.
4 EXIT button: Exits the on-screen menu.
How to Operate the OSD (On Screen Display)
The access step may differ depending on the selected menu.
1 MENU m The main menu options appear on
the screen:
Picture, Sound, Channel, System,
Support.
2 ▲ / ▼ Select an icon with the ▲ or ▼
button.
3
ENTERE Press ENTERE to access the
sub-menu.
4 ▲ / ▼ Select the desired submenu with the
▲ or ▼ button.
5 ◄ / ► Adjust the value of an item with the
◄ or ► button. The adjustment in
the OSD may differ depending on the
selected menu.
6
ENTERE Press ENTERE to complete the
configuration.
7
EXIT e Press EXIT.
Changing the Input Source
Source
SOURCE s→ Source
Use to select LED display or an external input
sources such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable
box / STB satellite receiver.
■ TV / Ext. / PC / HDMI/DVI / AV /
Component
✎In the Source, connected inputs will be
highlighted.
✎TV, PC and Ext. always stay activated.
Edit Name
SOURCEs→ TOOLST → Edit Name → ENTERE
In the Source, press the TOOLST button, and then you can
set an external input sources name you want.
■ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB /
AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI PC / DVI
Devices / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Name
the device connected to the input jacks to make your input
source selection easier.
✎When connecting a PC to the HDMI IN (DVI) port with
HDMI cable, you should set the LED display to PC mode
under Edit Name.
✎When connecting a PC to the HDMI IN (DVI) port with
HDMI to DVI cable, you should set the LED display to DVI
PC mode under Edit Name.
✎When connecting an AV devices to the HDMI IN (DVI) port
with HDMI to DVI cable, you should set the LED display to
DVI Devices mode under Edit Name.
Information
SOURCEs→ TOOLST→ Information → ENTERE
You can see detailed information about the selected external
device.
2 4
3
1English 20
Basic Features
Using the INFO button (Now & Next guide)
The display identifies the current channel and
the status of certain audio-video settings.
The Now & Next guide shows daily LED
display programme information for each
channel according to the broadcasting time.
x Scroll l / r to view information for a
desired programme while watching the
current channel. (Depending on the
channels)
x Scroll u / d to view information for other channels. If you
want to move to the currently selected channel, press the
ENTERE button.
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
No detailed information.
No title
576i 4:3 SD Italian
Stereo
a Information
17.02 Tue 19 Jul
DTV Air
All
Coming Soon
5
Using the Channel Menu
Press the CONTENT button to select Contents Home, and
then select the menu you want to use. Each screen will be
displayed.
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Contents Home
Channel List Guide Media Play Schedule Manager Source
R Return
Guide
CONTENT → Contents Home → Guide → ENTERE
The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
information is provided by broadcasters.
Using programme schedules provided by
broadcasters, you can specify programmes
you want to watch in advance so that
the channel automatically changes to the
selected programme channel at the specified
time. Programme entries may appear blank
or out of date depending on a channel
status.
Using Channel View
x a Red (Sche. Mgr) : Displays the Schedule Manager.
x b Green (-24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to be
broadcasted before 24 hours.
x { Yellow (+24 Hours): Viewing the list of programmes to
be broadcasted after 24 hours.
x } Blue (Ch. Mode): Select the type of channels you want
to display on the Channel View window.
x (Information): Displays details of the selected programme.
x k (Page): Move to next or previous page.
x E (Watch / Schedule)
– When selecting the current programme, you can watch
the selected programme.
– When selecting the future programme, you can reserve
to watch the selected programme. To cancel the
schedule, press the ENTERE button again and select
Cancel Schedule.
Schedule Manager
CONTENT → Contents Home → Schedule Manager →
ENTERE
You can view, modify or delete a channel you have reserved to
watch.
Using the Schedule Viewing
You can set a desired channel to be displayed automatically at
the intended time. Set the current time first to use this function.
1. Press the ENTERE button to select Schedule Manager.
2. Press the TOOLSTbutton or a button to add
programme to schedule manually. The Schedule Viewing
screen appears.
3. Press the u / d / l / r buttons to set the Aerial,
Channel, Repeat, Date or Start Time.
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
IL MEDICO E LO STRGONE
DTV Air 6 R4 DTT
16:55 - 17:55
IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE - 2 TEMPO
a Sche. Mgr b -24 Hours { +24 Hours } Ch. Mode Information k Page E Watch
Today 17:00 17:30 18:00 18:30
Guide 17:00 Tue 19 Jul
Channel View - All
No Information
No Information
No Information
No Information
IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE
1 1futech
2 24ore.tv
3 BBC World
4 Class News
5 Coming Soon
6 R4 DTT
No Information
TG 4 No Information
5 Coming SoonEnglish 21
Basic Features
x Aerial: Select the desired antenna source.
x Channel: Select the desired channel.
x Repeat: Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or
Everyday to set at your convenience. If you select Manual,
you can set the day you want.
✎ The c mark indicates the date is selected.
x Date: you can set desired date.
✎ It is available when you select Once in Repeat.
x Start Time: You can set start time you want.
✎ On the Information screen, you can change or
cancel a reserved information.
x Cancel Schedule: Cancel a show you have
reserved to watch.
x Edit: Change a show you have reserved to watch.
x Return: Return to the previous screen.
Channel List
CONTENT → Channel List → ENTERE
You can view all the channel searched.
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Channel List
All
1 1futech
2 24ore.tv
3 BBC World
4 Class News
5 Coming Soon
6 R4 DTT
IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE
a1 C2
a2 C4
T Tools L Ch. Mode E Watch k Page
✎When you press the CH LIST button on the remote
control, Channel List screen will be displayed at once.
Using the operation buttons with the Channel List.
■ T (Tools): Press Tools button to check the following
functions.
x Programme View:Press the u/d buttons to select the
desired programme, then press the ENTERE button.
(Only for DIGITAL Channel)
x Edit Favourites: Set channels you watch frequently as
favourites.
✎ Select the Edit Favourites, then press the
ENTERE button.
– If the channel is already added to favourite
channel, Edit Favourites will be shown.
x Lock / Unlock: Lock a channel so that the channel
cannot be selected and viewed.
✎ This function is available only when the Channel
Lock is set to On.
✎ The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4-digit
PIN, the default of which is “0-0-0-0”. Change the
PIN using the Change PIN option.
x Edit Channel Name (Only for Analogue channels):
Assign your own channel name.
✎ This function may not support depending on the
region.
x Edit Channel Number: Edit the number by pressing the
number buttons desired.
✎ This function may not support depending on the
region.
x Delete: You can delete a channel to display the
channels you want.
x Information: Display the channel name, resolution,
picture mode, language and so on.(Some just available
for DTV)
x Sort: Change the list ordered by channel name or
channel number. (Only for DIGITAL Channel)
x Change antenna: Switches to Air or Cable.
x Edit Mode: You can select desired channels and edit it.
■ l r (Ch. Mode): Move to the type of channels you want to
display on the Channel List screen.
✎ The option may differ depending on country.
■ E (Watch / Information): Watches the channel you
select. / Displays details of the selected programme.
■ k (Page): Move to next or previous page.
How to use Schedule Viewing in Channel List (Depending
on the channels)
When you set the Schedule Viewing in Channel List, you can
only set the programme in Programme View.
1. Press the CH LIST button, then select a desired digital
channel.
2. Press the TOOLST button and select Programme View.
3. Press the u / d buttons to select the desired programme,
then press the E (Information) button.
4. Select Schedule Viewing, then press the ENTERE
button when done.
✎If you want to cancel Schedule Viewing, follow steps 1
through 3. Select Cancel Schedule.English 22
Basic Features
Channel Menu
¦ Retuning Channels
MENUm→ Channel → ENTERE
Before your television can begin memorizing the available
Aerial (Air / Cable)t
channels, you must specify the type of signal source that is
connected to the LED display.
Country
(depending on the country)
The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
✎Select your country so that the LED display can correctly
auto-tune the broadcasting channels.
■ Digital Channel: Change the country for digital channels.
■ Analogue Channel: Change the country for analogue
channels.
Auto Tuning
(depending on the country)
✎Automatically allocated programme numbers may not
correspond to actual or desired programme numbers. If
a channel is locked using the Channel Lock function, the
PIN input window appears.
■ Auto Tuning
– Air / Cable: Select the antenna source to memorise.
Digital & Analogue / Digital / Analogue: Select the
channel source to memorise.
✎ When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue
or Digital: Provide a value to scan for cable
channels.
x Search Mode(Full / Network / Quick): Selects
the Search Mode settings among Full /
Network / Quick.
x Network (Auto / Manual): Selects the Network
ID setting mode among Auto or Manual.
x Network ID: When Network is Manual, you
can set up Network ID using the numeric
buttons.
x Frequency: Displays the frequency for the
channel. (differs in each country)
x Modulation: Displays available modulation
values.
x Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
■ Cable Search Option
(depending on the country)
Sets additional search options such as the frequency and
symbol rate for a cable network search.
– Start Frequency / Stop Frequency: Set the start or
stop frequency (differs in each country).
– Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
– Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
Manual Tuning
Scans for a channel manually and stores in the LED display.
✎If a channel is locked using the Channel Lock function,
the PIN input window appears.
■ Digital Channel Tuning: Scans for a digital channel.
1. Press the ENTERE button to select New.
✎ When selecting Aerial → Air: Channel,
Frequency, Bandwidth
✎ When selecting Aerial → Cable: Frequency,
Modulation, Symbol Rate
2. Press the d button to select Search. When scanning
has finnished, a channel is updated in the channel list.
■ Analogue Channel Tuning: Scans for a analogue channel.
1. Press the ENTERE button to select New.
2. Set the Programme, Colour System, Sound System,
Channel and Search.
3. Press the d button to select Store. When scanning
has finnished, a channel is updated in the channel list.
Transfer Channel List
The PIN input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
Imports or exports the channel map. You should connect a USB
storage to use this function.
■ Import from USB: Import channel list from USB.
■ Export to USB: Export channel list to USB. This function is
available when USB is connected.
✎USB format should be FAT32.
Fine Tune
(analogue channels only)
If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the channel,
as this is done automatically during the search and store
operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune the channel
manually. Scroll to the left or right until the image is clear.
✎Settings are applied to the channel you’re currently
watching.
✎Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked
with an asterisk “*” on the right-hand side of the channel
number in the channel banner
✎To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset.English 23
Basic Features
Picture Menu
¦ Changing the Preset Picture Mode
MENUm→ Picture → Picture Mode → ENTERE
Select your preferred picture type.
Picture Mode t
✎When connecting a PC, the Picture Mode is only available
the Standard and Entertain.
■ Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.
■ Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.
■ Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.
■ Entertain: Suitable for watching movies and games.
✎ It is only available when connecting a PC.
¦ Adjusting Picture Settings
MENUm→ Picture → ENTERE
Samsung MagicAngle
Adjust screen viewing Angle to optimize screen quality according
to your viewing position.
■ Samsung MagicAngle: When viewing the screen at an
angle from below or above by setting the appropriate mode
for each position you can obtain a similar picture quality as
viewing the screen directly from the front.
x Off: Select when viewing from the front position.
x Lean back mode: Select when viewing from a slightly
lower position.
x Standing Mode: Select when viewing from the upper
position.
■ Mode: Adjust screen viewing angle.
✎When Samsung MagicAngle is set to Lean back mode
or Standing Mode, Gamma is not available.
Backlight / Contrast / Brightness /
Sharpness / Colour / Tint (G/R)
Your television has several setting options for picture quality
control.
✎NOTE
x In analogue TV, PC, AV modes of the PAL system, the
Tint (G/R) function is not available.
x When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to
Backlight, Contrast, Brightness and Sharpness.
x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external
device connected to the LED display.
x Lowering picture brightness reduces power
consumption.
Screen Adjustment
■ Picture Size: Your cable box / satellite
receiver may have its own set of screen
sizes as well. However, we highly
recommend you use 16:9 mode most of
the time.
Auto Wide: Automatically adjusts the
picture size to the 16:9 aspect ratio.
16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
Wide Zoom: Magnifies the picture size more than 4:3.
✎ Adjusts the Position by using u / d buttons.
Zoom: Magnifies the 16:9 wide pictures vertically to fit the
screen size.
✎ Adjusts the Zoom or Position by using u / d
button.
4:3: Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode.
✎ Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces
of borders displayed on the left, right and centre of
the screen may cause image retention (screen burn)
which are not covered by the warranty.
Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off when
HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component (720p / 1080i /
1080p) signals are inputted.
✎ Adjusts the Position by using u / d / l / r button.
✎NOTE
x Depending on the input source, the picture size options
may vary.
x The available items may differ depending on the
selected mode.
x When connecting a PC, only 16:9 and 4:3 modes can
be adjusted.
x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external
device connected to an input on the LED display.
x If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p
input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and right
as in the overscan function.
■ Zoom / Position:You can adjust picture size and position
by u / d / l / r button.
✎ It's only available when picture size is set as Zoom
and Wide Zoom.
✎ In Wide Zoom mode, you can only use Position
adjustment.
✎ Reset: Reset the Zoom and Position to the default
settings.
■ 4:3 Screen Size (16:9 / Wide Zoom / Zoom / 4:3):
Available only when picture size is set to Auto Wide.
You can determine the desired picture size at the 4:3
WSS (Wide Screen Service) size or the original size. Each
European country requires different picture size.
✎ Not available in HDMI , Component, and HDMI/DVI
mode.English 24
Basic Features
■ PC Screen Adjustment
✎ Available only PC mode.
x Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces picture noise.
If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone,
then adjust the frequency as best as possible
(Coarse) and Finetune again. After the noise has
been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is
aligned to the centre of screen.
x Position: Adjusts the PC screen position with
direction button (u / d / l / r).
x Image Reset: Resets the image to default settings.
Frequency values / position and fine tune are adjusted
Auto Adjustmentt
automatically.
✎It's only available in PC mode.
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
Depending on the version of Windows and the video card, the
actual screens on your PC may differ in which case the same
basic set-up information will almost always be applied. (If not,
contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.)
1. Click on “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu.
2. Click on “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel”
window and a display dialog-box will appear.
3. Click on “Display” and a display dialog box will appear.
4. Navigate to the “Settings” tab on the display dialog-box.
x The correct size setting (resolution) [Optimum: 1920 x
1080 pixels]. (T19B300: 1366 x 768 pixels)
x If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display
settings dialog box, the correct value is “60” or “60 Hz”.
Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box.
Maintaining the Correct Posture when Using this Product
Maintain the correct posture when using this product.
x Straighten your back.
x Keep a distance of 45~50 cm (15~19 inches) from your
eyes to the screen. Look down at the screen and face the
screen forwards.
x Adjust the angle of the product so that light is not reflected
onto the screen.
x Keep your elbow at a right angle and keep your arm level
with the back of your hand.
x Keep your elbow at a right angle.
x Place your heels flat on the ground while keeping your
knees at an angle of 90 degrees or higher and maintain the
position of your arm so that your arm is below your heart.
¦ Changing the Picture Options
Advanced Settings
MENUm→ Picture → Advanced Settings → ENTERE
(Advanced Settings are available in Standard / Movie mode)
Compared to previous models, new Samsung LED display have
a more precise picture.
✎When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to
White Balance.
Advanced Settings
RGB Only Mode Off
Colour Space Native
White Balance
Gamma 0
Dynamic Contrast High
Black Tone Off
Flesh Tone 0
■ Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium / High): Adjust
the screen contrast.
■ Black Tone (Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest): Select the
black level to adjust the screen depth.
■ Flesh Tone: Emphasize pink “Flesh Tone.”
■ RGB Only Mode (Off / Red / Green / Blue): Displays the
Red, Green and Blue colour for making fine adjustments to
the hue and saturation.
■ Colour Space (Auto / Native): Adjust the range of colours
available to create the image.
■ White Balance: Adjust the colour temperature for a more
natural picture.
R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each colour’s (red,
green, blue) darkness.
R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each colour’s (red,
green, blue) brightness.
Reset: Resets the White Balance to it’s default settings.
■ Gamma: Adjust the primary colour intensity.
■ Motion Lighting (Off / On): Reduce power consumption by
brightness control.English 25
Basic Features
Picture Options
MENUm→ Picture → Picture Options → ENTERE
✎When connecting a PC, you can only make changes to the
Colour Tone.
Picture Options
Colour Tone Standard
Digital Noise Filter Auto
MPEG Noise Filter Auto
HDMI Black Level Low
Film Mode Off
■ Colour Tone (Cool / Standard / Warm1 / Warm2)
✎ Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated when the
picture mode is Dynamic.
✎ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each
external device connected to an input on the LED
display.
■ Digital Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
/ Auto Visualisation): If the broadcast signal received by
your LED display is weak, you can activate the Digital
Noise Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that
may appear on the screen.
✎ When the signal is weak, try other options until the
best picture is displayed.
Auto Visualisation: When changing analogue channels,
displays signal strength.
✎ Only available for analogue channels.
✎ When bar is green, you are receiving the best
possible signal.
■ MPEG Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto):
Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved picture quality.
■ HDMI Black Level (Low / Normal): Selects the black level
on the screen to adjust the screen depth.
✎ Available only in HDMI mode (RGB signals).
■ Film Mode (Off / Auto1 / Auto2): Sets the LED display
to automatically sense and process film signals from all
sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality.
✎ Available in TV mode, HDMI (1080i).
✎ If the screen does not seem natural, change its
option to Off / Auto1 / Auto2 in Film Mode.
Reset Picture (Yes / No)
Resets your current picture mode to its default settings.
Sound Menu
¦ Changing the Preset Sound Mode
MENUm→ Sound → Sound Mode → ENTERE
Sound Mode t
■ Standard: Selects the normal sound mode.
■ Music: Emphasizes music over voices.
■ Movie: Provides the best sound for movies.
■ Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over other sounds.
■ Amplify: Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound to
allow a better listening experience for the hearing impaired.
✎If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker , Sound
Mode is disabled.
¦ Adjusting Sound Settings
Sound Effect
MENUm→ Sound → Sound Effect → ENTERE
(standard sound mode only)
This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound
■ SRS TruSurround HD(Off / On) t
experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head
Related Transfer Function) technology.
■ SRS TruDialog (Off / On)
This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice
over background music or sound effects so that dialog can
be heard more clearly.
■ Equalizer
Adjusts the sound mode.
– Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and
left speaker.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth
Adjustment): Adjusts the level of specific bandwidth
frequencies.
– Reset: Resets the equaliser to its default settings.English 26
Basic Features
¦ Sound Systems, Etc.
MENUm→ Sound → ENTERE
Broadcast Audio Options
■ Audio Language
(digital channels only)
Change the default value for audio languages.
✎ The available language may differ depending on the
broadcast.
■ Audio Format
(digital channels only)
Select the audio format.
■ Audio Description
(not available in all locations) (digital
channels only)
This function handles the Audio Stream
for the AD (Audio Description) which is
sent along with the Main audio from the
broadcaster.
✎ Audio Description (Off / On): Turn
the audio description function on
or off.
✎ Volume: Adjust the audio description volume.
Additional Settings
(digital channels only)
■ DTV Audio Level (MPEG / HE-AAC): This function allows
you to reduce the disparity of a voice signal (which is one
of the signals received during a digital TV broadcast) to a
desired level.
✎ According to the type of broadcast signal, MPEG /
HE-AAC can be adjusted between -10dB and 0dB.
✎ To increase or decrease the volume, adjust between
the range 0 and -10 respectively.
■ SPDIF Output: SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace) is
used to provide digital sound, reducing interference going
to speakers and various digital devices such as a DVD
player.
– Audio Format: You can select the Digital Audio output
(SPDIF) format.
✎ The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format
may differ depending on the input source.
– Audio Delay: Correct audio-video sync problems, when
watching TV or video, and when listening to digital audio
output using an external device such as an AV receiver
(0ms ~ 250ms).
✎ It's not available for TB300 series.
■ Dolby Digital Comp (Line / RF): This function minimizes
signal disparity between a dolby digital signal and a voice
signal (i.e. MPEG Audio, HE-AAC, ATV Sound).
✎ Select Line to obtain dynamic sound, and RF to
reduce the difference between loud and soft sounds
at night time.
Line: Set the output level for signals greater or less than
-31dB (reference) to either -20dB or -31dB.
RF: Set the output level for signals greater or less than
-20dB (reference) to either -10dB or -20dB.
Speaker Settings
■ Speaker Select (External Speaker / TV Speaker):A sound
echo may occur due to a difference indecoding speed
between the main speaker and theaudio receiver. In this
case, set the TV to External Speaker.
✎ When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker,
the volume and MUTE buttons will not operate and
the sound settings will be limited.
✎ When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.
x TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On
✎ When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker.
x TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On
✎ If there is no video signal, both speakers will be mute.
✎ It's not available for TB300 series.
■ Auto Volume (Off / Normal / Night): To equalize the
volume level on each channel, set to Normal.
Night: This mode provides an improved sound experience
compared to Normal mode, making almost no noise. It is
useful at night.
Reset Sound (Yes / No)
Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults.
¦ Selecting the Sound Mode t
When you set to Dual fg, the current sound mode is displayed
on the screen.
Audio
Type
Dual f-g Default
A2
Stereo
Mono Mono Automatic
Stereo Stereo ↔ Mono change
Dual Dual f ↔ Dual g Dual f
NICAM
Stereo
Mono Mono Automatic
Stereo Mono ↔ Stereo change
Dual
Mono ↔ Dual f
Dual g
Dual f
✎If the Stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching,
occurs, then switch to the Mono.
✎Only activated in stereo sound signal.
✎Only available when the input Source is set to TV.English 27
Basic Features
System Menu
¦ Setting the Time
MENUm→ System → ENTERE
Time
■ Clock: Setting the clock is for using various timer features
of the LED display.
✎ The current time will appear every time you press the
INFO button.
✎ If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the
clock again.
Clock Mode (Auto / Manual)
x Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time
from a digital channel.
✎ The antenna must be connected in order to set
the time automatically.
x Manual: Set the current time manually.
✎ Depending on the broadcast station and signal,
the auto time set up may not be correct. In this
case, set the time manually.
Clock Set: Set the Day, Month, Year, Hour and Minute
manually.
✎ Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual.
✎ You can set the Day, Month, Year, Hour and Minute
directly by pressing the number buttons on the
remote control.
Time Zone (Auto / Manual) (depending on the country):
Select your time zone.
✎ This function is only available when the Clock Mode
is set to Auto.
– GMT(GMT-3:00~GMT-1:00 / GMT /
GMT+1:00~GMT+ 12:00): Selects your time
zone.
✎ This function is only available when the Time
Zone is set to Manual.
– DST(Daylight Saving Time) (Off / On): Switches
the Daylight Saving Time function on or of off.
✎ This function is only available when the Time
Zone is set to Manual.
Using the Sleep Timer
■ Sleep Timer t: Automatically shuts off the LED
display after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150
and 180 minutes).
✎ To cancel Sleep Timer, select Off.
Setting the On / Off Timer
■ On Timer
On Timer 1 / On Timer 2 / On Timer 3: Three different on
timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first.
On Timer 1
Setup Off
Time 0:00
Volume 20
Source TV
Aerial DTV
Channel 1
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
R Return
Close
Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat,
Sat~Sun or Manual to set at your convenience. If you
select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate
the timer.
✎ The c mark indicates the day you've selected.
Time: Set the hour and minute.
Volume: Set the desired volume level.
Source: Select a desired input source when the LED
display is turned on automatically. (USB can be selected
only when a USB device is connected to the LED display)
Aerial (when the Source is set to TV): Select ATV or DTV.
Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired
channel.
Music / Photo (when the Source is set to USB): Select a
folder in the USB device containing music or photo files to
be played when the LED display is turned on automatically.
✎ NOTE
x If there is no music file on the USB device or the
folder containing a music file is not selected, the
Timer function does not operate correctly.
x When there is only one photo file in the USB, the
Slide Show will not play.
x If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be
selected.
x Each USB you use is assigned its own folder.
When using more than one of the same type of
USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB
have different names.
x It is recommended that you use a USB memory
stick and a multi card reader when using On
Timer.
x The On Timer function may not work with USB
devices with a built-in battery, MP3 players, or
PMPs made by some manufacturers because
these devices take a long time to be recognized.English 28
Basic Features
■ Off Timer
Off Timer 1 / Off Timer 2 / Off Timer 3: Three different off
timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first.
Off Timer 1
Setup Off
Time 0:00
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
R Return
Close
Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat,
Sat~Sun or Manual to set at your convenience. If you
select Manual, you can set up the day you want to activate
the timer.
✎ The c mark indicates the day you've selected.
Time: Set the hour and minute.
¦ Locking Programmes
MENUm→ System → Security → ENTERE
Security
✎The PIN input screen appears before the setup screen.
✎Enter your 4-digit PIN, the default of which is “0-0-0-0”.
Change the PIN using the Change PIN option.
■ Channel Lock (Off / On): Lock channels in Channel
Manager, to prevent unauthorized users, such as children,
from watching unsuitable programme.
✎ Available only when the input Source is set to TV.
■ Program Rating Lock (depending on the country): Prevent
unauthorized users, such as children, from watching
unsuitable programme with a user-defined 4-digit PIN
code. If selected channel is locked, the “\” symbol will be
displayed.
✎ The items of Program Rating Lock differs
depending on the country.
■ Change PIN: The Change PIN screen will appear. Choose
any 4 digits for your PIN and enter them. Change your
personal ID number required to set up the LED display.
Re-enter the same 4 digits. When the Confirm screen
disappears, your PIN has been memorised.
¦ Economical Solutions
MENUm→ System → Eco Solution → ENTERE
Eco Solution
■ tEnergy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture Off)
: This adjusts the brightness of the LED display
in order to reduce power consumption. If you select Picture
Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on.
Press any button except volume button to turn on the
screen.
■ No-Signal Power Off (Off / 15 min / 30 min / 60 min):
To avoid unnecessary energy consumption, set how long
you want the LED display to remain on if it’s not receiving
a signal.
✎ Disabled when the PC is in power saving mode.
■ Auto Power Off (Off / On): Saves power by turning LED
display off automatically when no user operation is received
for 4 hours.
¦ Other Features
MENUm→ System → ENTERE
Language
■ Menu Language: Set the menu language.
■ Teletext Language: Set a desired language for teletext.
✎ English is the default in cases where the selected
language is unavailable in the broadcast.
■ Preferred Language (Primary Audio / Secondary
Audio / Primary Subtitle / Secondary Subtitle): Select
a language, which will be the default language when a
channel is selected.
Subtitle
Use this menu to set the Subtitle mode.
■ Subtitle (Off / On): Switches subtitles
on or off.
■ Subtitle Mode (Normal / Hearing
Impaired): Sets the subtitle mode.
■ Subtitle Language: Sets the subtitle
language.
✎ If the programme you are watching does not
support the Hearing Impaired function, Preferred
automatically activates even if the Hearing Impaired
mode is selected.
✎ English is the default in cases where the selected
language is unavailable in the broadcast.English 29
Basic Features
Digital Text (Disable / Enable)
(UK only)
If the programme broadcasts with digital text, this feature is
enabled.
Auto Protection Time
■ Off / 2 hours / 4 hours / 8 hours / 10 hours: If the screen
remains idle with a still image for a certain period of time
defined by the user, the screen saver is activated to prevent
the formation of ghost images on the screen.
General
■ Max. Power Saving (Off / On): Turn off PC monitor when
PC is not used for certain length of time to reduce power
consumption.
■ Game Mode (Off / On): When connecting to a game
console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a
more realistic gaming experience by selecting game mode.
✎NOTE
x Precautions and limitations for game mode
– To disconnect the game console and connect another
external device, set Game Mode to Off in the setup
menu.
– If you display the LED display menu in Game Mode,
the screen shakes slightly.
x Game Mode is not available when the input source is
set to TV or PC.
x After connecting the game console, set Game Mode
to On. Unfortunately, you may notice reduced picture
quality.
x If Game Mode is On:
– Picture mode is set to Standard and Sound mode is
set to Movie.
■ Panel Lock (Off / On): Lock or unlock all the keys on the
front panel at once. When Panel Lock is on, none of the
keys on the front panel operate.
■ Boot Logo (Off / On): Display Samsung logo when the LED
display is turned on.
Common Interface
■ CI Menu: This enables the user to select from the CAMprovided menu. Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC
Card.
■ Application Info: View information on the CAM inserted
into the CI slot and on the “CI or CI+ CARD” which is
inserted into the CAM. You can install the CAM anytime
whether the LED display is on or off.
1. Purchase a CI CAM module at your nearest dealer or by
phone.
2. Firmly insert the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the CAM in the
direction of the arrow.
3. Insert the CAM with the “CI or CI+ CARD” into the common
interface slot, in the direction of the arrow so that it aligns
parallel with the slot.
4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal
channel.
¦ Picture In Picture (PIP)
MENUm→ System → PIP → ENTERE
You can watch the LED display tuner and one external video
PIP t
source simultaneously. PIP (Picture-in-Picture) does not function
in the same mode.
✎NOTE
x For PIP sound, refer to the Sound Select instructions.
x If you turn the LED display off while watching in PIP
mode, the PIP window will disappear.
x You may notice that the picture in the PIP window
becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main
screen to view a game or karaoke.
x While Program Rating Lock is in operation, the PIP
function cannot be used.
x PIP settings
Main picture Sub picture
HDMI, HDMI(PC), Component,
PC
TV
■ PIP (Off / On): Activate or deactivate the PIP function.
■ Channel: Select the channel for the sub-screen.
■ Size (Õ / Ã): Select a size for the sub-picture.
■ Position (à / – / — / œ): Select a position for the
sub-picture.
■ Sound Select (Main / Sub): You can choose the desired
sound (Main / Sub) in PIP mode.
¦ DivX® Video On Demand
Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect
to the DivX web site and register, you can download the VOD
registration file. If you play the VOD registration using Media
contents, the registration is
completed.
✎For more information on DivX® VOD, visit “http://vod.divx.
com”.English 30
Basic Features
Support Menu
MENUm→ Support → ENTERE
Self Diagnosis
✎Self Diagnosis might take few seconds, this is part of the
normal operation of the LED display
■ Picture Test (Yes / No): Use to check for picture problems.
Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise
in the test pattern, select Yes. There may be a problem
with the LED display. Contact Samsung’s Call Centre for
assistance.
No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No.
There may be a problem with your external equipment.
Please check your connections. If the problem persists,
refer to the external device’s user manual.
■ Sound Test (Yes / No): Use the built-in melody sound to
check for sound problems.
Yes: If you can hear sound only from one speaker or not
at all during the sound test, select Yes. There may be a
problem with the LED display. Contact Samsung’s Call
Centre for assistance.
No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No.
There may be a problem with your external equipment.
Please check your connections. If the problem persists,
refer to the external device’s user manual.
■ Signal Information: (digital channels only) An HD channel’s
reception quality is either perfect or the channels are
unavailable. Adjust your antenna to increase signal strength.
■ Reset: Restores all settings to factory defaults except
network settings.
Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade can be performed via a broadcasting signal
or downloading the latest firmware from “www.samsung.com,”
to a USB memory device.
Current Version the software already installed in the LED
display.
✎Software is represented as “Year/Month/Day_Version”.
Software Upgrade
By USB
By Channel
Alternative Software
Standby Mode Upgrade 2 hours later
Installing the Latest Version
■ By USB: Insert
a USB drive
containing
the firmware
upgrade file,
downloaded from
“www.samsung.com,” into the TV. Please be careful not
to disconnect the power or remove the USB drive until
upgrades are complete. The TV will be turned off and on
automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. When
software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have
made will return to their default settings. We advise you to
write down your settings so that you can easily reset them
after the upgrade.
■ By Channel: Upgrade the software using the broadcasting
signal.
✎ If the function is selected during the software
transmission period, software will be automatically
searched and downloaded.
✎ The time required to download the software is
determined by the signal status.
■ Alternative Software: Replace the current software with
the alternative.
■ Standby Mode Upgrade (Off / 1 hour later / 2 hours later
/ 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00): A manual upgrade will be
automatically performed at selected time. Since the power
of the unit is turned on internally, the screen may be turned
on slightly for the LED product. This phenomenon may
continue for more than 1 hour until the software upgrade is
complete.
Contact Samsung
View this information when your LED display does not work
properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can
find information regarding our call centres, and how to download
products and software.
Contents Home
You can enjoy useful and various contents.
TV Side
USB DriveEnglish 31
Advanced Features
Enjoy videos, photos, music files saved on a USB Mass
Storage Class (MSC) device.
1. Press the CONTENT button.
2. Press the l / r button to select desired menu (Media
Play), then press the ENTERE button.
CONTENT → Media Play → ENTERE
Using the Media Play
¦ Connecting a USB Device
1. Turn on your TV.
2. Connect a USB device containing photo and music files to the USB jack on the side
of the TV.
3. When USB is connected to the TV, popup window appears. Then you can select
Device connected.
✎It might not work properly with unlicenced multimedia files.
✎Need-to-Know List before using Media Play.
x MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
x The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS.
x Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV.
x Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport
device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported). Devices
should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port.
x USB (HDD) is not supported.
x Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG
is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss.
x Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading.
x The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen.
x The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360 x 8640 pixels.
x For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message is displayed.
x MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM)
is a technology that supports the creation, distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive
way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of
contents, as well as managing billings and settlements.
x If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time.
x If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be recognized. A USB device that requires high power
(more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported.
x If an over-power warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device, the device may not be
recognized or may malfunction.
Media Play / Videos /
3.23GB Free / 3.55GB
Cruzer Blade
Videos
Photos
Music
R Return
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
TV Side
USB DriveEnglish 32
Advanced Features
x If the TV has been no input during time set in Auto Protection Time, the Screensaver will run.
x The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when connected to the TV.
x If a USB extension cable is used, the USB device may not be recognized or the files on the device may not be read.
x If a USB device connected to the TV is not recognized, the list of files on the device is corrupted or a file in the list is not
played, connect the USB device to the PC, format the device and check the connection.
x Media Play only supports sequential jpeg format.
¦ Screen Display
Move to the desired file using the u / d / l / r buttons and then press the ENTERE button. The file is played. Media Play
screen may differ depending on the way to enter the screen.
Contents mode:
You can select the desired
Content Category.
Information:
Displays the selected content
category (Music, for example),
device (USB drive,for example),
folder/file name and page.
Displays the selected file
information.
Upper Folder
Video_02
1.Jan.2012
Video_02.AVI
1.Jan.2012
17.6MB
Video_03
1.Jan.2012
Video_04
1.Jan.2012
Video_05
1.Jan.2012
Video_06
1.Jan.2012
Video_07
1.Jan.2012
Video_08
1.Jan.2012
Video_01
1.Jan.2012
Media Play / Videos / Cruzer.../Video_02.AVI 2 / 8
�µ Page Move E Play T Tools R Return
Operation Buttons
• �Turn to the previous page. Only available in Music.
• µTurn to the next page. Only available in Music.
• E Play: Play the media file.
• T Tools: Displays the option menu.
• R Return: Move to the previous step.
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.English 33
Advanced Features
Videos
Playing Video
1. Press the l / r / u / d button to select the desired video in the
file list.
2. Press the ENTERE button or ∂ (Play) button.
x The selected file name is displayed on the top with its playing
time.
x If video time information is unknown, play time and progress
bar are not displayed.
x During video playback, you can search using l and r button.
x You can use π (REW) and µ (FF) buttons during
playback.
✎ In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a
Game, but you cannot play the Game itself.
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Supported Subtitle Formats
– External
Name Extension
MPEG-4 Timed text .ttxt
SAMI .smi
SubRip .srt
SubViewer .sub
Micro DVD .sub or .txt
SubStation Alpha .ssa
Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass
Powerdivx .psb
– Internal
Name Container
Xsub AVI
SubStation Alpha MKV
Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV
SubRip MKV
MPEG-4 Timed text MP4English 34
Advanced Features
Supported Video Formats
File
Extension
Container Video Codec Resolution
Frame rate
(fps)
Bit rate
(Mbps)
Comments Audio Codec
*.avi
*.mkv
*.asf
*.wmv
*.mp4
*.3gp
*.vro
*.mpg
*.mpeg
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
*.m2ts
*.mts
*.divx
AVI
MKV
ASF
MP4
3GP
VRO
VOB
PS
TS
DivX 3.11 / 4.x
/ 5.1 / 6.0
1920 x 1080
30
20 [40]
GMC Not Support
AC3
LPCM
ADMPCM(IMA, MS)
AAC
HE-AAC
WMA
DD+
MPEG(MP3)
DTS Core
Vorbis
MPEG4 SP /
ASP
H.264 BP / MP
/ HP
Not Include FMO / ASO / RS
Support BP / MP / HP Level 4.1
H.263
Profile3, restricted up to SD
resolution
Motion JPEG 640 x 480 10
Window Media
Video v9
1920 x 1080 20 [40]
VC1 SP / MP / A P L3 Support,
L4 Not Support
Simple Profile Medium Level
Main Profile High Level
Advanced Profile Level 3
WMV9 support
MPEG2 Hight Profile High Level
MPEG1 MPEG-1 except D-pictureEnglish 35
Advanced Features
Other Restrictions
✎NOTE
x If there are problems with the contents of a codec, the codec will not be supported.
x If the information for a Container is incorrect and the file is in error, the Container will not be able to play correctly.
x Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bitrate/frame rate above the compatible Frame/ sec listed in
the table above.
x If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported.
x You may experience file stuttering while playing a video through a network connection.
Name Format
x Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1
x H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 and
AVCHD are not supported.
x MPEG4 SP, ASP:
– Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max
– Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max
x GMC 2 over is not supported.
x Supports up to WMA 7, 8, 9, STD
x WMA 9 PRO does not support 2 channel excess multi
channel or lossless audio.
x WMA sampling rate 22050Hz mono is not supported.
Photos
Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show)
1. Press the u / d / l / r button to select the desired photo in
the file list.
2. Press the ENTERE button.
– When a selected photo is displayed, press the ENTERE
button to start the slide show.
– During the slide show, all files in the file list will be displayed
in order.
✎Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show
if the Background Music is set to On.
✎The Background Music cannot be changed until the BGM
has finished loading.
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
0801181247070.JPG
1.Jan.2012
663.0KB
1920 x 1080
�µPage Move E Play T Tools R Return
Media Play / Photos / Cruzer... / Photos / 0801181... .JPG
7 / 1000
Upper Folder
Supported Picture Formats
File Extension Format Resolution
*.jpg JPEG 15360 x 8640
*.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080
*.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640English 36
Advanced Features
Music
Playing Music
1. Press the u / d button to select the desired Music in the file
list.
2. Press the ENTERE button.
✎Only displays the files with the file extension in following
supported music formats list. Other file extensions are not
displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device.
✎If the sound is abnormal when playing MP3 files, adjust the
Equaliser in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file
may cause a sound problem.)
• The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Media Play / Music / Cruzer... / Music / Music_01.mp3
Music_01 Singer 1
Music_02 Singer 2
Music_01
Singer 1
2003
Fallen
Other
2:36 / 5:00
Music_03 Singer 3
Music_04 Singer 4
Music_05 Singer 5
Music_06 Singer 6
Music_07 Singer 7
Music_08 Singer 8
Music_09 Singer 9
Upper Folder
b{ Page Move EPlay T Tools R Return
Playing selected music
1. Press the TOOLST button and select Play Selection.
2. Select the desired music.
✎ The c mark appears to the left of the selected files.
3. Press the TOOLST button and select Play Selection.
✎ You can select or deselect all music pressing the Select All / Deselect All.
Supported Music Formats
File Extension Type Codec
*.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
*.m4a
*.mpa
*.aac
*.3ga
MPEG4 AAC
*.flac FLAC FLAC
*.ogg OGG Vorbis
*.wma WMA WMAEnglish 37
Advanced Features
¦ Media Play - Additional Functions
Videos/Photos/Music Play Option menu
Press the TOOLST button and you can make the following operations.
Category Operations Videos Photos Music
Shuffle Mode You can play the music randomly. >
Repeat Mode You can play media files repeatedly. > >
Picture Mode You can adjust the picture setting. > >
Sound Mode You can adjust the sound setting. > > >
Start Slide Show
/ STOP Slide Show
You can start or pause a Slide Show. >
Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. >
Background Music You can on/off background music when watching a Slide Show. >
Background Music Setting You can select background music when watching a Slide Show. >
Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode. >
Rotate You can rotate images in full screen mode. >
Information You can see detailed information about the played file. > > >
Play Selection You can play the items what you selected. > > >
Title Search You can move directly to another Title. >
Time Search You can search the movie using l and r buttons at intervals of
1 minute. >
Picture Size You can adjust the picture size to your preference. >
Subtitle You can set the subtitle On / Off. >
Subtitle Settings Play a video file with captions displayed. This option is available only
when the caption file name matches the video file name. >
Audio language View a video in a supported language of your choice. The option is
available only when a stream-type file that supports multiple audio
formats is played.
>English 38
Other Information
Analogue Channel Teletext Feature
The index page of the Teletext service gives you information on how to use the service. For Teletext information to be displayed
correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some pages may not be displayed.
✎You can change Teletext pages by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
1 / (Teletext on/mix/off):
Activates the Teletext mode for the
current channel. Press the button
twice to overlap the Teletext mode
with the current broadcasting
screen. Press it one more time to
exit teletext.
2 8 (store): Stores the Teletext
pages.
3 6 (index): Displays the index
(contents) page at any time while
you are viewing Teletext.
4 4 (size): Displays the teletext
on the upper half of the screen in
double-size. To move the text to
the lower half of the screen, press
it again. For normal display, press it
once again.
5 9 (hold): Holds the display at the
current page, in the case that there
are several secondary pages that
follow automaticially. To undo, press
it again.
6 Colour buttons (red, green, yellow,
blue): If the FASTEXT system is
used by the broadcasting company,
the different topics on a Teletext
page are colour-coded and can
be selected by pressing the
coloured buttons. Press the colour
corresponding to the topic of your
choice. A new colour-coded page
is displayed. Items can be selected
in the same way. To display the
previous or next page, press the
corresponding coloured button.
7 0 (mode): Selects the Teletext
mode (LIST/ FLOF).
If pressed during LIST mode,
switches the mode to List save
mode. In List save mode, you can
save a Teletext page into a list using
the 8(store) button.
8 1 (sub-page): Displays the
available sub-page.
9 2 (page up): Displays the next
Teletext page.
0 3 (page down): Displays the
previous Teletext page.
! 5 (reveal): Displays the hidden
text (answers to quiz games, for
example). To display the normal
screen, press it again.
@ 7 (cancel): Shrinks the Teletext
display to overlap with the current
broadcast.
Typical Teletext page
Part Contents
A Selected page number.
B Broadcasting channel
identity.
C Current page number
or search indications.
D Date and time.
E Text.
F Status information.
FASTEXT information.
7
8
9
0
!
@
3
1
4
5
6
2English 39
Other Information
Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand
Preparing before installing Wall-Mount/Desktop Stand
1. Turn the product off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Place a soft cloth or cushion on a flat surface to protect the panel and place the product face down.
3. Hold the main body of the product with your hand. Pull the stand in the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure to separate
it.
Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand
1
A
2
3 4
A B Wall mount kit/desktop stand (not supplied)
A Wall/Desktop Stand Mount B
[ Caution
Important
For the installation of Wall-mount, please don’t use screws longer than 14mm(L14) of longitude.
4. Align wall mount/desktop stand to the Monitor/LED display and firmly fix the wall mount/desktop stand by fastening the screw.
5. Align the groove of the part of the product that is to be connected to the stand with the groove in the stand (desk-top stand, wall
mount stand or another stand) and firmly fix the stand by fastening the screw.English 40
Other Information
✎NOTE
x If you use screws that are longer than the standard specifications, the inside of the product may be damaged.
x For wall mounts that are not compatible with the standard VESA specifications, the length of the screw may differ depending
on the corresponding specifications.
x Avoid using screws that are incompatible with the standard VESA specifications and avoid assembling them using excessive
force. This may result in damage to the product or injury due to the product falling. Samsung shall not be held liable for any
damage or injury.
x Samsung shall not be held liable for any damage to the product or injury caused by using a wall mount/desktop stand that is
not compatible with the specifications or due to an installation not performed by an authorized installation engineer.
x When installing the product using a wall mount, purchase a wall mount that provides at least 10 cm (3.93 inches) of space
from the wall.
x Use the wall mount according to the international specifications.
Anti-theft Kensington Lock
The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to physically fix the
system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ
from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the
Kensington Lock for additional information on proper use.
✎Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the LED display. A kensington slot is beside
the “K” icon.
To lock the product, follow these steps:
1. Wrap the Kensington lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or
chair.
2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the
Kensington lock cable.
3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product (1).
4. Lock the lock.
1
✎These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied with the locking device.
✎The locking device has to be purchased separately.
✎The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the LED display model.English 41
Other Information
Troubleshooting
If you have any questions about the LED display, first refer to this list. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, please visit “www.
samsung.com,” then click on Support, or contact the call centre listed on the back-cover of this manual.
Issues Solutions and Explanations
Picture Quality First of all, please perform the Picture Test and confirm that your LED display is properly displaying test
image. (go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test) If the test image is properly displayed, the
poor picture may caused by the source or signal.
The LED display image does not look as
good as it did in the store.
• If you have an analogue cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI to deliver HD
(high definition) picture quality.
• Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from the channel line up.
• Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto tuning.
✎ Many HD channels are up scaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents.
• Adjust the Cable/Set top box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.
• Make sure you are watching the LED display at the minimum recommended distance based on the
size and definition of the signal.
The picture is distorted: macroblock error,
small block, dots, pixelization
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially in fast moving pictures such
as sports and action movies.
• Low signal level or bad quality can cause picture distortion. This is not a LED display issue.
• Mobile phones used close to the LED display (cca up to 1m) may cause noise in picture on analogue
and digital LED display.
There is poor colour or brightness. • Adjust the Picture options in the LED display menu. (go to Picture Mode / Colour / Brightness /
Sharpness)
• Adjust Energy Saving option in the LED display menu. (go to MENU - System - Eco Solution -
Energy Saving)
• Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings. (go to MENU - Picture - Reset Picture)
There is a dotted line on the edge of the
screen.
• If the picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9.
• Change cable/satellite box resolution.
When changing channels, the picture
freezes or is distorted or delayed.
• If connected with a cable box, please try to reset the cable box. Reconnect the AC cord and wait until
the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes.
• Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p.
Sound Quality First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your LED display audio is properly operating. (go
to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test)
If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal.
There is no sound or the sound is too low
at maximum volume.
• Please check the volume of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your LED
display.
The picture is good but there is no sound. • If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, LED display set does not support audio.
• Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable.
• If your LED display has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it.
The speakers are making an inappropriate
noise.
• For antenna or cable connections, check the signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound
distortion.
No Picture, No Video
The LED display will not turn on. • Make sure the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the wall outlet and the LED display.
• Make sure the wall outlet is working.
• Try pressing the POWER button on the LED display to make sure the problem is not the remote. If the
LED display turns on, refer to “The remote control does not work” below.
The LED display turns off automatically. • Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off in the Time menu.
• If your PC is connected to the LED display, check your PC power settings.
• Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the LED display.
• When watching LED display from an antenna or cable connection, the LED display will turn off after
10 ~ 15 minutes if there is no signal.English 42
Other Information
Issues Solutions and Explanations
There is no picture/video. • Check cable connections (remove and reconnect all cables connected to the LED display and
external devices).
• Set your external devices’ (Cable/Set top Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match the
connections to the LED display input. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, it should be
connected to an HDMI input on the LED display.
• Make sure your connected devices are powered on.
• Be sure to select the LED display correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the LED display
remote.
• Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable.
RF(Cable/Antenna) Connection
The LED display is not receiving all
channels.
• Make sure the Antenna cable is connected securely.
• Please try Setup (Initial setup) to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - System -
Setup (Initial setup) and wait for all available channels to be stored.
• Verify the Antenna is positioned correctly.
The picture is distorted: macro block error
small block, dots, pixelization.
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially on fast moving pictures such
as sports and action movies.
• A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a LED display issue.
Others
The picture will not display in full screen. • HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3)
contents.
• Black bars on the top and bottom will appear during movies that have aspect ratios different from
your LED display.
• Adjust the picture size options on your external device or LED display to full screen.
The remote control does not work. • Replace the remote control batteries with the poles (+/–) in the right direction.
• Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote.
• Try pointing the remote directly at the LED display from 5~6 feet away.
The cable/set top box remote control
doesn’t turn the LED display on or off, or
adjust the volume.
• Programme the Cable/Set top box remote control to operate the LED display. Refer to the Cable/Set
user manual for the SAMSUNG LED display code.
A “Mode Not Supported” message
appears.
• Check the supported resolution of the LED display, and adjust the external device’s output resolution
accordingly.
There is a plastic smell from the LED
display.
• This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.
The LED display Signal Information is
unavailable in the Self Diagnosis Test
menu.
• This function is only available with digital channels from an Antenna / RF / Coax connection.
LED display is tilted to the right or left side. • Remove the stand base from the LED display and reassemble it.
There are difficulties assembling the stand
base.
• Make sure the LED display is placed on a flat surface. If you can not remove the screws from the LED
display, please use a magnetized screw driver.
The Channel menu is grey out
(unavailable).
• The Channel menu is only available when the LED display source is selected.
Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or
every time the LED display is turned off.
• If the LED display is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30
minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Setup (Initial setup)
procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, and go to MENU → System → Setup
(Initial setup) → ENTERE.
You have intermittent loss of audio or
video.
• Check the cable connections and reconnect them.
• Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables
are flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the LED display to the wall, we recommend using
cables with 90 degree connectors.
You see small particles when you look
closely at the edge of the frame of the LED
display.
• This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.English 43
Other Information
Issues Solutions and Explanations
The PIP menu is not available. • PIP functionality is only available when you are using a HDMI source.
You turned the LED display off 45 minutes
ago, and it turned on again.
• It is normal. The LED display operates the OTA (Over The Aerial) function itself to upgrade firmware
downloaded whilst your watching LED display.
The message “Scramble signal” or “Weak
Signal/No Signal” appears.
• If you are using a CAM CARD (CI/CI+), check that it is installed into the common interface slot.
• If there is still a problem, pull the CAM CARD out of the LED display and insert it into the slot again.
There are recurrent picture/sound issues. • Check and change the signal/source.
A reaction may occur between the rubber
cushion pads on the base stand and the
top finish of some furniture.
• To prevent this, use felt pads on any surface of the LED display that comes in direct contact with
furniture.
✎This panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there may be a
few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product.
¦ Storage and Maintenance
✎If you attched some stickers on the LED display screen, it remains some debris after removing the sticker. Please clean it to
watch LED display.
✎The exterior and screen of the product can get scratched during cleaning. Be sure to wipe the exterior and screen carefully
using the cloth provided or a soft cloth to prevent scratches.
Do not spray water or a cleaning agent directly onto the product.
Any liquid that goes into the product may cause a failure, fire, or
electric shock.
Clean the product with a soft cloth dapped in a small amount of
water.
[CAUTION
If the height of " A" on one side is different from the other side,
adjust the heights.English 44
Other Information
¦ Licence
TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
TheaterSound HD technology is incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
2.0 Channel
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
(Only available in TB300 series)
Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the
Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks
of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
(Only available in TB350 series)
Open source licence notice
In the case of using open source software, Open Source licence are available on the product menu.
Open Source Licence Notice is written only English.
¦ WEEE
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger,
headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible
harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste
and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the
retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items
for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase
contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other
household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery
contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of,
these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material
reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.English 45
Other Information
Specifications
Environmental
considerations
Operating
Temperature : 50°F ~ 104°F (10°C ~ 40°C)
Humidity : 10 % ~ 80 %, non-condensing
Storage
Temperature : -4°F ~ 113°F (-20°C ~ 45°C)
Humidity : 5 % ~ 95 %, non-condensing
Tilt -1°(±2°) ~ 20°(±2°)
LED display System
Analogue: B/G, D/K, L, I (Depending on your country selection)
Digital: DVB-T/DVB-C
Colour/Video System
Analogue: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60
Digital: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0
Sound System BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC
HDMI IN
Video: 1080 24p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 480p
Audio: 2Ch Linear PCM 32/44.1/48kHz, 16/20/24bits.
Model Name T19B300 T22B300 T24B300 T27B300
Screen Size (Diagonal) 18.5 inches (47 cm) 21.5 inches (55 cm) 23.6 inches (60 cm) 27 inches (69 cm)
Display Resolution 1366 x 768 @ 60Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz
Sound (Output) 5W × 2
Dimensions
(WxDxH)
(Without Stand)
444.7 x 48.5 x 278.2 mm
(17.5 x 1.9 x 11.0 inches)
509.7 x 47 x 318.2 mm
(20.1 x 1.9 x 12.5 inches)
569.2 x 49 x 349.4 mm
(22.4 x 1.9 x 13.8 inches)
643.3 x 49 x 397.9 mm
(25.3 x 1.9 x 15.7 inches)
(With Stand)
444.7 x 187 x 356.4 mm
(17.5 x 7.4 x 14.0 inches)
509.7 x 195 x 396.6 mm
(20.1 x 7.7 x 15.6 inches)
569.2 x 195 x 428 mm
(22.4 x 7.7 x 16.9 inches)
643.3 x 252 x 476.5 mm
(25.3 x 9.9 x 18.8 inches)
Weight
(Without Stand) 2.95 kg (6.5 Ibs) 3.7 kg (8.2 Ibs) 4.25 kg (9.4 Ibs) 5.1 kg (11.2 Ibs)
(With Stand) 3.2 kg (7.1 Ibs) 3.95 kg (8.7 Ibs) 4.5 kg (9.9 Ibs) 5.6 kg (12.3 Ibs)
Model Name T22B350 T23B350 T24B350
Screen Size (Diagonal) 21.5 inches (55 cm) 23 inches (58 cm) 24 inches (61 cm)
Display Resolution 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz
Sound (Output) 5W × 2
Dimensions
(WxDxH)
(Without Stand)
509.7 x 47 x 318.2 mm
(20.1 x 1.9 x 12.5 inches)
547.5 x 49 x 337.9 mm
(21.6 x 1.9 x 13.3 inches)
569.2 x 49 x 349.4 mm
(22.4 x 1.9 x 13.8 inches)
(With Stand)
509.7 x 195 x 396.6 mm
(20.1 x 7.7 x 15.6 inches)
547.5 x 195 x 416.1 mm
(21.6 x 7.7 x 16.4 inches)
569.2 x 195 x 428 mm
(22.4 x 7.7 x 16.9 inches)
Weight
(Without Stand) 3.7 kg (8.2 Ibs) 3.25 kg (7.2 Ibs) 4.15 kg (9.1 Ibs)
(With Stand) 3.95 kg (8.7 Ibs) 3.5 kg (7.7 Ibs) 4.45 kg (9.8 Ibs)
✎NOTE
x Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
x For information about power supply, and more about power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
x Some models may not be available for purchase depending on the region.
x If there is no power cut-off switch, the power consumption is "0" only when the power cord is disconnected.
x DPM(Display Power Management) Function does not work if you used in conjunction with the HDMI IN (DVI) port of this
product.País del Centro de atención al cliente Sitio web
EUROPE
ALBANIA 42 27 5755 http://www.samsung.com
AUSTRIA 0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) http://www.samsung.com
BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 http://www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
http://www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
BOSNIA 05 133 1999 http://www.samsung.com
BULGARIA 07001 33 11 http://www.samsung.com
CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864) http://www.samsung.com
CZECH 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) http://www.samsung.com
Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o.,Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská 394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK 70 70 19 70 http://www.samsung.com
FINLAND 030 - 6227 515 http://www.samsung.com
FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 http://www.samsung.com
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864, € 0,14/Min) http://www.samsung.com
CYPRUS From landline : 8009 4000 http://www.samsung.com
GREECE From landline : 80111-SAMSUNG (7267864)
From landline & mobile : (+30)210 6897691
http://www.samsung.com
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
KOSOVO +381 0113216899 http://www.samsung.com
LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 http://www.samsung.com
MACEDONIA 023 207 777 http://www.samsung.com
MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 http://www.samsung.com
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) ( € 0,10/Min) http://www.samsung.com
NORWAY 815-56 480 http://www.samsung.com
POLAND 0 801-1SAMSUNG (172-678) +48 22 607-93-33 http://www.samsung.com
PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (808207267) http://www.samsung.com
RUMANIA From landline : 08010-SAMSUNG (7267864)
From landline & mobile : (+40)21 206 01 10
http://www.samsung.com
SERBIA 0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726 7864) http://www.samsung.com
SLOVAKIA 0800 - SAMSUNG (0800-726 786) www.samsung.com/sk
SPAIN 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) http://www.samsung.com
SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) http://www.samsung.com
SWITZERLAND 0848 - SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) http://www.samsung.com/ch
http://www.samsung.com/ch_fr (French)
U.K 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) http://www.samsung.com
EIRE 0818 717100 http://www.samsung.com
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 http://www.samsung.com
LATVIA 8000-7267 http://www.samsung.com
ESTONIA 800-7267 http://www.samsung.com
TURKEY 444 77 11 http://www.samsung.com
CIS
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 http://www.samsung.com
GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 http://www.samsung.com
ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 http://www.samsung.com
AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 http://www.samsung.com
KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500(GSM: 7799) http://www.samsung.com
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.© 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. BN46-00196T-02
País del Centro de atención al cliente Sitio web
MONGOLIA http://www.samsung.com
UKRAINE 0-800-502-000 http://www.samsung.com/ua
http://www.samsung.com/ua_ru
BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
ASIA PACIFIC
AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 http://www.samsung.com
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) http://www.samsung.com
CHINA 400-810-5858 http://www.samsung.com
HONG KONG (852) 3698 - 4698 http://www.samsung.com/hk
http://www.samsung.com/hk_en/
INDIA 1800 1100 11
3030 8282
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
http://www.samsung.com
INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 http://www.samsung.com
JAPAN 0120-327-527 http://www.samsung.com
MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 http://www.samsung.com
PHILIPPINES 1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for PLDT
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Digitel
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Globe02-5805777
http://www.samsung.com
SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
THAILAND 1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
http://www.samsung.com
TAIWAN 0800-329-999
0266-026-066
http://www.samsung.com
VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 http://www.samsung.com
MIDDLE EAST
IRAN 021-8255 http://www.samsung.com
OMAN 800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
KUWAIT 183-2255 http://www.samsung.com
BAHRAIN 8000-4726 http://www.samsung.com
EGYPT 08000-726786 http://www.samsung.com
JORDAN 800-22273 http://www.samsung.com
MOROCCO 080 100 2255 http://www.samsung.com
SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230 http://www.samsung.com
U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
AFRICA
CAMEROON 7095- 0077 http://www.samsung.com
COTE D’ IVOIRE 8000 0077 http://www.samsung.com
GHANA 0800-10077 http://www.samsung.com
0302-200077
KENYA 0800 724 000 http://www.samsung.com
NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 http://www.samsung.com
SENEGAL 800-00-0077 http://www.samsung.com
SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864) http://www.samsung.com
TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 http://www.samsung.com
UGANDA 0800 300 300 http://www.samsung.com
Монитор LED TV
(MFM TV)
руководство пользователя
Благодарим вас за приобретение этого
изделия Samsung. Чтобы получить
сервисное обслуживание в полном объеме,
зарегистрируйте ваше изделие по адресу
TB300
TB350Русский 2
Иллюстрации в данном руководстве приведены только для справки и могут отличаться от фактического внешнего вида изделия.
Внешний вид и характеристики изделия могут изменяться без уведомления.
Просмотр цифрового телевидения
1. Относящиеся к цифровому телевидению (DVB) функции доступны только в тех странах или регионах, в которых осуществляется вещание цифрового
телевизионного сигнала DVB-T (MPEG2 и MPEG4 AVC) или в которых есть кабельное телевидение, совместимое со стандартом DVB-C (MPEG2 и MPEG4
AAC). По вопросам возможности приема сигнала DVB-T или DVB-C обращайтесь к местному дилеру.
2. DVB-T — это стандарт эфирного цифрового телевизионного вещания европейского консорциума DVB, а DVB-C — это стандарт кабельного цифрового
телевизионного вещания.
3. Этот LED-дисплей соответствует новейшим стандартам DVB-T и DVB-C (по состоянию на август 2008 года), однако совместимость с будущими стандартами
эфирного (DVB-T) и кабельного (DVB-C) цифрового вещания не гарантируется.
4. В некоторых странах или регионах провайдеры кабельного телевидения могут взимать дополнительную плату за такие услуги, и от вас может
потребоваться согласие с условиями предоставления их услуг.
5. Некоторые функции цифрового телевидения могут быть недоступны в некоторых странах и регионах, а реализация стандарта DVB-C может оказаться не
полностью совместимой с некоторыми провайдерами кабельного телевидения.
6. Для получения дополнительной информации обратитесь в местный сервисный центр Samsung.
✎ На качество приема могут оказывать влияние различия в методах трансляции, используемых в разных странах. Проверьте работу LED-дисплея
у местного авторизованного дилера SAMSUNG или обратитесь в центр поддержки Samsung, чтобы узнать, можно ли улучшить качество приема,
изменяя настройки телевизора.
Просмотр неподвижных изображений — предупреждение
Избегайте продолжительного отображения на дисплее неподвижных изображений (например, картинок в формате jpeg) или неподвижных элементов (например,
логотипа телевизионной программы, изображения в панорамном формате или формате 4:3, строки новостей или котировок внизу экрана и т. д.). Постоянное
отображение неподвижных изображений может вызвать появление ореола и повлиять на качество изображения. Чтобы снизить риск появления этого эффекта,
выполняйте следующие рекомендации:
• Не смотрите один и тот же канал в течение длительного времени.
• Всегда старайтесь вывести изображение во весь экран, используйте меню формата изображения для выбора формата, который подходит лучше всего.
• Снизьте яркость и контрастность до минимальных значений, необходимых для обеспечения требуемого качества изображения. Слишком большие значения могут ускорить процесс выгорания.
• Часто используйте все функции LED-дисплея, предназначенные для предотвращения образования остаточного изображения и выгорания. Подробную информацию см. в соответствующем
разделе руководства пользователя.
Место установки
Между изделием и другими объектами (например, стенами) должно быть достаточное свободное пространство, чтобы обеспечить необходимую вентиляцию.
Несоблюдение этого требования может стать причиной возгорания или повреждения изделия из-за повышения внутренней температуры изделия.
✎ Фактический внешний вид LED-дисплея может отличаться от изображений в данном руководстве в зависимости от модели.
✎ Будьте осторожны, касаясь LED-дисплея. Некоторые детали могут быть достаточно горячими.
Установка на подставке. Настенная установка.
10 см
10 см 10 см
10 см
10 см
10 см
10 см
• Плата за обслуживание может взиматься в следующих случаях:
– (a) Специалист прибыл по вашему запросу, но не была обнаружена неисправность изделия
(например, вы не прочитали это руководство пользователя).
– (b) Вы доставили изделие в сервисный центр, но не была обнаружена неисправность изделия
(например, вы не прочитали это руководство пользователя).
• Размер платы за обслуживание будет сообщен заранее перед выполнением любых работ или выездом специалиста на дом.3
РУССКИЙ
Русский
Проверьте символ!
Эту функцию можно вызвать, нажав кнопку
t TOOLST на
пульте ДУ.
Примечание.
Указывает на дополнительную информацию.
Содержание
Приступая к работе
4
4 Меры предосторожности
11 Принадлежности
12 Панель управления — внешний вид
13 Пульт дистанционного управления — внешний вид
Подключение
14
14 Подключение антенны
14 Настройка (первоначальная настройка)
15 Подключение к аудиовидеоустройству
16 Подключение к разъему «Общий интерфейс»
17 Подключение к аудиоустройству и ПК
19 Выбор источника сигнала
Основные функции
19
19 Навигация в меню
20 Использование кнопки INFO (телегид текущих и следующих
программ)
20 Использование меню «Канал»
22 Меню «Канал»
23 Меню «Изображение»
25 Меню «Звук»
27 Меню «Система»
30 Меню «Поддержка»
Дополнительные функции
31
31 Использование функции Media Play
Другая информация
38
38 Функция «Телетекст» для аналоговых каналов
39 Крепление кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной
подставки
40 Замок «кенсингтон» для защиты от кражи
41 Устранение неполадок
45 Технические характеристики4
Приступая к работе
Русский
Меры предосторожности
Символы, используемые для обозначения мер предосторожности
ПРеДУПРежДеНИе
Несоблюдение мер предосторожности, отмеченных этим символом, может
привести к серьезным травмам или даже к смертельному исходу.
ОСТОРОжНО
Несоблюдение мер предосторожности, отмеченных этим символом, может
стать причиной травм или материального ущерба.
Не делать.
Следует соблюдать.
ОСТОРОЖНО
ОПАСНОСТЬ ПОРАЖЕНИЯ ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ, НЕ ОТКРЫВАТЬ
ОСТОРОжНО: ЧТОБЫ СНИЗИТЬ РИСК ПОРАжеНИЯ ЭЛеКТРИЧеСКИМ
ТОКОМ, Не СНИМАЙТе КРЫШКУ (ИЛИ ЗАДНЮЮ СТеНКУ). ВНУТРИ
НеТ УЗЛОВ, ПОДЛежАЩИХ ОБСЛУжИВАНИЮ. ВСе РАБОТЫ
ПО СеРВИСНОМУ ОБСЛУжИВАНИЮ ДОЛжНЫ ВЫПОЛНЯТЬСЯ
КВАЛИФИЦИРОВАННЫМ ПеРСОНАЛОМ.
Этот символ означает, что внутри имеются узлы,
находящиеся под высоким напряжением. Любой
контакт с внутренними узлами данного изделия
опасен.
Этот символ информирует о том, что к изделию
приложено руководство, содержащее важную
информацию об эксплуатации и обслуживании
изделия.
¦ Относится к электропитанию
✎ Приведенные далее изображения служат только для справки и могут отличаться в зависимости от модели и страны.
Предупреждение
Не используйте поврежденные
кабель или вилку питания или плохо
прикрепленную розетку электросети.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
Не подключайте несколько
электроприборов к одной настенной
розетке.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной возгорания
из-за перегрева настенной
розетки.
Не подключайте и не отключайте
электропитание влажными руками.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током.
!
Надежно вставляйте вилку питания в
розетку.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной возгорания.
!
Подключайте кабель питания к
заземленной настенной розетке
(только для оборудования с классом
изоляции 1).
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или травм.
Избегайте чрезмерного перегибания
или скручивания кабеля питания и не
кладите на кабель тяжелые предметы.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током из-за
повреждения кабеля питания.
Приступая к работе5
Приступая к работе
Русский
Размещайте кабель питания и изделие
вдали от нагревателей.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
!
если контакты кабеля питания или
сетевой розетки покрыты пылью,
удалите ее, используя сухую ткань.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной возгорания.
Осторожно
Не отключайте кабель питания во
время работы изделия.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной
повреждения изделия из-за удара
электрическим током.
!
Используйте только кабель питания,
поставляемый нашей компанией. Не
используйте кабели питания от других
электроприборов.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
!
При отключении кабеля питания от
настенной розетки держите его за
вилку, а не за кабель.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
!
Подключайте кабель питания к
легкодоступной настенной розетке.
x При возникновении проблем
с изделием отключите кабель
питания, чтобы полностью
отключить электропитание.
Нельзя полностью отключить
электропитание, используя только
кнопку питания изделия.
¦ Установка
Предупреждение
На ставьте на изделие горящие свечи
или репелленты.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной
возгорания.
!
Для монтажа изделия на стене
пригласите квалифицированного
специалиста.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной травм.
x Используйте указанное настенное
крепление.
Не устанавливайте изделие в местах
с плохой вентиляцией, например на
книжных полках или в шкафах.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной возгорания
из-за внутреннего перегрева.
!
Храните пластиковые пакеты,
служившие для упаковки изделия, в
недоступном для детей месте.
x если ребенок наденет пластиковый
пакет на голову, он может
задохнуться.
Не устанавливайте изделие в шатких
или подверженных вибрации местах,
например на неустойчивых или
наклонных полках.
x Падение изделия может стать
причиной его повреждения или
травм.
x При использовании изделия в
местах, подверженных сильной
вибрации, возможны выход
изделия из стоя или возгорание.
!
Не устанавливайте изделие в
запыленных местах, а также в тех
местах, где в воздухе содержится
влага (сауны), масляные пары, дым или
вода (капли дождя). Не устанавливайте
изделие в транспортных средствах.
x Это может стать причиной
поражения электрическим током
или возгорания.6
Приступая к работе
Русский
Не устанавливайте изделие в местах,
подверженных воздействию прямых
солнечных лучей, и вблизи источников
тепла, например каминов или
обогревателей.
x Это может сократить срок
службы изделия и стать причиной
возгорания.
Устанавливайте изделие в месте,
недоступном детям.
x если ребенок опрокинет изделие,
оно может упасть и стать причиной
травм.
x Так как передняя часть изделия
тяжелее, устанавливайте его на
плоскую устойчивую поверхность.
!
Согните кабель внешней антенны вниз
в месте его выхода из дома, чтобы
дождевая вода не затекала по кабелю.
x если дождевая вода попадет в
изделие, возможно поражение
электрическим током или
возгорание.
!
Устанавливайте антенну на
значительном расстоянии от
высоковольтных проводов.
x если антенна коснется
высоковольтных проводов
или упадет на них, возможно
поражение электрическим током
или возгорание.
Осторожно
!
Не уроните изделие во время его
переноски.
x Это может стать причиной
повреждения изделия или травм.
Не кладите изделие на пол передней
стороной вниз.
x Это может повредить панель
изделия.
При установке изделия на кронштейне
или на полке следите за тем, чтобы
передняя сторона изделия не
выступала вперед.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной падения
изделия и его повреждения или
травм.
x Используйте шкаф или полку,
размеры которых соответствуют
размерам изделия.
!
Бережно обращайтесь с изделием при
его установке.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной
повреждения изделия или травм.
SAMSUNG
!
При установке изделия в местах с
сильно изменяющимися условиями
окружающей среды возможны
проблемы с работой изделия из-
за этих условий. В таких случаях
установка изделия возможна только
после консультации со специалистом
сервисной службы.
x Места с содержанием в воздухе
микроскопической пыли или
химических веществ, с очень
высокой или очень низкой
температурой, с повышенной
влажностью, вокзалы или
аэропорты, в которых изделие
эксплуатируется постоянно.7
Приступая к работе
Русский
¦ Чистка
Предупреждение
!
Перед чисткой изделия отключите
кабель питания.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
При чистке изделия не разбрызгивайте
воду непосредственно на изделие.
x Вода не должна попадать внутрь
изделия.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной возгорания,
поражения электрически током
или повреждения изделия.
Осторожно
Не разбрызгивайте чистящее средство
непосредственно на изделие.
x Это может стать причиной
обесцвечивания, растрескивания
или отслоения внешних панелей
изделия.
!
При чистке изделия отключите
кабель питания и почистите изделие
прилагаемой чистящей салфеткой.
x При чистке изделия не используйте
химические вещества, например
воск, бензин, спирт, растворители,
репелленты, ароматизаторы,
смазочные или моющие средства.
Это может вызвать деформацию
внешних панелей и смывание
надписей.
!
если не удается очистить изделие
прилагаемой салфеткой, протрите
изделие мягкой тканью, смоченной
в специальном средстве для чистки
мониторов.
x если специального средства для
чистки мониторов нет, перед
чисткой изделия разведите
чистящее средство в воде в
соотношении 1:10.
!
Так как поверхность изделия легко
поцарапать, используйте прилагаемую
чистящую салфетку.
¦ Использование
Предупреждение
В изделии имеются цепи, находящиеся
под высоким напряжением,
поэтому никогда не разбирайте, не
ремонтируйте и не модифицируйте
изделие самостоятельно.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной пожара
или поражения электрическим
током.
x если необходимо
отремонтировать изделие,
обратитесь в сервисный центр.
!
Чтобы переместить изделие, отключите
питание и отсоедините кабель
питания, антенный кабель и все другие
проводные подключения.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током из-за
повреждения кабеля питания.8
Приступая к работе
Русский
!
если изделие издает необычные
звуки, чувствуется запах гари или
из изделия идет дым, немедленно
отключите вилку питания и обратитесь
в сервисный центр.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
Не позволяйте детям виснуть на
изделии или забираться не него.
x При несоблюдении этого
требования изделие может упасть,
что может привести к травмам или
летальному исходу.
если вы уроните изделие или
если будет поврежден его корпус,
отключите питание и отсоедините
кабель питания. Обратитесь в
сервисный центр.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной пожара
или поражения электрическим
током.
Не кладите на изделие игрушки или
печенье.
x если ребенок повиснет на изделии,
чтобы достать такой предмет,
то изделие может упасть и стать
причиной травм или летального
исхода.
!
Во время грозы или молний
отключайте кабель питания и ни в
коем случае не касайтесь антенного
кабеля, так как это опасно.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
!
Не роняйте на изделие посторонние
предметы и берегите его от ударов.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
При перемещении изделия не тащите
его за кабель питания или антенный
кабель.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрически током, возгорания
или повреждения изделия из-
за повреждения кабеля.
!
GAS
При утечке газа не касайтесь изделия
или кабеля питания и немедленно
провентилируйте помещение.
x Искра может стать причиной
взрыва или возгорания.
x Во время грозы или молний не
касайтесь кабеля питания или
антенного кабеля.
Не поднимайте и не перемещайте
изделие, держа его только за кабель
питания или сигнальный кабель.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрически током, возгорания
или повреждения изделия из-
за повреждения кабеля.
!
Не используйте рядом с изделием
легковоспламеняющиеся спреи
и не размещайте рядом с ним
легковоспламеняющихся предметов.
x Это может стать причиной взрыва
или возгорания.
Следите за тем, чтобы
вентиляционные отверстия не были
закрыты скатертями или занавесками.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной возгорания
из-за внутреннего перегрева.
100
Не засовывайте в изделие
(вентиляционные отверстия, порты и т.
д.) металлические предметы, например
столовые приборы, монеты или заколки
для волос, или легковоспламеняющиеся
предметы.
x если в изделие попадет жидкость,
выключите питание, отключите
кабель питания и обратитесь в
сервисную службу.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной
повреждения изделия, поражения
электрически током или
возгорания.9
Приступая к работе
Русский
Не ставьте на изделие емкости
с жидкостью, например вазы,
цветочные горшки, напитки, косметику
или лекарства, или металлические
предметы.
x если в изделие попадет
жидкость, выключите питание,
отключите кабель питания и
обратитесь в сервисную службу.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной
повреждения изделия, поражения
электрически током или
возгорания.
Не нажимайте на изделие с чрезмерной
силой. Возможно деформирование или
повреждение изделия.
Осторожно
!
Отображение неподвижных
изображений в течение длительного
времени может стать причиной
появления на экране постоянного
изображения или пятен.
x если изделие не используется в
течение длительного времени,
переключите его в режим
энергосбережения или выберите
заставку с движущимся
изображением.
-_-
!
если изделие не используется в течение
длительного времени, например когда
вы уходите из дома, отключайте кабель
питания от настенной розетки.
x если это требование не
соблюдается, то из-за накопления
пыли и перегрева или короткого
замыкания возможно возгорание
или поражение электрическим
током.
!
Должным образом настройте
разрешение и частоту обновления
кадров в изделии.
x При несоблюдении этой
рекомендации возможно
чрезмерное напряжение зрения.
Не переворачивайте изделие и не
перемещайте его, держа только за
подставку.
x Изделие может упасть, что может
стать причиной его повреждения
или травм.
!
Постоянный просмотр изображения с
близкого расстояния может привести
к нарушениям зрения.
Не используйте рядом с изделием
увлажнители воздуха или кухонные
плиты.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной поражения
электрическим током или
возгорания.
!
При продолжительном просмотре
экрана изделия важно периодически
делать перерывы для отдыха глаз (5
минут каждый час).
x Это снимает напряжение зрения.
Панель изделия нагревается при
продолжительном использовании,
поэтому не касайтесь изделия.10
Приступая к работе
Русский
!
Храните мелкие аксессуары в
недоступном для детей месте.
!
Будьте осторожны при регулировке
угла наклона изделия и высоты
подставки.
x если вы защемите руку или палец,
возможны травмы.
x если сильно наклонить изделие,
оно может упасть и стать причиной
травм.
Не ставьте на изделие тяжелых
предметов.
x Несоблюдение этого требования
может стать причиной
повреждения изделия или травм.
При использовании наушников или
гарнитуры не выбирайте слишком
большую громкость.
x Слишком громкий звук может
повредить слух.
Следите за тем, чтобы дети не брали
в рот батарейки, вынутые из пульта
дистанционного управления. Храните
батарейки в месте, недоступном для
детей.
x если дети положат батарейки в
рот, немедленно обратитесь к
врачу.
!
При замене батареек соблюдайте
полярность (+, -).
x При несоблюдении этого
требования возможно
повреждение батареек или
возгорание, травмы или
повреждение из-за утечки
электролита.
Используйте только указанные
стандартные батарейки.
Не устанавливайте новые и
использованные батарейки
одновременно.
x Это может стать причиной
разрушения или протечки
батарейки и привести к
возгоранию, травмам или
загрязнению (повреждению).
!
Батарейки (и аккумуляторы) не должны
утилизироваться с обычным мусором,
их нужно возвращать для переработки.
Покупатель ответственен за возврат
использованных батареек или
аккумуляторов для переработки.
x Покупатель может вернуть
использованные батарейки или
аккумуляторы в ближайший
общественный центр переработки
или в магазин, продающий
батарейки или аккумуляторы этого
типа.11
Приступая к работе
Русский
Принадлежности
✎Убедитесь в том, что в комплект поставки LED-дисплея входят следующие принадлежности: если какой-либо предмет отсутствует,
обратитесь к дилеру.
✎Цвет и форма принадлежностей могут различаться в зависимости от модели.
✎Не входящие в комплект поставки кабели можно приобрести отдельно.
✎Следите за тем, чтобы принадлежности не затерялись в упаковочном материале, когда вы открываете коробку.
[ОСТОРОЖНО: ЗАЩИТНУЮ ПЛЕНКУ НУЖНО УДАЛЯТЬ ПОЛНОСТЬЮ
x Руководство пользователя x Руководство по быстрой настройке
x Пульт ДУ и батарейки (AAA x 2) x Чистящая салфетка
x Гарантийный талон/Руководство по соблюдению мер предосторожности
(недоступно в некоторых регионах)
x Кабель питания
y Кронштейн подставки y Основа подставки y Кабель D-Sub y Стереокабель
Кабели подключения источников сигнала (продаются отдельно)
y Кабель HDMI-DVI y Аудиокабель y Компонентный кабель y Оптический кабель
y Кабель HDMI12
Приступая к работе
Русский
Панель управления — внешний вид
✎Цвет и форма изделия могут отличаться в зависимости от модели.
SOURCE
E
Переключение всех доступных источников сигнала. В экранном меню эта кнопка выполняет те
же функции, что и кнопка ENTERE пульта ДУ.
MENU Вызов экранного меню и меню функций LED-дисплея.
Y Регулировка громкости. В экранном меню кнопки Y выполняют те же функции, что и
z кнопки l и r пульта ДУ.
Смена каналов. В экранном меню кнопки z выполняют те же функции, что и кнопки
u и d пульта ДУ.
P (Питание) Включение и выключение LED-дисплея.
Индикатор питания Мигает и гаснет, когда питание включено, горит в режиме готовности.
Датчик пульта ДУ Направьте пульт ДУ на эту точку LED-дисплея.
Режим готовности
Не оставляйте LED-дисплей в режиме готовности на долгое время (например, если вы уезжаете в отпуск). В этом режиме по-прежнему
потребляется небольшое количество электроэнергии, хотя индикатор кнопки питания не горит. Лучше отключить кабель питания.
Панель управления13
Приступая к работе
Русский
Пульт дистанционного управления — внешний вид
✎Это специальный пульт дистанционного управления с точками Брайля на кнопках выбора каналов и цифровых кнопках для людей
с ослабленным зрением.
Установка батареек (размер батареек: AAA)
Включение и выключение телевизора.
Непосредственный выбор каналов.
Режим телетекста: включен, двойной,
смешанный и выключен.
Отображение окна Дом. стр. содержим.,
в котором расположены разделы Список
каналов, Телегид, Media Play, Диспетчер
расписания и Источник.
Быстрый выбор часто используемых
функций.
Отображение основного экранного меню.
Возврат в предыдущее меню.
PIP: Включение и выключение функции
PIP (картинка в картинке).
P.SIZE: Выбор настройки Размер
картинки.
AD/SUBT.: Включение или отключение
звукового описания (функция доступна
не во всех регионах). / Отображение
цифровых субтитров.
Перемещение курсора и выбор элемента
меню. Подтверждение настройки.
Используйте эти кнопки в соответствии с
отображаемыми на экране указаниями.
Регулировка громкости.
Отображение списка доступных
источников видеосигнала и выбор
источника видеосигнала.
Возврат к предыдущему каналу.
Временное отключение звука.
Отображение на экране списка каналов.
Отображение электронного гида.
Отображение информации на экране.
Выход из меню.
Используйте эти кнопки в режиме Media
Play.
Смена каналов.Подключение
Подключение антенны
При первоначальном включении LED-дисплея основные настройки выполняются автоматически.
✎Предварительная установка: подключение питания и антенны.
ANT OUT
Подключение электропитания
Настройка (первоначальная настройка)
Русский 14
При первом включении LED-дисплея отображается последовательность экранных запросов, помогающих выполнить основные настройки.
Нажмите кнопку POWERP. Настройка возможна, только когда для параметра Источник выбрано значение ТВ.
✎Перед настройкой LED-дисплея убедитесь в том, что подключен антенный кабель.
1
Выбор языка меню Нажимайте кнопку u или d, чтобы выбрать язык меню. Когда язык будет
2
Домашний
Демонстрация
Выбор режима
или
выбран, два раза нажмите кнопку
Нажимайте кнопку
x Выберите режим
u или
Домашний
d, затем нажмите кнопку
. Режим
ENTERE
Демонстрация
.
ENTER
предназначен для
E. P
использования в магазинах.
x Переключение из режима Демонстрация в режим Домашний (стандартная
настройка). Нажмите кнопку громкости LED-дисплея. Когда на экран будет
выведен индикатор громкости, нажмите кнопку MENU и удерживайте ее
нажатой в течении 5 секунд.
x Режим Демонстрация предназначен только для использования в
магазинах. При выборе этого режима некоторые функции недоступны. При
использовании изделия дома выберите режим Домашний.
3
Выбор региона Нажмите кнопку ENTERE. Выберите соответствующий регион, нажимая кнопку u или d.
Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы подтвердить выбор.
4
Автонастройка Нажимайте кнопку u или d, чтобы выбрать подходящую настройку, затем дважды нажмите кнопку
ENTERE. Давайте найдём и сохраним каналы на Вашем телевизоре. Вы нуждаетесь в поиске
каналов?
x Да, я нуждаюсь. Все доступные каналы будут найдены и сохранены в Вашем телевизоре.
(Автонастройка необходима)
x Нет, я не нуждаюсь. Мой внешний приёмник обеспечивает приём всех доступных каналов ,
поэтому я не нуждаюсь в поиске каналов.
✎ Выбрав эту опцию, можно завершить настройку.
x Антенна / Кабель. Выберите источник сигнала телевещания для запоминания каналов.
Цифр. и аналог. / Цифр. / аналог.: Выберите источник каналов для запоминания.
✎ Дополнительные сведения см. на стр. 22.
5
Настройка Режим часов Выберите автоматическую или ручную настройку для параметра Режим часов.
x Авто. Выберите часовой пояс, в котором вы находитесь (в зависимости от страны).
x Ручной. Дату и время можно ввести вручную.
✎ При выборе на этапе 4 настройки «Нет, я не нуждаюсь. » время можно задать только вручную.
6
Завершена Нажмите кнопку ENTERE.
Восстановление стандартной настройки...
Выберите Система - Настройка (Первоначальная настройка). Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр. PIN-код по умолчанию — «0-0-0-0». Если вы
хотите изменить PIN-код, используйте функцию Изменение PIN. Меню Настройка (MENU → Система) нужно вызвать еще раз дома, даже
если вы делали это в магазине.
✎Если вы забудете PIN-код, в режиме ожидания нажмите кнопки пульта ДУ в указанной последовательности, чтобы восстановить стандартный
PIN-код «0-0-0-0»: POWER (выключить) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (включить).Русский 15
Подключение
Подключение к аудиовидеоустройству
Использование кабеля HDMI или кабеля HDMI-DVI (до 1080p)
Доступные устройства: DVD-плейер, Blu-ray плейер, приставка кабельного телевидения высокой четкости, приемник спутникового
телевидения высокой четкости, видеомагнитофон
✎HDMI IN(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO IN
x При подключении кабеля HDMI-DVI к порту HDMI IN(DVI) передача аудиосигнала не работает.
x При подключении к LED-дисплею внешнего устройства, использующего старую версию HDMI, возможны искажения или отсутствие
изображения. В этом случае запросите у изготовителя внешнего устройства информацию о версии HDMI. если она устаревшая,
запросите обновление.
x Приобретайте только сертифицированные кабели HDMI. Несоблюдение этого требования может привести к отсутствию изображения
или ошибке подключения.
x Рекомендуется использовать обычный высокоскоростной кабель HDMI или кабель с поддержкой локальной сети. Изделие не
поддерживает подключение к локальной сети по кабелю HDMI.
Использование кабеля Scart
Доступные устройства: DVD-плеер, видеомагнитофон
✎В режиме Внешний выход цифрового ТВ поддерживает только видео стандартной четкости в формате MPEG и аудио.
DVI OUT
HDMI OUT
AUDIO OUT
W
R
DVD /
Blu-ray-плеер
DVD /
Blu-ray-плеер
EXT (RGB)
EXT
Видеомагнитофон /
DVD-плеерРусский 16
Подключение
Использование компонентного кабеля (до 1080p) или аудиовидеокабеля (только 480i)
Доступные устройства: DVD-плейер, Blu-ray-плейер, приставка кабельного телевидения, приемник спутникового телевидения,
видеомагнитофон
PR PB
COMPONENT
/ AV IN
R
W
R
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO OUT
R W R B G
R W R B G
R W
W
W
R B
R
R
G
Y
Y
AUDIO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
COMPONENT OUT
PR PB Y
R W Y
✎При подключении к разъему AV IN цвет гнезда AV IN [Y/VIDEO] (зеленый) не соответствует цвету штекера видеокабеля (желтый).
✎Для получения лучшего качества изображения рекомендуется использовать компонентное, а не аудиовидеоподключение.
Подключение к разъему «Общий интерфейс»
(только для европы, Турции, Алжира, Южной Африки и СНГ)
Использование модуля «CI или CI+ CARD»
Для просмотра платных каналов необходимо вставить модуль «CI или CI+ CARD».
x если модуль «CI или CI+ CARD» не установлен, то при попытке просмотра некоторых
каналов будет отображаться сообщение «Зашифрованный сигнал».
x Информация о подключении, включая телефонный номер, идентификатор модуля «CI
или CI+ CARD», идентификатор устройства и другие данные, будет отображаться в
течение приблизительно 2–3 минут. если будет отображаться сообщение об ошибке,
обратитесь к провайдеру.
x Когда конфигурация каналов будет завершена, отобразится сообщение «Обновление
завершено», означающее окончание обновления списка каналов.
✎Примечание.
x Модуль «CI или CI+ CARD» можно получить у провайдера.
x При извлечении модуля «CI или CI+ CARD» будьте осторожны, так как модуль можно повредить, уронив его.
x Вставьте модуль «CI или CI+ CARD» в направлении стрелки, изображенной на модуле.
x Разъем Общий интерфейс может находиться в разных местах в зависимости от модели.
x Модули «CI или CI+ CARD» не поддерживаются в некоторых странах и регионах. Подробную информацию можно получить у
авторизованного дилера.
x При возникновении проблем обратитесь к провайдеру.
x Вставьте модуль «CI или CI+ CARD», поддерживающий текущие настройки антенны. В противном случае на экране могут появиться
искажения, или изображение может отсутствовать.
Аудиокабель
(не входит в комплект поставки)
Видеокабель
(не входит в комплект
поставки)
Аудиокабель
(не входит в комплект поставки)
Красный Белый Красный Синий Зеленый Красный Желтый Белый
Устройство
Устройство
Компонентный кабель
(не входит в комплект поставки)Русский 17
Подключение
Цифровая аудиосистема
Подключение к аудиоустройству и ПК
Использование оптического (цифрового) подключения или подключения наушников
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL)
Устройства серии TB300 не оснащены разъемом для подключения наушников и оптическим интерфейсом.
✎DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
x При подключении цифровой аудиосистемы к гнезду DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) уменьшите громкость LED-дисплея и аудиосистемы.
x Многоканальный звук 5.1 доступен при подключении LED-дисплея к внешнему устройству, поддерживающему многоканальный звук.
x если включен ресивер (домашний кинотеатр), то звук можно слушать через оптический выход телевизора. если телевизор принимает
сигнал цифрового телевидения, то он передает в ресивер домашнего кинотеатра многоканальный звук 5.1. если источник цифрового
сигнала, например DVD или Blu-ray-плейер, приставка кабельного телевидения или приемник спутникового телевидения, подключен к
телевизору кабелем HDMI, то ресивер домашнего кинотеатра получает только двухканальный звук. Для получения многоканального звука
5.1 подключите DVD или Blu-ray-плейер, приставку кабельного телевидения или приемник спутникового телевидения непосредственно к
усилителю или домашнему кинотеатру.
✎Наушники H: Наушники можно подключить к соответствующему выходу телевизора. При подключении наушников встроенные
громкоговорители отключаются.
x При подключении наушников к LED-дисплею функции воспроизведения звука могут быть ограничены.
x Громкость наушников и громкость LED-дисплея регулируются раздельно.
Использование кабеля HDMI, HDMI-DVI или D-sub
✎Подключение с помощью кабеля HDMI может не поддерживаться некоторыми компьютерами.
Кабель HDMI
(не входит в комплект поставки)
Кабель HDMI-DVI
(не входит в комплект поставки)
Стереокабель
Стереокабель
Кабель D-Sub Русский 18
Подключение
Режимы отображения (вход D-Sub и HDMI/DVI)
Оптимальное разрешение: 1366 x 768 пикселей (только модель T19B300)
Режим отображения Частота
горизонтальной
развертки (кГц)
Частота
вертикальной
развертки (Гц)
Частота
обновления
пикселей (МГц)
Полярность
синхронизации
(Г/В)
Режим Разрешение
IBM 720 x 400 70 Гц 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 60 Гц 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
MAC 640 x 480 67 Гц 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 72 Гц 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 75 Гц 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
VESA DMT 800 x 600 60 Гц 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 72 Гц 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 75 Гц 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
MAC 832 x 624 75 Гц 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60 Гц 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70 Гц 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75 Гц 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60 Гц 45,000 60,000 74,250 +/+
VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60 Гц 47,712 59,790 85,500 +/+
Оптимальное разрешение: 1920 x 1080 пикселей
Режим отображения Частота
горизонтальной
развертки (кГц)
Частота
вертикальной
развертки (Гц)
Частота
обновления
пикселей (МГц)
Полярность
синхронизации
(Г/В)
Режим Разрешение
IBM 720 x 400 70 Гц 31,469 70,087 28,322 -/+
VESA DMT 640 x 480 60 Гц 31,469 59,940 25,175 -/-
MAC 640 x 480 67 Гц 35,000 66,667 30,240 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 72 Гц 37,861 72,809 31,500 -/-
VESA DMT 640 x 480 75 Гц 37,500 75,000 31,500 -/-
VESA DMT 800 x 600 60 Гц 37,879 60,317 40,000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 72 Гц 48,077 72,188 50,000 +/+
VESA DMT 800 x 600 75 Гц 46,875 75,000 49,500 +/+
MAC 832 x 624 75 Гц 49,726 74,551 57,284 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 60 Гц 48,363 60,004 65,000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 70 Гц 56,476 70,069 75,000 -/-
VESA DMT 1024 x 768 75 Гц 60,023 75,029 78,750 +/+
VESA DMT 1152 x 864 75 Гц 67,500 75,000 108,000 +/+
MAC 1152 x 870 75 Гц 68,681 75,062 100,000 -/-
VESA DMT 1280 x 720 60 Гц 45,000 60,000 74,250 +/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 800 60 Гц 49,702 59,810 83,500 -/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 60 Гц 63,981 60,020 108,000 +/+
VESA DMT 1280 x 1024 75 Гц 79,976 75,025 135,000 +/+
VESA DMT 1366 x 768 60 Гц 47,712 59,790 85,500 +/+
VESA DMT 1440 x 900 60 Гц 55,935 59,887 106,500 -/+
VESA DMT 1600 x 900 RB 60 Гц 60,000 60,000 108,000 +/+
VESA DMT 1680 x 1050 60 Гц 65,290 59,954 146,250 -/+
VESA DMT 1920 x 1080 60 Гц 67,500 60,000 148,500 +/+
✎Примечание,
x Режим чересстрочной развертки не поддерживается,
x При выборе нестандартного видеоформата телевизор может работать неправильно.
x Поддерживаются раздельные и композитные режимы. Синхронизация по зеленому не поддерживается.Русский 19
Подключение
Основные функции
Навигация в меню
Перед использованием LED-дисплея ознакомьтесь с приведенной
далее информацией, чтобы научиться использовать меню и
выбирать и изменять различные функции.
1 Кнопка ENTERE/кнопки перемещения курсора.
Перемещение курсора и выбор элемента меню.
Подтверждение настройки.
2 Кнопка RETURN. Возврат в предыдущее меню.
3 Кнопка MENU. Отображение основного экранного меню.
4 Кнопка EXIT. Выход из основного экранного меню.
Использование экранного меню
Вызов меню может отличаться в зависимости от выбранного меню.
1 MENU m Отображаются функции главного
меню:
Изображение, Звук, Канал, Система,
Поддержка.
2 ▲ / ▼ Выберите символ, нажимая кнопку ▲
или ▼.
3
ENTERE Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы
вызвать подменю.
4 ▲ / ▼ Выберите нужное подменю, нажимая
кнопку ▲ или ▼.
5 ◄ / ► Измените значение настройки, нажимая
кнопку ◄ или ►. Изменение настройки
может отличаться в зависимости от
выбранного меню.
6
ENTERE Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы
завершить настройку.
7
EXIT e Нажмите EXIT.
Выбор источника сигнала
Источник
SOURCE s→ Источник
Выбор режима телевизора или внешнего
источника сигнала, например DVD плеера, Bluray-плеера, кабельной приставки или приставки
приема спутникового телевидения.
■ TB / Внешний / ПК / HDMI/DVI / AV / Компонент
✎В списке Источник подключенные входы
выделяются.
✎ТВ, ПК и Внешний всегда остаются
активными.
Редактир. назв.
SOURCEs→ TOOLST → Редактир. назв. →
ENTERE
Когда отображается экран Источник, нажмите кнопку TOOLST.
После этого вы сможете переименовать внешние источники
сигнала по своему желанию.
■ VCR / DVD / Кабельн. прист. / Спутн. прист. / PVR / АV ресивер /
Игра / Камера / ПК/DVI PC / Устройства DVI/ТВ / IP TB / Blu-ray / HD
DVD / DMA: Присвойте название подключенному к входным разъемам
устройству, чтобы упростить выбор источника сигнала.
✎При подключении ПК к порту HDMI IN (DVI) с помощью кабеля
HDMI в LED-дисплее нужно выбрать режим ПК в настройке
Редактир. назв..
✎При подключении ПК к порту HDMI IN (DVI) с помощью кабеля
HDMI-DVI в LED-дисплее нужно выбрать режим DVI PC в
настройке Редактир. назв..
✎При подключении аудиовидеоустройства к порту HDMI IN (DVI) с
помощью кабеля HDMI-DVI в LED-дисплее нужно выбрать режим
Устройства DVI в настройке Редактир. назв..
Информация
SOURCEs→ TOOLST→ Информация → ENTERE
Можно посмотреть подробную информацию о выбранном внешнем
устройстве.
4
2
3
1Русский 20
Основные функции
Использование кнопки INFO (телегид текущих и следующих программ)
Отображается текущий канал и некоторые
настройки звука и изображения.
Телегид текущих и следующих программ
отображает информацию телевизионной
программы для каждого канала в соответствии
с временем вещания.
x Нажимайте кнопки l и r, чтобы
посмотреть информацию о нужной
программе во время просмотра текущего канала. (Зависит от
каналов.)
x Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы просмотреть информацию
о других каналах. Для перехода к выбранному в данный
момент каналу нажмите кнопку ENTERE.
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
Нет подробной информации.
Нет названия.
576i 4:3 SD Итальянский
Стерео
a Информация
17:02 вторник, 19 июля
DTV-ант.
Все
Coming Soon
5
Использование меню «Канал»
Нажмите кнопку CONTENT, чтобы выбрать Дом. стр. содержим., а
затем выберите нужное меню. Отображается каждый экран.
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
Дом. стр. содержим.
Список каналов Телегид Media Play Диспетчер
расписания
Источник
R Возврат
Телегид
CONTENT → Дом. стр. содержим. → Телегид → ENTERE
Информация электронного телегида
предоставляется вещающими компаниями.
Используя предоставленное вещающими
компаниями расписание программ, можно
заранее выбрать программы, которые
вы хотите посмотреть, чтобы телевизор
автоматически изменил канал на канал
выбранной программы в заданное время.
Записи программ могут отображаться пустыми
или устаревшими в зависимости от состояния канала.
Использование меню «Просм. канал.»
x a Красный (Дисп. расписания) : Отображение меню Дисп.
расписания.
x { Зеленый (-24 часа). Просмотр списка программ, которые
будут транслироваться в ближайшие 24 часа.
x { желтый (+24 часа). Просмотр списка программ, которые
будут транслироваться через 24 часа.
x } Синий (Реж.кан.). Выбор типа каналов, которые будут
отображаться в окне Просм. канал..
x ` (Информация). Отображение подробной информации о
выбранной программе.
x k (Страница). Переход к следующей или предыдущей
странице.
x E (Просмотр / Расписание)
– При выборе текущей программы можно посмотреть
выбранную программу.
– При выборе будущей программы можно
запланировать просмотр выбранной программы.
Чтобы отменить планирование, нажмите кнопку
ENTERE еще раз и выберите Отмена расписаний.
Диспетчер расписания
CONTENT → Дом. стр. содержим. → Диспетчер расписания →
ENTERE
Можно просматривать, изменять или удалять запланированный
просмотр каналов.
Использование функции «Просмотр по расписанию»
Можно настроить автоматическое отображение выбранного канала
в заданное время. Для использования этой функции сначала нужно
задать текущее время.
1. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы выбрать функцию
Диспетчер расписания.
2. Нажмите кнопку TOOLSTили кнопку или a , чтобы
вручную добавить программу в расписание. Отображается
экран Просмотр по расписанию.
3. Нажимайте кнопки u / d / l / r, чтобы задать настройки
Антенна, Канал, Повтор, Дата или Время начала.
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
IL MEDICO E LO STRGONE
DTV Air 6 R4 DTT
16:55 - 17:55
IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE - 2 TEMPO
a Дисп. расписания b -24 часа { +24 часа } Реж.кан. ` Информация k Страница E Просмотр
Сегодня 17:00 17:30 18:00 18:30
Телегид 17:00 вторник, 19 июля
Просм. канал. — Все
Нет информации
Нет информации
Нет информации
Нет информации
IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE
1 1futech
2 24ore.tv
3 BBC World
4 Class News
5 Coming Soon
6 R4 DTT
Нет информации
TG 4 Нет информации
5 Coming SoonРусский 21
Основные функции
x Антенна. Выберите антенный вход.
x Канал. Выберите канал.
x Повтор: Выберите Один раз, Ручной, Сб-Вс, Пн-Пт или
Ежедневно. При выборе настройки Ручной можно задать
нужный день.
✎ Выбранная дата отмечается символом c.
x Дата. Можно задать дату.
✎ Эта настройка доступна при выборе значения Один раз
для настройки Повтор.
x Время начала. Можно задать любое время начала.
✎ На экране Информация можно изменить или отменить
расписание.
x Отмена расписаний. Отмена просмотра программы по
расписанию.
x Правка. Изменение просмотра программы по
расписанию.
x Возврат. Возврат на предыдущий экран.
Список каналов
CONTENT → Список каналов → ENTERE
Просмотр списка всех найденных каналов.
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
Список каналов
Все
1 1futech
2 24ore.tv
3 BBC World
4 Class News
5 Coming Soon
6 R4 DTT
IL MEDICO E LO STREGONE
a1 C2
a2 C4
T Сервис L Реж.кан. E Просмотр k Страница
✎При нажатии кнопки CH LIST на пульте дистанционного
управления отображается Список каналов.
Использование кнопок управления на экране Список каналов.
■ T (Сервис): Нажмите кнопку «Сервис», чтобы вызвать одну из
следующих функций.
x Просм. прогр..Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы выбрать
нужную программу, затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE. (Только
для цифрового канала)
x Изм. избранное. Сохранение часто просматриваемых
каналов в списке избранных каналов.
✎ Выберите Изм. избранное, затем нажмите кнопку
ENTERE.
– если канал уже добавлен в список избранных
каналов, то отображается экран Изм. избранное.
x Блокировка / Разблокировка. Блокировка канала, чтобы его
нельзя было выбирать и смотреть.
✎ Эта функция доступна, только когда функция
«Блокировка канала» включена.
✎ Отображается экран ввода PIN-кода. Введите PIN-код
из 4 цифр, значение по умолчанию — «0-0-0-0». PIN-код
можно изменить, используя функцию Изменение PIN.
x Изменить название канала (Только для аналоговых каналов.):
Ввод собственного названия канала.
✎ Эта функция может не поддерживаться в некоторых
регионах.
x Изм. номера канала: Измените число нажатием
соответствующих кнопок с цифрами.
✎ Эта функция может не поддерживаться в некоторых
регионах.
x Удалить. Можно удалить канал, чтобы в списке отображались
только нужные каналы.
x Информация. Отображение названия канала, разрешения,
режима изображения и других данных (некоторые данные
доступны только для цифровых каналов).
x Сортировка. Сортировка каналов по названию канала или по
номеру канала. (Только для цифрового канала)
x Изменить антенну. Выбор настройки Антенна или Кабель.
x Режим ред.: Можно выбрать нужные каналы и изменить их.
■ l r (Реж.кан.): Перемещение в тип каналов, которые будут
отображаться на экране Список каналов.
✎ Эта опция может зависеть от страны.
■ E (Просмотр / Информация): Просмотр выбранного канала. /
Отображение подробной информации о выбранной программе.
■ k (Страница): Переход к следующей или предыдущей странице.
Использование функции Просмотр по расписанию на экране
Список каналов (зависит от каналов)
При выборе функции Просмотр по расписанию на экране Список
каналов можно выбрать программы на экране Просм. прогр..
1. Нажмите кнопку CH LIST и выберите нужный цифровой канал.
2. Нажмите кнопку TOOLST и выберите Просм. прогр..
3. Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы выбрать нужную
программу, затем нажмите кнопку E (Информация).
4. Выберите Просмотр по расписанию, затем нажмите кнопку
ENTERE, когда выбор будет завершен.
✎Для отключения функции Просмотр по расписанию выполните
этапы 1–3 и выберите Отмена расписаний.Русский 22
Основные функции
Меню «Канал»
¦ Повторная настройка каналов
MENUm→ Канал → ENTERE
Перед запоминанием доступных каналов необходимо выбрать тип
Источник сигнала (Антенна / Кабель)t
источника сигнала, подключенного к LED-дисплею.
Страна
(Зависит от страны.)
Отображается экран ввода PIN-кода. Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр.
✎Выберите страну, чтобы LED-дисплей смогу автоматически
настроить широковещательные каналы.
■ Цифровой канал: Выбор страны для цифровых каналов.
■ Аналоговый канал: Выбор страны для аналоговых каналов.
Автонастройка
(Зависит от страны.)
✎Автоматически назначенные номера программ могут не
соответствовать фактическим или желаемым номерам
программ. если канал заблокирован с использованием функции
Блокировка канала, то отображается окно ввода PIN-кода.
■ Автонастройка
– Антенна / Кабель: Выберите источник сигнала
телевещания для запоминания каналов.
Цифр. и аналог. / Цифровые / Аналоговые: Выберите
источник каналов для запоминания.
✎ При выборе настройки Кабель → Цифр. и аналог. или
Цифровые: задайте значение сканирования кабельных
каналов.
x Режим поиска (Полный / Сеть / Быстрый): выбор
режима поиска:Полный / Сеть / Быстрый.
x Сеть (Авто / Ручной). Для параметра Идентиф.
cети выберите настройку Автоматически или
Вручную.
x Идентиф. cети: При выборе для параметра Сеть
значения Вручную можно задать Идентиф. cети,
используя цифровые кнопки.
x Частота. Отображение частоты канала. (Разная в
каждой стране.)
x Модуляция. Отображение доступных значений
модуляции.
x Скорость передачи. Отображение доступных
скоростей передачи.
■ Кабельные параметры поиска
(Зависит от страны.)
Задание дополнительный параметров поиска, например частоты и
скорости передачи для кабельной сети.
– Нач. частота / Конечная частота.: Задание начальной и
конечной частоты (разные в каждой стране).
– Скорость передачи: Отображение доступных скоростей
передачи.
– Модуляция: Отображение доступных значений модуляции.
Настройка вручную
Ручной поиск каналов и их сохранение в памяти LED-дисплея.
✎если канал заблокирован с использованием функции
Блокировка канала, то отображается окно ввода PIN-кода.
■ Настройка цифровых каналов: Поиск цифрового канала.
1. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы выбрать Создать.
✎ При выборе Антенна → Антенна. Канал, Частота,
Полоса пропуск.
✎ При выборе Антенна → Кабель. Частота, Модуляция,
Скорость передачи
2. Нажмите кнопку d, чтобы выбрать Поиск. После
завершения поиска канал обновляется в списке каналов.
■ Настройка аналоговых каналов: Поиск аналогового канала.
1. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы выбрать Создать.
2. Задайте настройки Программа, Система цвета,
Система звука, Канал и Поиск.
3. Нажмите кнопку d, чтобы выбрать Сохранить. После
завершения поиска канал обновляется в списке каналов.
Передача списка кан.
Отображается экран ввода PIN-кода. Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр.
Импорт или экспорт таблицы каналов. Для использования этой
функции нужно подключить запоминающее устройство USB.
■ Импорт с USB: Импорт списка каналов из USB-устройства.
■ Экспорт на USB: Экспорт списка каналов в USB-устройство. Эта
функция доступна при подключении USB-устройства.
✎Формат USB должен быть FAT32.
Точная настройка
(Только для аналоговых каналов.)
При уверенном приеме точная настройка каналов не нужна, так
как она выполняется во время поиска и сохранения каналов.
При слабом или искаженном сигнале выполните точную ручную
настройку канала. Прокручивайте влево или вправо, пока
изображение не станет четким.
✎Настройки применяются к просматриваемому в данный момент
каналу.
✎Каналы с точной настройкой сохраняются и отмечаются в списке
каналов звездочкой «*» справа от номера канала.
✎Для отмены точной настройки выберите Сброс.Русский 23
Основные функции
Меню «Изображение»
¦
Смена предварительной настройки «Реж.
изображения»
MENUm→ Изображение → Реж. изображения → ENTERE
Выберите тип изображения.
Реж. изображения t
✎При подключении к ПК для настройки Реж. изображения
доступны только значения Стандартный и Развлекат.
■ Динамический: Подходит для светлого помещения.
■ Стандартный: Подходит для обычных условий.
■ Кино: Подходит для просмотра фильмов в темном помещении.
■ Развлекат: Подходит для просмотра фильмов и игр.
✎ Эта настройка доступна только при подключении к ПК.
¦ Настройка изображения
MENUm→ Изображение → ENTERE
Samsung MagicAngle
Регулировка угла просмотра экрана для оптимизации качества
изображения в соответствии с вашим положением при просмотре.
■ Samsung MagicAngle: При просмотре под углом снизу или сверху,
выбирая соответствующий режим для каждого положения, можно
добиться такого же качества изображения, как при просмотре из
положения прямо пред экраном.
x Выкл.. Выберите этот режим при просмотре из положения
прямо пред экраном.
x Режим комфорта. Выберите этот режим, если вы смотрите
на экран снизу.
x Вертикально. Выберите этот режим, если вы смотрите на
экран сверху.
■ Режим.: Настройка угла просмотра экрана.
✎если для настройки Samsung MagicAngle выбран режим Режим
комфорта или Вертикально, то настройка Гамма недоступна.
Подсветка / Контраст / Яркость / Четкость /
Цвет / Тон(З/К)
У телевизора есть несколько настроек управления качеством
изображения.
✎Примечание.
x В аналоговых режимах TV, PC, AV для телевизионной системы
PAL настройка Тон(З/К) недоступна.
x При подключении ПК можно изменять только настройки
Подсветка, Контраст, Яркость и Четкость.
x Настройки можно изменять и сохранять для каждого
внешнего устройства, подключенного к LED-дисплею.
x Уменьшение яркости изображения сокращает
энергопотребление.
Настройка экрана
■ Размер картинки: Приставка кабельного
телевидения или приемник спутникового
телевидения могут иметь свой собственный набор
форматов изображения. Однако, рекомендуется
использовать в основном режим 16:9.
Широкий aвто: Автоматическое изменение
размера изображения для получения
соотношения сторон 16:9.
16:9. Широкоформатное изображение с соотношением сторон
16:9.
Широк. увел.: Увеличение размера изображения более 4:3.
✎ Измените настройку Позиция, используя кнопки u / d.
Увеличенный: Увеличение по вертикали широкоформатного
изображения с соотношением сторон 16:9 по размеру экрана.
✎ Измените настройки Увеличенный или Позиция.
используя кнопки u / d.
4:3. Базовый режим отображения (с соотношением сторон 4:3).
✎ Не смотрите изображение в формате 4:3 в течение
длительного времени. Следы от полей слева, справа и по
центру экрана могут вызвать остаточное изображение
(выгорание экрана), на которое не распространяется
гарантия.
По разм. экрана: Отображение полного изображения без
обрезания для сигнала со входа HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) или с
компонентного входа (720p / 1080i / 1080p).
✎ Измените настройку Позиция, используя кнопки u / d
/ l / r.
✎Примечание.
x Доступные настройки размера изображения могут
различаться в зависимости от источника сигнала.
x Доступные настройки могут отличаться в зависимости от
выбранного режима.
x При подключении к ПК можно настроить только режимы 16:9
и 4:3.
x Настройки можно изменять и сохранять для каждого
внешнего устройства, подключенного к входу LED-дисплея.
x При выборе настройки По разм. экрана для входного сигнала
HDMI 720p 1 строка будет обрезаться вверху, внизу, слева и
справа.
■ Увеличенный / Позиция: можно настроить размер и
положение изображения с помощью кнопки u / d / l / r.
✎ Эта функция доступна, только когда выбран размер
изображения Увеличенный или Широк. увел..
✎ В режиме Широк. увел. можно изменять только позицию.
✎ Сброс. Сбросьте параметры Увеличенный и Позиция до
значений по умолчанию.
■ Размер экрана 4:3 (16:9 / Широк. увел. / Увеличенный /
4:3). Эти настройки доступны только при выборе для размера
изображения режима Широкий aвто. Можно выбрать размер
картинки 4:3 с широкоформатным преобразованием или
оригинальный размер. Для каждой европейской страны
требуется разный размер картинки.
✎ Настройка недоступна в режимах HDMI, Компонентный и
HDMI/DVI.Русский 24
Основные функции
■ Настройка экрана ПК
✎ Настройка доступна только в режиме ПК.
x Грубо / Точно. Удаление или снижение шумности
картинки. если шум не удаляется только функцией
«Точно», то отрегулируйте частоту как можно точнее
(Грубо), а затем повторите настройку «Точно». После
уменьшения шума снова настроите изображение, чтобы
оно располагалось в центре экрана.
x Позиция. Настройте положение экрана ПК с помощью
кнопок направления (u / d / l / r).
x Сброс настр.: Восстановление стандартных настроек
изображения.
Значения частоты/положения и точная настройка выбираются
Автоподстройкаt
автоматически.
✎Эта функция доступна только в режиме ПК.
Использование телевизора в качестве компьютерного
монитора
Настройка ПО компьютера (на примере Windows XP). В
зависимости от версии Windows и модели видеокарты фактические
окна настроек ПК могут отличаться. В этом случае практически
всегда можно использовать базовую информацию о настройке.
(если это невозможно, обратитесь к изготовителю компьютера или
дилеру Samsung.)
1. В меню «Пуск» Windows выберите «Панель управления».
2. В окне «Панель управления» выберите «Оформление и темы».
Отобразится диалоговое окно настроек дисплея.
3. Нажмите «Дисплей», откроется диалоговое окно настроек
дисплея.
4. В диалоговом окне настроек дисплея перейдите на вкладку
«Параметры».
x Правильная настройка размера (разрешения) [Оптимальное:
1920 x 1080 пикселей]. (T19B300: 1366 x 768 пикселей)
x если в диалоговом окне настроек дисплея имеется параметр
«Частота развертки по вертикали», выберите значение «60»
или «60 Гц». если этого параметра нет, просто нажмите «ОК» и
закройте диалоговое окно.
Правильная осанка при использовании изделия
При использовании изделия следите за правильностью осанки.
x Выпрямите спину.
x Расстояние между глазами и экраном должно составлять
45~50 см. Смотрите на экран прямо и вниз.
x Отрегулируйте угол наклона изделия так, чтобы свет не
отражался от экрана.
x Локти должны быть согнуты под прямым углом, а руки должны
находиться на одном уровне с задней стороной кисти.
x Согните локти под прямым углом.
x Поставьте пятки на пол и согните колени под углом 90
градусов или более. Расположите руки так, чтобы они
находились ниже сердца.
¦ Изменение параметров изображения
Дополнительные параметры
MENUm→ Изображение → Дополнительные параметры →
ENTERE
(Дополнительные параметры доступны в режимах Стандартный
и Кино.)
По сравнению с предыдущими моделями новые LED-дисплеи
Samsung имеют более четкое изображение.
✎При подключении ПК можно изменять только настройку Баланс
белого.
Дополнительные параметры
Режим только RGB Выкл.
Цвет. пространство Исходный
Баланс белого
Гамма 0
Автоконтраст Высокий
Черный тон Выкл.
Телесный оттенок 0
■ Автоконтраст (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий): Настройка
контрастности экрана.
■ Черный тон (Выкл. / Темный / Темнее / Самый темный): Выбор
уровня черного для настройки глубины изображения.
■ Телесный оттенок: Подчеркивание розового «телесного оттенка».
■ Режим только RGB (Выкл. / Красный / Зеленый / Синий):
Отображение регуляторов цветов Красный, Зеленый и Синий для
точной настройки оттенка и насыщенности.
■ Цвет. пространство (Авто / Исходный): Настройка цветового
пространства создания изображения.
■ Баланс белого: Настройка баланса белого для получения более
естественного изображения.
К: смещ. / З: смещ. / С: смещ:. Настройка смещения каждого
цвета (красный, зеленый, синий).
К: усил. / З: усил. / С: усил:. Настройка усиления каждого цвета
(красный, зеленый, синий).
Сброс: Восстановление стандартных значений настройки Баланс
белого.
■ Гамма: Настройка интенсивности основного цвета.
■ Подсветка движения (Выкл. / Вкл.): Сокращение энергопотребления
с помощью регулировки яркости.Русский 25
Основные функции
Параметры изображения
MENUm→ Изображение → Параметры изображения →
ENTERE
✎При подключении ПК можно изменять только настройку
Оттенок.
Параметры изображения
Оттенок Стандартный
Цифр. фильтр шумов Авто
Фильтр шумов MPEG Авто
Черный HDMI Низкий
Режим "фильм" Выкл.
■ Оттенок (Хол. / Стандартный / Теплый1 / Теплый2)
✎ Настройки Теплый1 или Теплый2 отключаются при
выборе режима изображения Динамический.
✎ Настройки можно изменять и сохранять для каждого
внешнего устройства, подключенного к входу LED-дисплея.
■ Цифр. фильтр шумов (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий / Авто
/ Автовизуализация): При приеме слабого сигнала можно включить
функцию Цифр. фильтр шумов, чтобы уменьшить статические
изображения и дублирование, которые могут появляться на экране.
✎ При слабом сигнале попробуйте изменять другие
настройки, пока не будет получено наилучшее
изображение.
Автовизуализация: Отображение уровня сигнала при
переключении аналоговых каналов.
✎ Функция доступна только для аналоговых каналов.
✎ Полоса зеленого цвета означает прием сигнала
максимального доступного уровня.
■ Фильтр шумов MPEG (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий / Авто):
Уменьшение шумов MPEG для улучшения качества изображения.
■ Черный HDMI (Низкий / Норм.): Выбор уровня черного для настройки
глубины изображения на экране.
✎ Настройка доступна только в режиме HDMI (сигналы RGB).
■ Режим «фильм» (Выкл. / Авто1 / Авто2): Функция автоматического
распознавания просмотра фильмов со всех источников сигнала и
настройки изображения для достижения оптимального качества.
✎ Доступно в ТВ-режиме, HDMI (1080i).
✎ если изображение не выглядит естественным, измените
настройку на Выкл. / Авто1 / Авто2 в режиме Режим
«фильм».
Сброс изображения (Да / Нет)
Восстановление стандартных настроек для текущего режима
изображения.
Меню «Звук»
¦ Смена предварительной настройки «Режим
звука»
MENUm→ Звук → Режим звука → ENTERE
■
Режим звука
Стандартный: Выбор стандартного режима звука.
t
■ Музыка: Выделение музыки по отношению к голосу.
■ Кино: Оптимальная настройка звука для фильмов.
■ Четкий голос: Выделение голоса по отношению к другим звукам.
■ Усиление: Повышение интенсивности высокочастотных звуков для
людей с нарушениями слуха.
✎если для настройки Выбрать громкогов. выбрано значение
Внеш. Ресивер., то настройка Режим звука недоступна.
¦ Изменение настроек звука
Звуковой эффект
MENUm→ Звук → Звуковой эффект → ENTERE
(Только для стандартного режима звука.)
■
Эта функция позволяет добиться эффекта объемного
SRS TruSurround HD(Выкл. / Вкл.) t
звучания виртуальной 5.1-канальной системы при
воспроизведении через два громкоговорителя или наушники
за счет применения технологии HRTF (Head Related Transfer
Function).
■ SRS TruDialog (Выкл. / Вкл.)
Эта функция позволяет усилить звук голоса по сравнению с
фоновой музыкой или звуковыми эффектами, чтобы диалоги
звучали более четко.
■ Эквалайзер
Настройка режима звука.
– Баланс L/R. Регулировка баланса между правым и
левым громкоговорителем.
100Гц / 300Гц / 1кГц / 3кГц / 10кГц (Настройка диапазона
частот). Настройка уровня громкости определенного
диапазона частот.
– Сброс. Восстановление стандартных настроек
эквалайзера.Русский 26
Основные функции
¦ Системы звука и т. д.
MENUm→ Звук → ENTERE
Параметры передачи звука
■ Язык аудио
(Только для цифровых каналов.)
Выбор языка звука по умолчанию.
✎ Доступные языки могут различаться в зависимости от
передачи.
■ Аудиоформат
(Только для цифровых каналов.)
Выбор аудиоформата.
■ Описание аудио
(Функция доступна не во всех регионах,
только для цифровых каналов.)
Эта функция обрабатывает аудиопоток
AD (Описание аудио), который передается
вместе с основным аудиопотоком.
✎ Описание аудио (Выкл./Вкл.).
Включение и выключение функции
описания аудио.
✎ Громкость. Регулировка громкости
описания аудио.
Дополнительные настройки
(Только для цифровых каналов.)
■ Уровень звука DTV (MPEG / HE-AAC): Эта функция позволяет
уменьшить различие между уровнем звукового сигнала (который
является одним из сигналов, принимаемых при цифровом
телевизионным вещании) и требуемым уровнем громкости.
✎ В зависимости от типа передаваемого сигнала настройку
MPEG / HE-AAC можно изменять в диапазоне от -10 дБ
до 0 дБ.
✎ Для увеличения или уменьшения громкости изменяйте
настройку в диапазоне от 0 до -10.
■ Выход SPDIF: Интерфейс SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital InterFace)
используется для передачи цифрового звука на громкоговорители
и различные цифровые устройства, например DVD плееры, с
уменьшением помех.
– Аудиоформат: Можно выбрать формат цифрового
аудиовыхода (SPDIF).
✎ Доступные форматы цифрового аудиовыхода (SPDIF)
могут различаться в зависимости от источника сигнала.
– Автозадержка: Исправление проблем с синхронизацией
звука при просмотре телевизионных передач или видео и
при прослушивании цифрового звука с использованием
внешнего устройства, например АV ресивера (0-250 мс).
✎ Эта функция недоступна для устройств серии TB300.
■ Комп Dolby Digital (Line / RF): Эта функция минимизирует разницу
между сигналом Dolby Digital и звуковым сигналом (например, MPEG
Audio, HE-AAC, ATV Sound).
✎ Выберите Line, чтобы получить динамический звук
и RF, чтобы уменьшить разницу между громкими и
приглушенными звуками в ночное время.
Line: Для сигналов с громкостью больше или меньше -31 дБ
(исходное значение) задается уровень выходного сигнала -20 дБ
или -31 дБ.
RF: Для сигналов с громкостью больше или меньше -20 дБ
(исходное значение) задается уровень выходного сигнала -10 дБ
или -20 дБ.
Настройка громкоговор.
■ Выбрать громкогов: (Внеш. Ресивер. / Громкогов. ТВ).Возможно
появление эхо из-за разницы скорости кодирования основного
громкоговорителя и аудиоресивера. В этом случае выберите настройку
Внеш. Ресивер..
✎ если для параметра Выбрать громкогов. установлено
значение Внеш. громк., то кнопка регулировки громкости
и кнопка MUTE не работают и, соответственно,
ограничиваются возможности настройки звука.
✎ если для настройки Выбрать громкогов. выбрано
значение Внеш. Ресивер..
x Громкогов. ТВ: Выкл., Внеш. Ресивер.: Вкл.
✎ если для настройки Выбрать громкогов. выбрано
значение Громкогов. ТВ..
x Громкогов. ТВ: Вкл., Внеш. Ресивер.: Вкл.
✎ если нет видеосигнала, то звук отключается в обоих
громкоговорителях.
✎ Эта функция недоступна для устройств серии TB300.
■ Громкость авто (Выкл. / Норм. / Ночь): Для выравнивая громкости во
всех каналах выберите значение Норм..
Ночь: В этом режиме звучание улучшается по сравнению с
режимом Норм., и практически не создается шум. Этот режим
целесообразно использовать ночью.
Сброс звука (Да / Нет)
Восстановление стандартных значений всех настроек звука.
¦
При выборе функции
Выбор режима звука
Dual fg, на экране отображается текущий
t
режим звука.
Тип звука Dual f-g По умолчанию
A2
стерео
Моно Моно Автоматическое
Стерео Стерео ↔ Моно изменение
Dual Dual f ↔ Dual g Dual f
NICAM
Стерео
Моно Моно Автоматическое
Стерео Моно ↔ Стерео изменение
Dual
Моно ↔ Dual f
Dual g
Dual f
✎если сигнал Стерео слаб, и включено автоматическое
переключение, то осуществляется переключение в режим Моно.
✎Включается только для стереозвука.
✎Доступно, только если для настройки Источник выбрано
значение ТВ.Русский 27
Основные функции
Меню «Система»
¦ Настройка времени
MENUm→ Система → ENTERE
Время
■ Часы: Настройка времени для использования различных функций
таймера LED-дисплея.
✎ Текущее время отображается при нажатии кнопки INFO.
✎ После отключения кабеля питания время нужно
устанавливать снова.
Режим часов (Авто / Ручной)
x Авто. Автоматическая установка времени с использованием
сигнала цифрового канала.
✎ Для автоматической установки времени необходимо
подключить антенну.
x Ручной. Ввод текущего времени вручную.
✎ В зависимости от вещательной станции и сигнала
автоматическая настройка времени может оказаться
неправильной. В этом случае введите время вручную.
Установка часов:. Вручную введите Число, Месяц, Год, Часы и
Минуты.
✎ Настройка доступна, только если для режима Режим
часов выбрано значение Ручной.
✎ Значения Число, Месяц, Год, Часы и Минуты можно ввести,
нажимая цифровые кнопки на пульте ДУ.
Часовой пояс (Авто / Ручной) (зависит от страны). Выбор
часового пояса.
✎ Эта функция доступна, только если для режима Режим
часов выбрано значение Авто.
– GMT(GMT-3:00~GMT-1:00 / GMT /
GMT+1:00~GMT+ 12:00): Выберите часовой пояс.
✎ Эта функция доступна, только если для настройки
Часовой пояс выбрано значение Ручной.
– Летнее время (Выкл. / Вкл.). Включение или
отключение поддержки летнего времени.
✎ Эта функция доступна, только если для настройки
Часовой пояс выбрано значение Ручной.
Использование таймера сна
■ Таймер сна t: Автоматическое выключение LED-дисплея
через заданный период времени. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 и 180 минут).
✎ Чтобы отключить функцию Таймер сна, выберите Выкл..
Настройка таймера включения / выключения
■ Таймер включения
Таймер включения 1 / Таймер включения 2 / Таймер включения
3: Можно настроить три разных таймера включения. Сначала
нужно настроить часы.
Таймер включения 1
Настройка Выкл.
Время 0:00
Громкость 20
Источник ТВ
Антенна DTV
Канал 1
Вс Пн Вт Ср Чт Пт Сб
R Возврат
Закрыть
Настройка: Выберите Выкл., Один раз, Ежедневно, Пн-Пт,
Пн-Cб, Сб-Вс или Ручной. При выборе настройки Ручной можно
выбрать день включения таймера.
✎ Выбранные дни отмечаются символом c.
Время: Введите часы и минуты.
Громкость: Задайте уровень громкости.
Источник: Выберите желаемый источник сигнала, когда LED-
дисплей включится автоматически. (USB можно выбрать, только
если к LED-дисплею подключено USB-устройство)
Антенна (если для настройки Источник выбрано значение ТВ).
Выберите ATV или DTV.
Канал (если для настройки Источник выбрано значение ТВ).
Выберите канал.
Музыка / Фото (если для настройки Источник выбрано значение
USB). Выберите папку USB-устройства, содержащую музыкальные
файлы или фотографии, которые будут воспроизводиться при
автоматическом включении LED-дисплея.
✎ Примечание.
x если USB-устройство не содержит музыкальных файлов
или не выбрана папка с музыкальными файлами, то
функция таймера не будет работать правильно.
x если в USB-устройстве только одна фотография, то
слайд-шоу не будет воспроизводиться.
x Нельзя выбрать папку с очень длинным именем.
x Каждому USB-устройству назначается собственная
папка. если используется несколько USB-устройств
одного типа, то следует следить за тем, чтобы у
назначаемых каждому USB-устройству папок были
разные имена.
x При использовании функции Таймер включения
рекомендуется подключать флеш-накопители USB и
кард-ридеры.
x Функция Таймер включения может не работать с USB-
устройствами со встроенными аккумуляторами, MP3
плеерами или портативными медиаплеерами некоторых
изготовителей, так распознавание этих устройств
осуществляется очень долго.Русский 28
Основные функции
■ Таймер выключения
Таймер выключения 1 / Таймер выключения 2 / Таймер
выключения 3: Можно настроить три разных таймера
выключения. Сначала нужно настроить часы.
Таймер выключ. 1
Настройка Выкл.
Время 0:00
Вс Пн Вт Ср Чт Пт Сб
R Возврат
Закрыть
Настройка: Выберите Выкл., Один раз, Ежедневно, Пн-Пт,
Пн-Cб, Сб-Вс или Ручной. При выборе настройки Ручной можно
выбрать день включения таймера.
✎ Выбранные дни отмечаются символом c.
Время: Введите часы и минуты.
¦ Блокировка программ
MENUm→ Система → Защита → ENTERE
Защита
✎Перед выводом экрана настройки отображается экран ввода
PIN-кода.
✎Введите PIN-код из 4 цифр, значение по умолчанию — «0-0-0-0».
PIN-код можно изменить, используя функцию Изменение PIN.
■ Блокировка канала (Выкл. / Вкл.): На экране Диспетчер каналов
можно заблокировать каналы, например, чтобы дети не смогли
смотреть непредназначенные для них программы.
✎ Функция доступна, только если для настройки Источник
выбрано значение ТВ.
■ Блокировка программ (зависит от страны). Предотвращение
неавторизованного использования, например, просмотра
детьми непредназначенных для них программ, с помощью
PIN-кода из 4 цифр. если выбранный канал заблокирован, то
отображается символ «\».
✎ Элементы экране Блокировка программ различаются в
зависимости от страны.
■ Изменение PIN: Отображается экран Изменение PIN. Введите
любые 4 цифры, которые будут вашим PIN-кодом. Изменение личного
идентификационного номера (PIN) необходимо для настройки LED-
дисплея. Введите эти четыре цифры еще раз. После отображения
экрана подтверждения PIN-код запоминается.
¦ Экономный режим
MENUm→ Система → Экономный режим → ENTERE
Экономный режим
■ tЭкон. энергии (Выкл. / Низкий / Средний / Высокий / Откл. экран)
: Эта функция регулирует яркость LED-дисплея для
уменьшения потребления электроэнергии. При выборе настройки
Откл. экран изображение выключается и остается только звук.
Для включения изображения нажмите любую кнопку, кроме кнопки
регулировки громкости.
■ Режим ожидания (Выкл. / 15 мин / 30 мин / 60 мин): Чтобы
предотвратить ненужное потребление электроэнергии, укажите, в
течение какого времени LED-дисплей будет оставаться включенным,
если он не принимает сигнал.
✎ Функция недоступна, если ПК находится в режиме
энергосбережения.
■ Автовыключение (Выкл. / Вкл.): Экономия энергии посредством
выключения LED-дисплея, если никакие действия не выполнялись в
течение 4 часов.
¦ Другие функции
MENUm→ Система → ENTERE
Язык
■ Язык меню: Выбор языка меню.
■ Язык телетекста: Выбор языка телетекста.
✎ если выбранный язык вещания недоступен, то выбирается
английский язык.
■ Предпочитаемый язык (Основное аудио / Дополнит. аудио
/ Основные субтитры / Дополнит. субтитры / Основной
телетекст / Дополнит. телетекст): Выберите язык, который
будет языком по умолчанию при выборе канала.
Субтитры
Используйте это меню для выбора режима
Субтитры.
■ Субтитры (Выкл. / Вкл.): Включение или
отключение субтитров.
■ Режим субтитров (Норм. / С нарушен. слуха):
Выбор режима субтитров.
■ Язык субтитров: Выбор языка субтитров.
✎ если просматриваемая программа
не поддерживает субтитры С нарушен. слуха, то
автоматически включаются субтитры По предпочтениям,
даже если выбран режим С нарушен. слуха.
✎ если выбранный язык вещания недоступен, то выбирается
английский язык.Русский 29
Основные функции
Цифровой текст (Отключить / Включить)
(Только для Великобритании.)
если программа передается с цифровым текстом, то эта функция
включена.
Время автозащиты
■ Выкл. / 2 часа / 4 часа / 8 часов / 10 часов: если на экране остается
неподвижное изображение в течение заданного пользователем
времени, то включается заставка, чтобы предотвратить образование на
экране остаточных изображений.
Общие
■ Макс. энергосбер. (Выкл. / Вкл.): Отключение монитора компьютера,
если компьютер не используется в течение определенного времени,
что сократить энергопотребление.
■ Игр. режим (Выкл. / Вкл.): При подключении игровой консоли,
например PlayStation™ или Xbox™, можно получить более
реалистичное изображение, выбрав игровой режим.
✎Примечание.
x Меры предосторожности и ограничения для игрового режима
– Чтобы отключить игровую консоль и подключить другое
внешнее устройство в для настройки Игр. режим
выберите значение Выкл. в меню настройки.
– При отображении меню LED-дисплея в режиме Игр.
режим изображение слегка дрожит.
x Игр. режим недоступен, если выбран источник сигнала ТВ
или ПК
x После подключения игровой консоли для настройки Игр.
режим выберите значение Вкл.. К сожалению, вы можете
заметить ухудшение качества изображения.
x если для настройки Игр. режим выбрано значение Вкл.
– Для настройки Реж. изображения задается значение
Стандартный, а для настройки Режим звука задается
значение Кино.
■ Блокировка панели (Выкл. / Вкл.): Одновременная блокировка или
разблокирование всех кнопок на передней панели. если включена
«Блокировка панели», то ни одна из кнопок на передней панели не
работает.
■ Логот. загрузки (Выкл./Вкл.): Отображение логотипа Samsung при
включении LED-дисплея.
Общий интерфейc
■ Меню CI: Это меню позволяет выбирать функции меню CAM. Выбор
меню CI на основе меню CI карты.
■ Инфо о приложении: Просмотр информации и модуле CAM,
вставленном в разъем CI и о карте «CI или CI+ CARD», вставленной
в модуль CAM. Модуль CAM можно вставлять во включенный или в
выключенный LED-дисплей.
1. Модуль CI CAM можно приобрести у ближайшего дилера, или
позвонив по телефону.
2. Надежно вставьте карту «CI или CI+ CARD» в модуль CAM в
направлении стрелки.
3. Вставьте модуль CAM с картой «CI или CI+ CARD» в разъем
общего интерфейса в направлении стрелки так, чтобы он был
выровнен параллельно разъему.
4. Проверьте, можете ли вы смотреть изображение на
зашифрованных каналах.
¦ Картинка в картинке (PIP)
MENUm→ Система → PIP → ENTERE
Можно одновременно смотреть изображение приемника LEDPIP t
дисплея и одного внешнего источника видеосигнала. Функция PIP
(Картинка в картинке) не работает для того же режима.
✎Примечание.
x Выбор источника звука в режиме PIP описан в разделе Выбор
звука.
x если выключить LED-дисплей при просмотре изображения в
режиме PIP, то окно PIP исчезает.
x Можно заметить, что изображение в окне PIP выглядит слегка
неестественно при использовании основного экрана для
просмотра игры или караоке.
x если включена Блокировка программ, использовать
функцию PIP нельзя.
x Настройки PIP
Основное изображение Дополнительное
изображение
HDMI, HDMI (ПК), Компонент, ПК ТВ
■ PIP (Выкл. / Вкл.): Включение или выключение функции PIP.
■ Канал: Выберите канал дополнительного изображения.
■ Размер (Õ / Ã): Выберите размер дополнительного изображения.
■ Позиция (à / – / — / œ): Выберите положение
дополнительного изображения.
■ Выбор звука (Основной / Дополнит.): Можно выбрать источник звука
(Основной / Дополнит.) в режиме PIP.
¦ DivX® видео по запросу
Отображение регистрационного кода, авторизованного для
телевизора. Посетив веб-сайт DivX и зарегистрировавшись,
можно загрузить регистрационный файл VOD. Для завершения
регистрации воспроизведите регистрацию VOD как
медиасодержимое.
✎Для получения дополнительной информации о DivX® VOD
посетите веб-сайт http://vod.divx.com.Русский 30
Основные функции
Меню «Поддержка»
MENUm→ Поддержка → ENTERE
Самодиагностика
✎Самодиагностика может продолжаться несколько секунд. Это
часть нормальной работы LED-дисплея.
■ Тест изображения (Да / Нет): Используется для проверки
изображения.
Да: если тестовое изображение не появляется, или если на
нем имеются помехи, выберите Да. Возможно, LED-дисплей
неисправен. Обратитесь за поддержкой в операторский центр
Samsung.
Нет: если тестовое изображение отображается корректно,
выберите Нет. Возможно, проблема с внешним оборудованием.
Проверьте подключения. если проблема сохранится, изучите
инструкцию по эксплуатации внешнего устройства.
■ Звуковой тест (Да / Нет): Использование встроенной тестовой
мелодии для проверки звука.
Да: если во время звукового теста звучит только один
громкоговоритель, или звука нет, выберите Да. Возможно, LED-
дисплей неисправен. Обратитесь за поддержкой в операторский
центр Samsung.
Нет: если вы слышите звук из громкоговорителей, выберите
Нет. Возможно, проблема с внешним оборудованием. Проверьте
подключения. если проблема сохранится, изучите инструкцию по
эксплуатации внешнего устройства.
■ Информ. о сигнале: (Только для цифровых каналов.) Каналы высокой
четкости либо принимаются с отличным качеством, либо недоступны.
Отрегулируйте антенну, чтобы увеличить уровень сигнала.
■ Сброс: Восстановление стандартных значений всех настроек, кроме
настроек сети.
Обновление ПО
Обновление ПО можно выполнить, используя широковещательный
сигнал, или загрузив новую версию встроенного ПО с сайта www.
samsung.com на USB-накопитель.
Текущая версия ПО уже установлена в LED-дисплее.
✎Информация о ПО указывается как «Год/Месяц/Число_Версия».
Обновление ПО
По USB
По каналу
Альтернативное ПО обеспечение
Обновление в реж. ожидан. Через 2 часа
Установка последней версии
■ По USB: Вставьте
в телевизор
USB-накопитель с
файлом обновления
ПО, загруженным с
сайта www.samsung.
com. Будьте осторожны — не отключайте питание и не извлекайте
USB-накопитель, пока обновление не будет завершено. После
завершения обновления ПО телевизор автоматически выключается
и снова включается. После обновления ПО восстанавливаются
стандартные настройки изображения и звука. Рекомендуется записать
ваши настройки, чтобы их можно было легко восстановить после
обновления.
■ По каналу: Обновление ПО с использованием широковещательного
сигнала.
✎ При выборе этой функции во время передачи ПО
выполняется автоматический поиск и загрузка ПО.
✎ Необходимое для загрузки ПО время определяется
состоянием сигнала.
■ Альтернативное ПО: Замените текущее программное
обеспечение альтернативным.
■ Обновление в реж. ожидан. (Выкл. / Через 1 час / Через
2 часа / 00:00 / 02:00 / 12:00 / 14:00). Обновление будет
автоматически выполнено в выбранное время. Так как питание
устройства включается, экран может слегка светиться. Это
может продолжаться более одного часа, пока обновление ПО
не будет завешено.
Обращение в Samsung
Ознакомьтесь с этой информацией, если LED-дисплей неисправен,
или если вы хотите обновить ПО. Вы можете получить информацию
о наших центрах поддержки и о загрузке ПО.
Дом. стр. содержим.
Вы можете получить удовольствие от разного полезного
содержимого.
Боковая панель телевизора
USB-накопительРусский 31
Дополнительные функции
Вы можете просматривать видео и фотографии и слушать музыку,
сохраненную на запоминающем устройстве USB.
1. Нажмите кнопку CONTENT.
2. Нажимайте кнопки l / r, чтобы выбрать меню (Media Play),
затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE.
CONTENT → Media Play → ENTERE
Использование функции Media Play
¦ Подключение USB-устройства
1. Включите телевизор.
2. Подключите USB-устройство с фотографиями и музыкальными файлами к разъему USB
на боковой стороне телевизора.
3. После подключения USB-устройства к телевизору появляется всплывающее окно. В нем
можно выбрать подсоединенное устройство.
✎Функция может не работать должным образом с нелицензионными мультимедийными файлами.
✎Что нужно знать перед использованием функции Media Play?
x Протокол MTP (Media Transfer Protocol — Протокол передачи мультимедийных данных) не поддерживается.
x Поддерживаются файловые системы FAT16, FAT32 и NTFS.
x Некоторые типы цифровых камер и аудиоустройств с интерфейсом USB могут быть несовместимы с этим телевизором.
x Функция Media Play поддерживает только устройства USB MSC (Mass Storage Class — Класс запоминающих устройств). MSC — это
класс запоминающих устройств для хранения данных. Примерами MSC могут служить USB флеш-накопители, устройства чтения флеш-
карт и USB жесткие диски (USB концентраторы не поддерживаются). Устройства должны подключаться непосредственно к USB-порту
телевизора.
x USB жесткие диски не поддерживаются.
x Перед подключением устройства к телевизору следует создать резервную копию файлов, чтобы предотвратить из повреждение или
потерю данных. Компания SAMSUNG не несет ответственности за любые повреждения файлов или потерю данных.
x Не отключайте USB-устройство во время его загрузки.
x Чем больше разрешение изображений, тем больше времени требуется для их отображения на экране.
x Максимальное поддерживаемое разрешение файлов в формате JPEG — 15360 x 8640 пикселей.
x Для неподдерживаемых или поврежденных файлов отображается сообщение «Неподдерживаемый формат файла».
x Невозможно воспроизведение файлов MP3 с DRM, которые были загружены с не бесплатных сайтов. DRM (Digital Rights Management
— Управление цифровыми правами) — это технология, поддерживающая интегрированное и всесторонне создание, распространение
и управление содержимым, включая защиту авторских прав и участие в прибыли поставщиков содержимого, защиту от нелегального
копирования содержимого, а также управление выставлением счетов и оплатой.
x если подключено более двух устройств PTP, то одновременно можно использовать только одно.
x если подключено более двух устройств MSC, то некоторые из них могут не распознаваться. USB-устройства, которые потребляют много
энергии (более 500 мА) или требуют высокого напряжения (более 5 В) могут не поддерживаться.
x если при подключении или использовании USB-устройства отображается сообщение о превышении допустимого энергопотребления, то
устройство может быть не распознано или может функционировать неправильно.
Media Play / Видео /
Свободно 3,23 ГБ / 3,55 ГБ
Cruzer Blade
Видео
Фотографии
Музыка
R Возврат
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
Боковая панель телевизора
USB-накопительРусский 32
Дополнительные функции
x если на телевизоре не нажимались кнопки в течение времени, определенного настройкой Время автозащиты, то включается заставка.
x На некоторых внешних жестких дисках при подключении к телевизору может автоматически включаться режим энергосбережения.
x если используется удлинительный кабель USB, то USB-устройство может быть не распознано, также могут не читаться файлы
устройства.
x если подключенное к телевизору USB-устройство не распознано, поврежден список файлов устройства, или файлы из списка не
воспроизводятся, подключите USB-устройство к ПК, отформатируйте устройство и проверьте подключение.
x Функция Media Play поддерживает файлы jpeg только с последовательным представлением данных.
¦ Отображение на экране
Выберите файл, используя кнопки u / d / l / r, затем нажмите кнопку ENTERE. Файл воспроизводится. Экран Media Play может
отличаться в зависимости от того, как он был вызван.
Режим содержимого.
Можно выбрать
категорию содержимого.
Информация.
Отображение информации о
выбранном содержимом:
категория (например, музыка);
устройство (например, USB-
накопитель);
имя папки/файла и страница.
Отображение информации
о выбранном файле.
На папку вверх
Video_02
1 янв 2012
Video_02.AVI
1 янв 2012
17,6 МБ
Video_03
1 янв 2012
Video_04
1 янв 2012
Video_05
1 янв 2012
Video_06
1 янв 2012
Video_07
1 янв 2012
Video_08
1 янв 2012
Video_01
1 янв 2012
Media Play / Видео / Cruzer.../Video_02.AVI 2 / 8
�µ Постраничн E Воспр. T Сервис R Возврат
Кнопки управления
• �Возврат на предыдущую страницу. Доступна только в режиме Музыка.
• µПереход на следующую страницу. Доступна только в режиме Музыка.
• E Воспр.: Воспроизведение медиафайла.
• T Сервис. Отображение меню функций.
• RВозврат. Возврат на предыдущий этап.
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.Русский 33
Дополнительные функции
Видео
Воспроизведение видео
1. Нажимайте кнопки l / r / u / d, чтобы выбрать в списке файлов
нужный видеофайл.
2. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE или кнопку ∂ (Воспроизвести).
x В верхней части экрана отображается имя файла и время
воспроизведения.
x если информация о видеофайле недоступна, то время
воспроизведения и индикатор прогресса воспроизведения не
отображаются.
x Во время воспроизведения можно выполнять поиск с помощью
кнопок l и r.
x Во время воспроизведения можно использовать кнопки π (Назад)
и µ (Вперед).
✎ В этом режиме можно просматривать видеоклипы,
содержащиеся в игре, но нельзя играть в саму игру.
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
Поддерживаемые форматы субтитров
– Внешнее
Название расширение
Текст с указанием временных меток MPEG-4 .ttxt
SAMI .smi
SubRip .srt
SubViewer .sub
Micro DVD .sub или .txt
SubStation Alpha .ssa
Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass
Powerdivx .psb
– Внутренние
Название Контейнер
Xsub AVI
SubStation Alpha MKV
Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV
SubRip MKV
Текст с указанием временных меток MPEG-4 MP4Русский 34
Дополнительные функции
Поддерживаемые видеоформаты
Расширение
файла
Контейнер Видеокодек Разрешение
Частота
кадров
(кадров/
сек)
Скорость
потока
(Мбит/с)
Комментарии Аудиокодек
*.avi
*.mkv
*.asf
*.wmv
*.mp4
*.3gp
*.vro
*.mpg
*.mpeg
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
*.m2ts
*.mts
*.divx
AVI
MKV
ASF
MP4
3GP
VRO
VOB
PS
TS
DivX 3.11 / 4.x
/ 5.1 / 6.0
1920 x 1080
30
20 [40]
GMC не поддерживается
AC3
LPCM
ADMPCM(IMA, MS)
AAC
HE-AAC
WMA
DD+
MPEG(MP3)
DTS Core
Vorbis
MPEG4 SP /
ASP
H.264 BP / MP
/ HP
Не включаются FMO / ASO
/ RS
Поддержка BP / MP / HP
Level 4.1
H.263
Profile3, только для
стандартного разрешения
(SD)
Motion JPEG 640 x 480 10
Window Media
Video v9
1920 x 1080 20 [40]
Поддержка VC1 SP / MP /A
P L3, L4 не поддерживается
Simple Profile Medium Level
Main Profile High Level
Advanced Profile Level 3
Поддержка WMV9
MPEG2 Hight Profile High Level
MPEG1 MPEG-1, кроме D-pictureРусский 35
Дополнительные функции
Другие ограничения
✎Примечание.
x При возникновении проблем с содержимым кодека этот кодек не будет поддерживаться.
x если информация контейнера неверна и файл содержит ошибки, то правильное воспроизведение этого контейнера невозможно.
x Воспроизведение звука или видео может оказаться невозможным, если частота потока или частота кадров содержимого превышает
максимальную допустимую частоту кадров, указанную в приведенной выше таблице.
x если имеются ошибке в таблице индексов, то функция поиска (перехода) не поддерживается.
x При воспроизведении видео через сетевое подключение возможно «подергивание» изображения.
Название Формат
x Поддержка до H.264, Level 4.1
x H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 и AVCHD не
поддерживаются.
x MPEG4 SP, ASP:
– Менее 1280 x 720: максимум 60 кадров
– Более 1280 x 720: максимум 30 кадров
x GMC 2 не поддерживается.
x Поддержка до WMA 7, 8, 9, STD
x WMA 9 PRO не поддерживает более 2 аудиоканалов или
аудио без потерь.
x WMA с частотой дискретизации звука в 22050 Гц в
монорежиме не поддерживается.
Фотографии
Просмотр фотографий (или Слайд-шоу)
1. Нажимайте кнопки u / d / l / r, чтобы выбрать фотографию в
списке файлов.
2. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE.
– Когда на экране отображается выбранная фотография,
нажмите кнопку ENTERE, чтобы включить слайд-шоу.
– Во время слайд-шоу все файлы из списка файлов
отображаются один за другим.
✎Во время слайд-шоу могут автоматически воспроизводиться
музыкальные файлы, если для настройки Фоновая музыка выбрано
значение Вкл..
✎Настройку Фоновая музыка нельзя изменить, пока не завершится
загрузка фоновой музыки.
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
0801181247070.JPG
1 янв 2012
663,0 КБ
1920 x 1080
�µПостраничн E Воспр. T Сервис R Возврат
Media Play / Фотографии / Cruzer... / Фотографии / 0801181... .JPG
7 / 1000
На папку вверх
Поддерживаемые форматы изображения
Расширение файла Формат Разрешение
*.jpg JPEG 15360 x 8640
*.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080
*.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640Русский 36
Дополнительные функции
Музыка
Воспроизведение музыки
1. Нажимайте кнопки u / d, чтобы выбрать музыкальный файл
(Музыка) в списке файлов.
2. Нажмите кнопку ENTERE.
✎Отображаются только музыкальные файлы со следующими
расширениями. Файлы с другими расширениями не отображаются,
даже если они сохранены на том же USB-устройстве.
✎если при воспроизведении MP3-файлы звучат ненормально, измените
настройку Эквалайзер в меню Звук. (MP3-файлы с перемодуляцией
могут звучать с искажениями.)
• Отображаемое изображение может отличаться в зависимости от модели.
Media Play / Музыка / Cruzer... / Музыка / Музыка_01.mp3
Музыка_01 Исполнитель 1
Музыка_02 Исполнитель 2
Музыка_01
Исполнитель 1
2003
Fallen
Other
2:36 / 5:00
Музыка_03 Исполнитель 3
Музыка_04 Исполнитель 4
Музыка_05 Исполнитель 5
Музыка_06 Исполнитель 6
Музыка_07 Исполнитель 7
Музыка_08 Исполнитель 8
Музыка_09 Исполнитель 9
На папку вверх
b{ Постраничн EВоспр. T Сервис R Возврат
Воспроизведение выбранной музыки
1. Нажмите кнопку TOOLST и выберите функцию Воспр. выбора.
2. Выберите файлы.
✎ Слева от выбранных файлов отображается символ c.
3. Нажмите кнопку TOOLST и выберите функцию Воспр. выбора.
✎ Можно выбрать или отменить выбор всех музыкальных файлов, нажав Выбрать все / Отменить все.
Поддерживаемые форматы музыки
Расширение файла Тип Кодек
*.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
*.m4a
*.mpa
*.aac
*.3ga
MPEG4 AAC
*.flac FLAC FLAC
*.ogg OGG Vorbis
*.wma WMA WMAРусский 37
Дополнительные функции
¦ Media Play — Дополнительные функции
Меню настроек воспроизведения видео/фотографий/музыки
Нажмите кнопку TOOLST, чтобы выполнить следующие операции.
Категория Действия Видео Фотографии Музыка
Случайный порядок Можно воспроизводить музыку в случайном порядке. >
Режим повтора Можно воспроизводить медиафайлы с повтором. > >
Реж. изображения Можно настроить параметры отображения. > >
Режим звука Можно настроить параметры звучания. > > >
Запустить показ слайдов
/ Остановка показа
Можно запустить или приостановить слайд-шоу. >
Скор. слайд-шоу Во время слайд-шоу можно выбрать скорость показа фотографий. >
Фоновая музыка Можно включить или отключить фоновую музыку во время слайд-шоу. >
Настройка фоновой музыки Можно выбрать фоновую музыку, звучащую во время слайд-шоу. >
Увеличенный Можно увеличивать изображения в полноэкранном режиме. >
Поворот Можно поворачивать изображения в полноэкранном режиме. >
Информация Можно посмотреть подробную информацию о воспроизводимом файле. > > >
Воспр. выбора Можно воспроизвести выбранные файлы. > > >
Фильм Можно перейти непосредственно другому файлу. >
Поиск по времени Используя кнопки l и r, в фильмах можно выполнять поиск по времени с
интервалом 1 минута. >
Размер картинки Можно настроить размер картинки. >
Субтитры Вы можете включить или отключить субтитры Вкл. / Выкл.. >
Настройки субтитров Эта возможно лишь в том случае, когда имя файла с субтитрами совпадает
с именем видеофайла. >
Язык аудио Смотрите видео на поддерживаемом языке по своему выбору. Это возможно
только при воспроизведении потокового файла, который поддерживает
несколько аудиоформатов.
>Русский 38
Другая информация
Функция «Телетекст» для аналоговых каналов
Страница индексов телетекста содержит информацию об использовании этой услуги. Чтобы информация телетекста отображалась
правильно,необходим стабильный уровень сигнала канала. если это условие не выполнено, информация может отсутствовать, а некоторые
страницы могут не отображаться.
✎Страницы телетекста можно изменять, нажимая цифровые клавиши на пульте ДУ.
1 / (Телетекст включен/
смешанный/выключен). Включение
режима телетекста для текущего
канала. Нажмите кнопку два раза для
наложения телетекста на текущее
изображение. Нажмите ее еще раз для
отключение телетекста.
2 8 (сохранить). Сохранение страниц
телетекста.
3 6 (индекс). Отображение страницы
индекса (содержимого) при просмотре
телетекста.
4 4 (размер). Отображение
увеличенного в два раза телетекста
в верхней половине экрана. Чтобы
переместить текст в нижнюю половину
экрана, нажмите кнопку еще раз. Для
обычного отображения нажмите ее
еще раз.
5 9 (удержание). Удержание
отображения текущей страницы, если
имеется несколько вторичных страниц,
которые следуют автоматически. Для
отмены нажмите еще раз.
6 Цветные кнопки (красная, зеленая,
желтая, синяя). В системе FASTEXT
эти кнопки используются вещающими
компаниями. Различные разделы
телетекста отмечены цветами, и их
можно выбрать, нажимая цветные
кнопки. Нажмите кнопку, цвет которой
соответствует цвету нужного раздела.
Отображается новая страница,
отмеченная цветом. Элементы
можно выбирать таким же способом.
Для отображения предыдущей
или следующей страницы нажмите
соответствующую цветную кнопку.
7 0 (режим). Выбор стандартного
режима телетекста (LIST/ FLOF).
При нажатии кнопки в режиме LIST
осуществляется переключение в
режим сохранения списка. В режиме
сохранения списка сохранение страниц
телетекста в списке осуществляется с
помощью кнопки 8(сохранить).
8 1 (дополнительная страница).
Отображение доступных
дополнительных страниц.
9 2 (пролистывание вперед).
Отображение следующей страницы
телетекста.
0 3 (пролистывание назад).
Отображение предыдущей страницы
телетекста.
! 5 (открыть). Отображение скрытого
текста (например, ответов на вопросы
викторин). Для возврата к обычному
тексту отмены нажмите кнопку еще
раз.
@ 7 (отменить). Уменьшение
телетекста, наложенного на текущее
изображение.
Типовая страница телетекста
Часть Содержание
A Номер выбранной
страницы.
B Идентификатор
вещательного канала.
C Номер текущей
страницы или символы
поиска.
D Дата и время.
E Текст.
F Информация о
состоянии. Информация
FASTEXT.
7
8
9
0
!
@
3
1
4
5
6
2Русский 39
Другая информация
Крепление кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки
Подготовка к установке кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки
1. Выключите изделие и отключите кабель питания от настенной розетки.
2. Положите мягкую ткань или подушку на ровную поверхность, чтобы защитить панель, и положите изделие лицевой стороной вниз.
3. Держите основной корпус изделия руками. Потяните подставку в направлении стрелки, чтобы отделить ее.
Крепление кронштейна для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки
1
A
2
3 4
[ Осторожно
Важно
При установке настенного крепежа не используйте шурупы длиннее 14 мм (L14).
4. Приложите кронштейн для настенного монтажа/настольную подставку к монитору/LED-дисплею и надежно закрепите кронштейн для
настенного монтажа/настольную подставку, затянув винты.
5. Выровняйте паз на задней панели изделия так, чтобы он был соединен с пазом подставки (настольной подставки, кронштейна для
настенного монтажа или другой подставки) и надежно зафиксируйте подставку, затянув винты.
A B Комплект для настенного крепления/настольная подставка (не входит в комплект поставки)
A Кронштейн для настенного монтажа/настольной подставки BРусский 40
Другая информация
✎Примечание.
x При использовании винтов, длина которых превышает указанную в спецификации, возможно повреждение внутренних частей изделия.
x У кронштейнов для настенного монтажа, которые не совместимы со стандартной спецификацией VESA, длина винтов может отличаться в
зависимости от соответствующих спецификаций.
x Не используйте винты, которые несовместимы со стандартной спецификацией VESA, и не завинчивайте винты с чрезмерной силой. Это
может стать причиной повреждения изделия и травм в результате падения изделия. Компания Samsung не несет ответственности за
любые повреждения или травмы.
x Компания Samsung не несет ответственности за любое повреждение изделия или травмы, причиной которых стало использование
кронштейнов для настенного монтажа/настольных подставок, которые не совместимы со спецификацией, или выполнение установки
лицами, не имеющими соответствующих полномочий.
x Для настенного монтажа изделия приобретайте кронштейн для настенного монтажа, который обеспечивает расстояние до стены не
менее 10 см.
x Используйте кронштейн для настенного монтажа в соответствии с международными спецификациями.
Замок «кенсингтон» для защиты от кражи
Замок «кенсингтон» не поставляется компанией Samsung. Это устройство, используемое
для физического крепления системы при использовании в общедоступном месте. Внешний
вид и метод запирания могут отличаться от изображенных на иллюстрации в зависимости
от изготовителя замка. Дополнительная информация о правильном использовании замка
приведена в инструкции по эксплуатации замка «кенсингтон».
✎Найдите символ «K» на задней стороне LED-дисплея. Разъем «кенсингтон» находится рядом
с символом «K».
Для запирания изделия выполните следующие действия.
1. Оберните кабель замка «кенсингтон» вокруг большого неподвижного объекта, например,
стола или стула.
2. Протяните конец кабеля с замком через петлю на конце кабеля замка «кенсингтон».
3. Вставьте запирающее устройство в разъем «кенсингтон» на изделии (1).
4. Заприте замок.
1
<Дополнительно>
<Задняя сторона
LED-дисплея>
✎Это общая инструкция. Подробная инструкция содержится в руководстве пользователя, прилагаемом к запирающему устройству.
✎Запирающее устройство следует приобретать отдельно.
✎Местоположение разъема «кенсингтон» может различаться в зависимости от модели LED-дисплея.Русский 41
Другая информация
Устранение неполадок
если у вас возникнут вопросы, связанные с использованием LED-дисплея, сначала изучите этот раздел. если ни один из советов по
устранению неполадок не поможет, посетите веб-сайт www.samsung.com и выберите раздел «Поддержка» или позвоните в один из центров
поддержки, указанных на последней странице обложки этого руководства.
Проблемы Способы решения и разъяснения
Качество изображения Сначала выполните Тест изображения и убедитесь в том, что LED-дисплей правильно отображает тестовое
изображение. (Вызовите MENU - Поддержка - Самодиагностика - Тест изображения.) если тестовое
изображение отображается правильно, плохое изображение может быть обусловлено источником сигнала.
Изображение на экране LED-дисплея не
выглядит так же хорошо, как в магазине.
• если вы используете аналоговое кабельное телевидение/приставку, закажите приставку цифрового телевидения. Используйте
кабель HDMI для подключения источника сигнала высокой четкости.
• Пользователи кабельного/спутникового телевидения: попробуйте прием каналов высокой четкости.
• Антенное подключение: попробуйте прием каналов высокой четкости после автонастройки.
✎ Многие каналы высокой четкости передают материалы, полученные масштабированием
содержимого стандартной четкости.
• Выберите разрешение выходного сигнала кабельной/спутниковой приставки, равное 1080i или 720p.
• Убедитесь в том, что смотрите на экран LED-дисплея с минимального рекомендованного расстояния, основанного на размере и
четкости передаваемого изображения.
Искажения изображения: ошибка
микроблоков, маленькие блоки, точки,
пикселизация.
• Сжатие видео может стать причиной искажений изображения, в особенности, быстро изменяющегося изображения, например
спорта или кинобоевиков.
• Низкий уровень сигнала или плохое качество сигнала могут стать причиной искажения изображения. Эта проблема не связана с
LED-дисплеем.
• Использование мобильных телефонов на близком расстоянии от LED-дисплея (ок. 1 метра) может стать причиной появления шума
на изображении аналоговых и цифровых LED-дисплеев.
Плохая цветопередача или яркость. • Настройте параметры изображения в меню LED-дисплея. (Выберите Реж. изображения/Цвет/Яркость/Четкость)
• Настройте параметр Экон. энергии в меню LED-дисплея. (Выберите MENU — Система — Экономный режим — Экон. энергии)
• Попробуйте восстановить стандартные настройки изображения. (Выберите MENU — Изображение — Сброс изображения)
На краю экрана отображается пунктирная
линия.
• если выбран размер изображения По разм. экрана, то измените его на 16:9.
• Измените разрешение приставки кабельного/спутникового телевидения.
При смене канала изображение
останавливается или искажается или
задерживается.
• При подключении к приставке кабельного телевидения попробуйте перезапустить приставку. Снова подключите кабель питания и
подождите, пока приставка кабельного телевидения загрузится. Для этого может потребоваться до 20 минут.
• Выберите разрешение выходного сигнала приставки кабельного телевидения равное 1080i или 720p.
Качество звука Сначала выполните Звуковой тест и убедитесь в том, что LED-дисплей правильно воспроизводит звук.
(Выберите MENU - Поддержка - Самодиагностика - Звуковой тест)
если изделие правильно воспроизводит звук (ОК), то проблема может быть обусловлена источником сигнала.
Нет звука или слишком тихий звук при
максимальной громкости.
• Проверьте уровень громкости устройства, подключенного к LED-дисплею (приставка кабельного/спутникового телевидения, DVD,
Blu-ray и т. д.).
Хорошее качество изображения, но нет
звука.
• При использовании кабеля DVI-HDMI, LED-дисплей не поддерживает аудио.
• Перезагрузите подключенное устройство, отключив и снова подключив кабель питания устройства.
• если в LED-дисплея есть разъем для подключения наушников, убедитесь в том, что к этому разъему ничего не подключено.
Громкоговорители издают неприятный звук. • При подключении к антенне или кабелю проверьте уровень сигнала. Низкий уровень сигнала может быть причиной искажения
звука.
Не изображения, нет видео
LED-дисплей не включается. • Убедитесь в том, что кабель питания надежно подключен к настенной розетке и LED-дисплею.
• Убедитесь в том, что настенная розетка исправна.
• Нажмите кнопку питания (POWER) LED-дисплея, чтобы убедиться в том, что проблема не с пультом ДУ. если LED-дисплей
включится, см. раздел «Не работает дистанционное управление».
LED-дисплей автоматически выключается. • Убедитесь в том, что в меню Время для функции Таймер сна выбрана настройка Выкл..
• если к LED-дисплею подключен ПК, проверьте параметры питания ПК.
• Убедитесь в том, что кабель питания надежно подключен к настенной розетке и LED-дисплею.
• При просмотре на LED-дисплее эфирных или кабельных каналов LED-дисплей автоматически отключается через 10–15 минут,
если нет сигнала.Русский 42
Другая информация
Проблемы Способы решения и разъяснения
Нет изображения/видео. • Проверьте кабельные подключения (отключите и снова подключите все кабели, подключенные к LED-дисплею и внешним
устройствам).
• Проверьте, соответствуют ли выходы видеосигнала внешних устройств (приставка кабельного/спутникового телевидения, DVD,
Blu-ray и т. д.) входам LED-дисплея. Например, если у внешнего устройства есть выход HDMI, то его следует подключить к входу
HDMI LED-дисплея.
• Убедитесь в том, что подключенные устройства включены.
• Убедитесь в том, что в LED-дисплее выбран правильный источник сигнала, нажав кнопку SOURCE на пульте ДУ LED-дисплея.
• Перезагрузите подключенное устройство, отключив и снова подключив кабель питания устройства.
Радиочастотное подключение (кабель/антенна)
LED-дисплей не принимает каналы. • Убедитесь в том, что кабель антенны надежно подключен.
• Запустите функцию Настройка (первоначальная настройка), чтобы добавить доступные каналы в список каналов. Выберите
MENU — Система - Настройка (первоначальная настройка) и подождите, пока не будут сохранены все каналы.
• Проверьте, правильно ли направлена антенна.
Искажения изображения: ошибка
микроблоков, маленькие блоки, точки,
пикселизация.
• Сжатие видео может стать причиной искажений изображения, в особенности, быстро изменяющегося изображения, например
спорта или кинобоевиков.
• Низкий уровень сигнала может стать причиной искажения изображения. Эта проблема не связана с LED-дисплеем.
Другое
Изображение не отображается во весь
экран.
• На каналах высокой четкости есть полосы с обеих сторон экрана при отображении масштабированного содержимого стандартной
четкости (4:3).
• Черные полосы сверху и снизу отображаются при воспроизведении фильмов, соотношение сторон которых отличается от
соотношения сторон LED-дисплея.
• Измените размер изображения на внешнем устройстве или LED-дисплее для вывода изображения во весь экран.
Не работает дистанционное управление. • Замените батарейки пульта ДУ, соблюдая полярность (+/–).
• Протрите окно инфракрасного передатчика на пульте ДУ.
• Направьте пульт ДУ прямо на LED-дисплей с расстояния 1,5–2 метра.
Пульт ДУ приставки кабельного/
спутникового телевидения не включает
или не выключает LED-дисплей или не
регулирует громкость.
• Запрограммируйте пульт приставки кабельного/спутникового телевидения для работы с LED-дисплеем. Коды LED-дисплея
SAMSUNG указаны в инструкции по эксплуатации приставки кабельного/спутникового телевидения.
Отображается сообщение «Режим не
поддерживается».
• Проверьте поддерживаемое разрешение LED-дисплея и соответственно измените выходное разрешение внешнего устройства.
LED-дисплей пахнет пластмассой. • Этот нормальный запах, со временем он исчезнет.
Функция Информ. о сигнале в меню тестов
Самодиагностика LED-дисплея недоступна.
• Эта функция доступна только для цифровых каналов, принимаемых по антенному/радиочастотному/коаксиальному входу.
LED-дисплей наклонился вправо или влево. • Снимите подставку с LED-дисплея и прикрепите ее снова.
Не удается прикрепить подставку. • Убедитесь в том, что LED-дисплей размещен на ровной поверхности. если вам не удается вынуть винты из LED-дисплея,
используйте намагниченную отвертку.
Меню Канал выделено серым цветом
(недоступно).
• Меню Канал доступно только при выборе источника телевизионного сигнала.
Настройки теряются каждые 30 минут или
при каждом выключении LED-дисплея.
• если LED-дисплей работает в режиме Демонстрация, то настройки звука и изображения сбрасываются каждые 30
минут. Смените режим с Демонстрация (Демонстрация) на Домашний (Домашний режим), запустив функцию Настройка
(первоначальная настройка). Нажмите кнопку SOURCE для выбора режима «ТВ», затем нажмите MENU → Система → Настройка
(первоначальная настройка) → ENTERE.
Прерывистые потери звука или
изображения.
• Проверьте кабельные подключения и переподключите их.
• Потеря звука или видео может быть обусловлена использованием слишком жестких или слишком толстых кабелей. Убедитесь
в том, что кабели достаточно гибкие для долговременного использования. При монтаже LED-дисплея на стене рекомендуется
использовать кабели с согнутыми под углом 90 градусов разъемами.
если смотреть на кромку рамки LED-дисплея
с близкого расстояния, видны маленькие
частицы.
• Это часть дизайна изделия. Не является дефектом.Русский 43
Другая информация
Проблемы Способы решения и разъяснения
Недоступно меню PIP. • Функция PIP доступна только при использовании источника сигнала HDMI, Компонент и ПК.
LED-был выключен 45 минут назад, однако
он снова включился.
• Это нормальное явление. LED-дисплей использует фикцию беспроводной (OTA) загрузки обновления ПО, пока вы смотрите
телевизор.
Появляется сообщение «Недопустимый
сигнал» или «Слабый сигнал / Нет
сигнала».
• При использовании модуля CAM CARD (CI/CI+) убедитесь в том, что он остановлен в разъем общего интерфейса.
• если проблема сохранится, выньте модуль CAM CARD из LED-дисплея и установите его в разъем снова.
Периодические проблемы с изображением/
звуком.
• Проверьте и измените источник сигнала.
Резиновые ножки подставки могут оставлять
следы на поверхности мебели.
• Чтобы предотвратить это, используйте войлочные прокладки в тех местах, где LED-дисплей касается мебели.
✎В этом изделии используется панель, состоящая из субпикселей, изготовляемых с применением сложных технологий. Несмотря на это на
экране может быть несколько ярких или темных пикселей. Эти пиксели не влияют на потребительские свойства изделия.
¦ Хранение и обслуживание
✎если на экран LED-дисплея были наклеены наклейки, то после их удаления остаются следы. Удалите их, чтобы смотреть LED-дисплей.
✎Внешние панели и экран изделия можно поцарапать во время чистки. Осторожно протирайте внешние панели и экран, используя
прилагаемую салфетку или мягкую ткань.
Не разбрызгивайте воду или чистящее средство непосредственно
на изделие. Попадание любой жидкости в изделие может стать
причиной неисправности, пожара или поражения электрическим
током.
Протирайте изделие мягкой тканью, слегка смоченной в воде.
[ОСТОРОЖНО
если высота « A» с одной стороны отличается от этой высоты с
другой стороны, отрегулируйте высоту.Русский 44
Другая информация
¦ Лицензия
TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
TheaterSound HD technology is incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc.
Изготовлено по лицензии Dolby Laboratories. Dolby и символ двойное «D» являются торговыми марками Dolby
Laboratories.
2.0 Channel
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
(Доступно только в изделиях серии TB300.)
Manufactured under licence under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the
Symbol are registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks
of DTS, Inc. Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
(Доступно только в изделиях серии TB350.)
Уведомление о лицензии на ПО с открытым исходным кодом
В случае использования ПО с открытым исходным кодом, лицензия на ПО с открытым исходным кодом доступна в меню изделия.
Уведомление о лицензии на ПО с открытым исходным кодом написано только на английском языке.
¦ Директива по утилизации электрического и электронного оборудования
Надлежащая утилизация этого изделия (Директива по утилизации электрического и электронного оборудования)
(Применяется в странах ЕС и других европейских странах с системами раздельного сбора отходов)
Этот символ на изделии, принадлежностях или документации означает, что изделие и его электронные принадлежности (например,
зарядное устройство, гарнитура, USB-кабель) не должны утилизироваться с другим бытовым мусором после окончания их срока
службы. Для предотвращения причинения ущерба окружающей среде и здоровью людей в результате неконтролируемой утилизации
отходов отделяйте эти устройства от других типов отходов и утилизируйте их с должной ответственностью, чтобы способствовать
устойчивому повторному использованию материальных ресурсов. Бытовые потребители должны обратиться к розничному продавцу,
у которого они приобрели изделие или в органы местной власти, чтобы получить подробную информацию о том, как и где они могут
сдать эти устройства для безопасной для окружающей среды утилизации. промышленные потребители должны обратиться к своим
поставщикам и проверить условия контракта на покупку. Это изделие и его электронные принадлежности не должны при утилизации
смешиваться с другими отходами.
Надлежащая утилизация батареек этого изделия
(Применяется в странах ЕС и других европейских странах с отдельными системами возврата батарей.)
Этот символ на батарее, в руководстве или на упаковке означает, что используемые в этом изделии батареи не должны утилизироваться
с другим бытовым мусором после окончания их срока службы. Нанесенные на батареи символы Hg, Cd или Pb означают, что батареи
содержат ртуть, медь или свинец в количествах, превышающих нормы, определенные директивой еС 2006/66. если батареи не
утилизируются должным образом, эти вещества могут причинить ущерб здоровью людей и окружающей среде. Для защиты природных
ресурсов и способствования повторному использованию материальных ресурсов батареи следует отделять от других типов отходов и
утилизировать через бесплатную местную систему возврата батарей.Русский 45
Другая информация
жК-монитор со встроенным ТВ-тюнером - устройство для визуального отображения текстовой и графической информации, в том числе
программ телевизионного вещания.
Технические характеристики
Условия
окружающей
среды
Эксплуатация
Температура: 10°C ~ 40°C (50°F ~ 104°F)
Влажность: 10–80 %, без конденсации
Хранение
Температура: -20°C ~ 45°C (-4°F ~ 113°F)
Влажность: 5–95 %, без конденсации
Наклон -1°(±2°) ~ 20°(±2°)
Телевизионная система
Аналоговое телевидение: B/G, D/K, L, I (зависит от выбранной страны)
Цифровое телевидение: DVB-T/DVB-C
Система цвета/видео
Аналоговое телевидение: PAL, SECAM, NTSC-4.43, NTSC-3.58, PAL60
Цифровое телевидение: MPEG-2 MP@ML, MPEG-4, H.264/AVC MP@L3, MP@L4.0, HP@L4.0
Система звука BG, DK, L, NICAM, MPEG1, DD, DD+, HEAAC
Вход HDMI
Видео: 1080p 24 Гц, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 480p
Звук: 2-канальный линейный PCM 32/44,1/48 кГц, 16/20/24 бита.
Номер сертификата РОСС KR.AB57.B00056
Срок действия сертификата с 13.01.2011 по 12.01.2014
Орган сертификации OOO "АЛЬТТеСТ" 117418, Москва, ул. Цюрупы, д.14
IP (степень защиты от попадания
твердых частиц и влаги)
IP 20
Класс защиты прибора от поражения
электрическим током
оборудование класса II
Напряжение питания переменного
тока
Переменный ток: 100-240 В
Название модели T19B300 T22B300 T24B300 T27B300
Размер экрана (по диагонали) 18,5 дюйма(47 см) 21,5 дюйма (55 см) 23,6 дюйма (60 см) 27 дюймов (69 см)
Разрешение дисплея 1366 x 768 при 60 Гц 1920 x 1080 при 60 Гц
Звук (выход) 5 Вт x 2
Размеры
(ШxГxВ)
(Без подставки) 444,7 x 48,5 x 278,2 мм 509,7 x 47 x 318,2 мм 569,2 x 49 x 349,4 мм 643,3 x 49 x 397,9 мм
(С подставкой) 444,7 x 187 x 356,4 мм 509,7 x 195 x 396,6 мм 569,2 x 195 x 428 мм 643,3 x 252 x 476,5 мм
Масса
(Без подставки) 2,95 кг 3,7 кг 4,25 кг 5,1 кг
(С подставкой) 3,2 кг 3,95 кг 4,5 кг 5,6 кг
Название модели T22B350 T23B350 T24B350
Размер экрана (по диагонали) 21,5 дюйма (55 см) 23 дюйма (58 см) 24 дюйма (61 см)
Разрешение дисплея 1920 x 1080 при 60 Гц
Звук (выход) 5 Вт x 2
Размеры
(ШxГxВ)
(Без подставки) 509,7 x 47 x 318,2 547,5 x 49 x 337,9 мм 569,2 x 49 x 349,4 мм
(С подставкой) 509,7 x 195 x 396,6 мм 547,5 x 195 x 416,1 мм 569,2 x 195 x 428 мм
Масса
(Без подставки) 3,7 кг 3,25 кг 4,15 кг
(С подставкой) 3,95 кг 3,5 кг 4,45 кг
✎Примечание.
x Внешний вид и технические характеристики могут изменяться без уведомления.
x Информация об электропитании и потреблении энергии указана на этикетке изделия.
x Некоторые модели могут быть недоступны в некоторых регионах.
x если выключателя питания нет, то нулевого энергопотребления можно добиться, только отключив кабель питания.
x Функция управления питанием дисплея (DPM) не работает при использовании порта HDMI IN (DVI) этого изделия.Обращение в Samsung во всем мире
Если у вас возникнут вопросы или комментарии, относящиеся к продукции Samsung, обратитесь в центр поддержки
SAMSUNG.
Страна Центр поддержки Веб-сайт
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 http://www.samsung.com
GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 http://www.samsung.com
ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 http://www.samsung.com
AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 http://www.samsung.com
KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500(GSM: 7799) http://www.samsung.com
ТОО "Самсунг Электроникс КЗ Энд Централ Эйжа"
050000, Республика Казахстан, город Алматы, улица Наурызбай батыра, 31, 6-7 этаж
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
MONGOLIA - http://www.samsung.com
UKRAINE 0-800-502-000 http://www.samsung.com/ua
http://www.samsung.com/ua_ru
BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 http://www.samsung.com
Производитель:
ООО «Самсунг Электроникс Рус Калуга», 249002, Калужская обл., Боровский р-н, д. Коряково, Первый Северный проезд,
владение 1
© Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., 2012. Все права защищены BN46-00196T-02
Samsung Universal Print
Driver
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilitiesCopyright_ 2
Copyright
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This admin guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without any
notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s
guide.
• Samsung Universal Print Driver is a trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd
• Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• All other brand, product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
REV. 1.00Contents_ 3
Contents
COPYRIGHT/2
CONTENTS/3
INTRODUCTION
Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL
PRINT DRIVER
Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
USING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER
Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Layout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting the pop-up option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setting the printer search option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Searching print devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
By TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
By Search Now menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Creating a favorite folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Basic printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Changing the selected printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
INDEX/14Introduction_ 4
1.Introduction
The Samsung Universal Print Driver is a single driver that can be used with different printer
models. This gives users instant access to not only Samsung print devices but also a range of
other vendor's PDL based devices without the need to download separate drivers.
• PDL means both PCL and PS.
• Samsung does not guarantee the quality of other vendors’ printer devices and Samsung models that are not
supported (Click to see the supported Samsung device list). For unsupported Samsung models, driver is
automatically set to usable default PDL.
Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers
The following table shows the differences between the Samsung Universal Print Driver and the product based drivers:
System requirements
Minimum system requirements for the Samsung Universal Print Driver are as follows:
SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT
DRIVER
MODEL SPECIFIC DRIVERS
User interface Consistent user interface. Inconsistent user interface.
Installation • Download and install with the installer
file provided with the Samsung
Universal Print Driver.
• Install via executing the installer file.
• Manually locate, download, and install
driver for each device.
• Install via CD autorun or Add printer
wizard.
Device discovery Easily locate and access suggested
devices from the whole Samsung printer
products.
Manually discover devices.
Availability Available on the Samsung web site. Available on the CD provided with the
device, or the product based driver.
OPERATING SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS
CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE
Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 GB 40 GB
Windows XP 300 MHz or higher 128 MB RAM or higher 1.5 GB or higher
(additional 1.8 GB in SP2
and additional 900 MB in
SP3
Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 MB 2GB
Windows Server 2003 550 MHz or higher 256 MB RAM or higher 2.9 GB or higher
Windows Server 2008 2 GHz or faster 2 GB RAM or higher 40 GB or higherInstalling and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5
2.Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung
Universal Print Driver
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for installing and uninstalling the Samsung
Universal Print Driver.
The following windows are for a PCL driver in Windows XP. Windows may differ for a PS driver, but the steps are the
same.
Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver
Before installing the driver, check the recommended minimum requirements for your system (See "System requirements"
on page 4).
1. Start a web browser and go to www.samsung.com.
2. Search for the Samsung Universal Print Driver setup file.
3. Start the setup file.
The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens.
4. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
After the installation window opens, wait for installation to be completed.
5. After the Setup Completed window opens, click Finish.
If you want to register yourself as a user of Samsung devices in order to receive information from Samsung, select the Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6
checkbox and click Finish.
If the driver is installed properly, you can find the Samsung Universal Print Driver in the Printers and Faxes folder.
Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver
If you want to uninstall the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select > All Programs > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance.
The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens.
2. Select Remove and click Next.
3. Select the components you want to remove and click Next.
4. A confirmation window appears, click Yes.
5. When unistallation is completed, click Finish. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7
3.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver
The main purpose of the Samsung Universal Print Driver is to install one driver (Samsung
Universal Print Driver) and use it with different print devices. However, the Samsung Universal
Print Driver has other features like searching print devices, creating a favorites folder, and
checking a device’s status.
Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties.
Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens.
If there’s no recently used printer, a pop-up window asking you to search printers appears. Click OK to search
connected printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8
Layout overview
1
Layout bar Includes displaying options.
• : Selects the layout for the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. If
you choose Layout2 and installed the Samsung Smart Panel program, you can
see the status window(number 4).
• : Refreshes all the printer information in the list.
• : Selects the view type for the printer list. Detail View shows printer
information such as Address, Location, Status and System name. Image
View also shows printer information except with a larger printer image. This
option is only supported on Windows XP(and later).
• : Displays the printer list in groups. This option is only supported on
Windows XP(and later).
• : Searches for a printer in the list by a keyword like a model name.
• : Opens the help window.
• : Shows information about the Samsung Universal Print Driver.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9
Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings
Setting the pop-up option
You can set the Samsung Universal Print Driver window to appear when you print. There are four options for this window
to pop-up:
1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner.
2
Main menus • Recent
- Recently Used Printers : Shows the list of recently used printers. The most
recently used printer is at the top of the list.
- Recently Searched Printers : Shows the list of recently found printers. The
most recently found printer is at the top of the list.
• Search
- Search Now : Searches printers that are connected either by USB or
network.
- Search by Address : Searches for a printer by the printer’s IP address.
• My Printer
- Create a Favorite Folder : Creates a folder for favorite printers.
• Settings : Displays options for pop-ups and searches.
3 Printer list Shows printer list.
4
Status window Shows status of the selected printer in the list. You need to select Layout2 and install
the Samsung Smart Panel program to see this window.
• Update Now : Updates the selected printer’s information.
• Buy Supplies : Opens the website for buying supplies.
• TroubleShooting Guide : Opens the troubleshooting chapter of the user’s
guide. You need to install the Smart Panel of the model you are using to see the
troubleshooting guide.
• Printer Settings : Opens SyncThur Web Service, which provides options for
configuring and managing your printer. You can only use this option with network
printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10
2. Click the Pop-up tab. A sample of Pop-up tab is shown in the following figure.
• When driver UI appears: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears when you open a Printing
Preferences (Properties) window.
• Every time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears every time you print.
• Only the first time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only for the first time when
Samsung Universal Print Driver is selected as the printer from an application.
• Only when the last printer used is not available: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only if
the printer that was last used is not available.
3. Click OK.
Setting the printer search option
To set the search options for the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below:
1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11
2. Click the Search tab and select one of the following options.
• Search only supported printer: Searches only supported printers connected.
Click to see the supported Samsung device list
• Search all the printers: Searches all connected printers.
3. Click OK.
Searching print devices
By TCP/IP address
If you know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can search the device by typing the TCP/IP
address. Follow the steps below:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties.
The Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens.
4. Click Search by Address.
A window appears.
5. Type in the TCP/IP address of your printer and click OK.
By Search Now menu
If you don’t know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can use the Search Now option to search for
the device. Follow the steps below:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties.
Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens.
4. Click Search Now.
Samsung Universal Print Driver searches the connected print devices.
The search result might differ depending on the search option you have selected (See "Setting the printer
search option" on page 10.)
Creating a favorite folder
You can create a folder with the printers you use the most for your convenience. For example, if you travel between home
and work sites, you can create two different printer folders; Home and Work, and manage the printers as needed.
To create a favorite folder, follow the steps below: Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12
1. Click Create a Favorite Folder.
Add new favorite folder window appears.
2. Type in a folder name.
3. Click OK.
A new folder is added under My Printer.
To add printers to a folder under My Printer, you can drag-and-drop the print from the list to the folder or right-click
the printer in the list and select Move or Copy. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13
Help
Click the Help button ( )in the upper right of the Samsung Universal Print Driver window.
A help window appears. Use this help to answer your questions about using the Samsung Universal Print Driver.
Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver
Basic printing
To print a document using Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below:
The following steps show printing from Notepad. Menu names might differ depending on the application you are
using.
1. Open the file that you want to print in an application.
2. From the menu bar select File > Print.
3. Select the Samsung Universal Print Driver from the printer list.
4. Click OK. Printing begins.
Or, depending on the pop-up option (see "Setting the pop-up option" on page9) you selected, the Samsung Universal
Print Driver window might appear before printing. Choose the printer you want to use and print.
Changing the selected printer
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties.
Printing Preferences (Properties) window opens.
4. Select another printer either from the printer list or by searching (See "Searching print devices" on page 11).
5. Click OK. All subsequent printing will now be directed to the new printer.Index_ 14
Index
A
accessing 7
C
copyright 2
D
difference 4
F
folder 11
I
installing 5
introduction 4
L
layout 8
P
printing 13
S
search
search button 11
TCP/IP 11
setting 9
pop-up window 9
search option 10
system requirements 4
U
uninstalling 6
using 7
Samsung Universal Print
Driver
Mode d’emploi
imaginez les possibilitésCopyright_ 2
Copyright
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés.
Le présent guide administrateur n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont
susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis.
Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation
de ce guide.
• Samsung Universal Print Driver est une marque commerciale de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer et Windows Vista sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales
de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays.
• L’ensemble des autres marques, produits et noms d’entreprises peuvent être la propriété de leurs propriétaires
respectifs.
REV. 1.00Table des matières_ 3
Table des matières
COPYRIGHT/2
TABLE DES MATIÈRES/3
INTRODUCTION
Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle . . . . . 4
Configuration requise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INSTALLATION ET DÉSINSTALLATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER
Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 5
Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver
6
UTILISATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG
UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER
Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . 7
Aperçu de la mise en page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Recherche des périphériques d’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Par adresse TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Par le menu Rechercher maintenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Création d’un dossier de favoris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
INDEX/15Introduction_ 4
1.Introduction
Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est un pilote unique pouvant être
utilisé avec différents modèles d’imprimantes. Cela permet aux utilisateurs d’accéder directement
non seulement aux périphériques d’impression Samsung, mais également à une gamme de
périphériques d’autres fournisseurs sans avoir à télécharger de pilotes séparés.
• PDL signifie PCL et PS.
• Samsung ne garantit pas la qualité des périphériques d’impression d’autres fournisseurs et des modèles
Samsung non pris en charge (Cliquez sur pour consulter la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en
charge). Pour les modèles Samsung non pris en charge, le pilote est automatiquement défini sur PDL par défaut
utilisable.
Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle
Le tableau suivant montre les différences entre le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver et les
pilotes de produits spécifiques :
Configuration requise
La configuration minimale requise pour le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est la suivante :
SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT
DRIVER
PILOTES SPÉCIFIQUES À UN MODÈLE
Interface utilisateur Interface utilisateur cohérente. Interface utilisateur incohérente.
Installation • Téléchargez et installez le ficher
d’installation fourni avec le pilote
d’impression universel Samsung
Universal Print Driver.
• Installez en exécutant le fichier
d’installation.
• Localisez, téléchargez et installez
manuellement le pilote pour chaque
périphérique.
• Installez via l’exécution automatique du CD
ou via l’assistant Installation d’imprimante.
Découverte de
périphériques
Localisez facilement et accédez aux
périphériques suggérés parmi l’ensemble
des produits d’impression Samsung.
Découvrez manuellement les périphériques.
Disponibilité Disponible sur le site Web Samsung. Disponible sur le CD fourni avec le produit, ou
avec le pilote spécifique du produit.
SYSTÈME
D’EXPLOITATION
CONFIGURATION REQUISE
PROCESSEUR RAM
ESPACE LIBRE SUR LE
DISQUE DUR
Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 Go 40 Go
Windows XP 300 MHz ou supérieur 128 Mo de RAM ou
supérieur
1,5 Go ou supérieur
(1,8 Go supplémentaires
pour SP2 et 900 Mo pour
SP3
Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 Mo 2 Go
Windows Server 2003 550 MHz ou supérieur 256 Mo de RAM ou
supérieur
2,9 Go ou supérieur
Windows Server 2008 2 GHz ou plus rapide 2 Go de RAM ou supérieur 40 Go ou supérieurInstallation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5
2.Installation et désinstallation du pilote
d’impression universel Samsung Universal
Print Driver
Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure d’installation et de désinstallation du pilote
d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.
Les fenêtres suivantes s’appliquent à un pilote PCL dans Windows XP. Les fenêtres peuvent varier pour un pilote
PS, mais les étapes sont les mêmes.
Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print
Driver
Avant d’installer le pilote, vérifiez la configuration minimale requise pour votre système (Voir « Configuration requise » à la
page 4).
1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web et visitez www.samsung.com.
2. Recherchez le fichier d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Lancez le fichier d’installation.
L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre.
4. Cliquez sur Suivant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante.
Une fois la fenêtre d’installation ouverte, attendez que l’installation se termine.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6
5. Quand la fenêtre Installation terminée s’ouvre, cliquez sur Terminer.
Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de périphériques Samsung et recevoir des informations du fabricant, cochez
cette case et cliquez sur Terminer.
Si le pilote est installé correctement, vous pouvez trouver le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print
Driver dans le dossier Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print
Driver
Si vous voulez désinstaller le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes :
1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez > Tous les programmes > Samsung Universal Print Driver >
Maintenance.
L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre.
2. Sélectionnez Supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
3. Sélectionnez les composants à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
4. Lorsqu’un message de confirmation s’affiche, cliquez sur Oui.
5. Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Terminer. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7
3.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel
Samsung Universal Print Driver
Le principal objectif du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est d’installer
un pilote (Samsung Universal Print Driver) et de l’utiliser avec différents périphériques
d’impression. Toutefois, le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dispose
d’autres fonctions, comme la recherche de périphériques d’impression, la création d’un dossier de
favoris et la vérification de l’état d’un périphérique.
Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver
1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés.
La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre.
Si aucune imprimante n’a été utilisée récemment, une fenêtre indépendante vous demandant de rechercher des
imprimantes s’ouvre. Cliquez sur OK pour rechercher les imprimantes connectées. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8
Aperçu de la mise en page
1
Barre de mise en page Inclut les options d’affichage.
• : Sélectionne la mise en page de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression
universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . Si vous choisissez Mise en page2 et
que le programme Samsung Smart Panel est installé, vous pouvez voir la fenêtre
d’état (numéro 4).
• : Actualise toutes les informations relatives à l’imprimante dans la liste.
• : Sélectionne le type de vue pour la liste des imprimantes. Vue
détaillée affiche les informations relatives à l’imprimante, comme son Adresse,
son Emplacement, son État et son Nom système. Vue image affiche
également les informations relatives à l’imprimante, sauf dans le cas d’une image
d’imprimante plus grande. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows
XP (et ultérieur).
• : Affiche la liste des imprimantes par groupes. Cette option n’est prise en
charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur).
• : Recherche une imprimante dans la liste en fonction d’un mot
clé, comme un nom de modèle.
• : Ouvre la fenêtre d’aide.
• : Affiche des informations relatives au pilote d’impression universel
Samsung Universal Print Driver.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9
2
Menus principaux • Récent
- Imprimantes récemment utilisées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes
récemment utilisées. L’imprimante utilisée le plus récemment est en haut de la
liste.
- Imprimantes récemment recherchées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes
récemment trouvées. L’imprimante trouvée le plus récemment est en haut de
la liste.
• Recherche
- Rechercher maintenant : Recherche les imprimantes connectées via USB
ou via le réseau.
- Rechercher par adresse : Recherche une imprimante en fonction de son
adresse IP.
• Mon imprimante
- Créer un dossier favori : Crée un dossier d’imprimantes favorites.
• Paramètres : Affiche les options pour les fenêtres indépendantes et les
recherches.
3 Liste des imprimantes Affiche la liste des imprimantes.
4
Fenêtre d’état Affiche l’état de l’imprimante sélectionnée dans la liste. Vous devez sélectionner
Mise en page2 et installer le programme Samsung Smart Panel pour voir cette
fenêtre.
• Mettre à jour maintenant : Met à jour les informations de l’imprimante
sélectionnée.
• Achat de fournitures : Ouvre le site Web d’achat de fournitures.
• Guide de dépannage : Ouvre le chapitre de dépannage du mode d’emploi.
Vous devez installer le programme Smart Panel du modèle que vous utilisez
pour voir le guide de dépannage.
• Paramètres de l’imprimante : Ouvre le Service Web SyncThru, qui propose
des options de configuration et de gestion de votre imprimante. Vous ne pouvez
utiliser cette option qu’avec des imprimantes réseau. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10
Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung
Universal Print Driver
Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante
Vous pouvez configurer la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver pour qu’elle s’affiche
lorsque vous réalisez une impression. Il existe quatre options pour l’affichage de cette fenêtre indépendante :
1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche.
2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. La figure suivante montre un exemple d’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle.
• Lorsque l'interface du pilote apparaît: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print
Driver s’affiche lorsque vous ouvrez une fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés).
• A chaque impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche
chaque fois que vous réalisez une impression.
• Seulement lors de la première impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal
Print Driver s’affiche uniquement la première fois que le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print
Driver est sélectionné comme imprimante depuis une application.
• Seulement lorsque la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression
universel Samsung Universal Print Driver ne s’affiche que si la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible.
3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11
Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante
Pour configurer les options de recherche du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les
étapes suivantes :
1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche.
2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Rechercher et sélectionnez une des options suivantes.
• Rechercher uniquement les imprimantes prises en charge: Recherche uniquement les imprimantes
connectées prises en charge.
Cliquez sur pour voir la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge.
• Rechercher toutes les imprimantes: Recherche toutes les imprimantes connectées.
3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12
Recherche des périphériques d’impression
Par adresse TCP/IP
Si vous connaissez l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous souhaitez utiliser, vous pouvez le rechercher
en tapant son adresse TCP/IP. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous :
1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés.
La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre.
4. Cliquez sur Rechercher par adresse.
Une fenêtre s’ouvre.
5. Tapez l’adresse TCP/IP de votre imprimante et cliquez sur OK.
Par le menu Rechercher maintenant
Si vous ne connaissez pas l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous voulez utiliser, vous pouvez utiliser
l’option Rechercher maintenant pour rechercher le périphérique. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous :
1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver
3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés.
La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre.
4. Cliquez sur Rechercher maintenant.
Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver recherche les périphériques d’impression connectés.
Le résultat de la recherche peut varier en fonction de l’option de recherche que vous avez sélectionnée (Voir «
Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante » à la page 11.)Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13
Création d’un dossier de favoris
Pour des raisons pratiques, vous pouvez créer un dossier contenant les imprimantes que vous utilisez le plus souvent. Par
exemple, si vous naviguez entre votre domicile et plusieurs sites de travail, vous pouvez créer deux dossiers
d’imprimantes différents ; Domicile et Travail, puis gérer les imprimantes selon vos préférences.
Pour créer un dossier de favoris, suivez les étapes suivantes :
1. Cliquez sur Créer un dossier favori.
La fenêtre Ajouter un nouveau dossier de favoris s’ouvre.
2. Tapez un nom de dossier.
3. Cliquez sur OK.
Un nouveau dossier est ajouté dans Mon imprimante.
Pour ajouter des imprimantes à un dossier dans Mon imprimante, vous pouvez glisser-déposer le dossier ou cliquer
avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la liste et sélectionner Déplacer ou Copier. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 14
Aide
Cliquez sur le bouton Aide ( ) en haut à droite de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print
Driver.
Une fenêtre d’aide s’ouvre. Utilisez cette aide pour trouver les réponses à vos questions au sujet du pilote d’impression
universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.
Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal
Print Driver
Impression de base
Pour imprimer un document en utilisant le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes
suivantes :
Les étapes suivantes montrent une impression à partir de Notepad. Les noms des menus peuvent varier en fonction
de l’application que vous utilisez.
1. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer dans une application.
2. Dans la barre de menu, sélectionnez Fichier > Imprimer.
3. Sélectionnez le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans la liste des imprimantes.
4. Cliquez sur OK. L’impression démarre.
Ou, en fonction de l’option de fenêtre indépendante (voir « Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante » à la
page 10) que vous avez sélectionnée, la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver peut
s’ouvrir avant l’impression. Sélectionnez l’imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser et imprimez.
Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée
1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs.
2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.
3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés.
La fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés) s’ouvre.
4. Sélectionnez une autre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes ou en effectuant une recherche (Voir « Recherche
des périphériques d’impression » à la page 12).
5. Cliquez sur OK. Toutes les impressions suivantes sont alors dirigées vers la nouvelle imprimante.Index_ 15
Index
A
accès 7
C
configuration requise 4
copyright 2
D
définition 10
fenêtre indépendante 10
option de recherche 11
désinstallation 6
différence 4
dossier 13
I
impression 14
installation 5
introduction 4
M
mise en page 8
R
recherche
bouton de recherche 12
TCPIP 12
U
utilisation 7
SCX-3200 Series
Multi-Functional Mono Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product. Copyright_ 2
copyright
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
• Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks fo Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
• USFT® and MicroType™ are registed trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
• iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, TrueType, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are
trademarks of Apple Inc.
• LaserWriter is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 1.01Safety information_ 3
safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to
your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.
Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and
instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place
for future reference.
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS
This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of
danger.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide:
Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not disassemble.
Do not touch.
Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
Follow directions explicitly.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Warning
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the
electrical outlet is not grounded.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power
cord.
► Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be
crushed by a heavy object could result in electric
shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water,
small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes,
etc.).
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not
handle the plug with wet hands.
► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 4
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of
non-operation, remove the power plug from the
electrical outlet.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
► Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this
could result in electric shock.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
► Burns could occur.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
► This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your
pet.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections
and request assistance from qualified service personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine does not operate properly after these
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from qualified
service personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in
performance, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
OPERATING METHOD
Caution
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
► It can cause damage to the machine.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children
to touch.
► Burns can occur.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine
and paper tray.
► You may get injured.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers
or sharp metal objects.
► It can damage the machine.
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
► This could result in elevated component temperatures which
can cause damage or fire.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output
tray.
► It can damage the machine.
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
► New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
This machine's power interception device is the power cord.
► To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from
the electrical outlet.
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke,
makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor,
immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the
machine.
► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 5
INSTALLATION / MOVING
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust,
humidity or water leaks.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and
disconnect all cords.
Then lift the machine:
• If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09lb), lift with
1 person.
• If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09lb) - 40kg
(88.18lb), lift with 2 people.
• If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18lb), lift
with 4 or more people.
► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
► If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
► If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are
using, contact the electrical utility company.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
► This can diminish performance, and could result in electric
shock or fire.
Use only No.26 AWG
a
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
or larger, telephone line cord, if
necessary.
► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters
(6 feet) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16
AWG or larger.
► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could
result in electric shock or fire.
MAINTENANCE / CHECKING
Caution
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the
machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do
not spray water directly into the machine.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
► Children could get hurt.Safety information_ 6
SUPPLY USAGE
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or
ingested.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep
them away from children.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or
ingested.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner
cartridge or fuser unit.
► This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable
fire.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to
the machine.
► In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a
service fee will be charged.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
► Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
When you are working inside the machine replacing
supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the
machine.
► You could get injured.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by
yourself.
► It can damage the machine. Call a certified
technician when the machine needs repair.
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's
guide provided with the machine.
► Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
► The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician.
► Repair by non-certified technicians could result in fire or
electric shock. Regulatory information_ 7
regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements.
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.
• Wavelength: 800 nm
• Beam divergence
- Paraller: 13 degrees
- Perpendicular: 35 degrees
• Maximum power or energy output: 12 mW
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,
can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
OZONE SAFETY
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, contact your local Samsung dealer.Regulatory information_ 8
POWER SAVE
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov.
RECYCLING
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.
CHINA ONLY
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking shown on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset,
USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment
or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed
with other commercial wastes for disposal.
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:Regulatory information_ 9
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the
presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system
label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the
body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on.
The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by
the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be
exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at
all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
TURKEY ONLY
GERMANY ONLYRegulatory information_ 10
RUSSIA ONLY
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until
you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal
13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or
green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable
93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
SCX-3200 Series: Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
SCX-3205W(K): R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC)
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP)
name to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic
compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.Regulatory information_ 11
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and
compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
European Radio Approval Information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark
with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the
European Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European States qualified under wireless approvals:
EU
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K.
EEA/EFTA countries
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland
European States with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS
Wireless Guidance
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The
wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If
the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices
are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this
time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken
to minimize human contact during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body
(this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are
on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless
devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices
are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.Regulatory information_ 12
OPENSSL LICENSE
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)".
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
Prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)".
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's,
and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation
(online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use
of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices,
ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of
a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are
in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.Regulatory information_ 13
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)".
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.Regulatory information_ 14
CHINA ONLYAbout this user’s guide_ 15
about this user’s guide
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each
step during actual usage. It is a valuable resource for both novice and professional users for the proper installation and
use of the machine.
• Read the safety information before using the machine.
• If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (See "Troubleshooting" on page 77).
• Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (See "Glossary" on page 96).
• Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.
• The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.
CONVENTION
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
• Machine refers to printer or MFP.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE
Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Power
Note Provides additional information or details for the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country
to country.
Caution Contains information you can use to protect the machine from possible
mechanical damage or malfunction.
Do not touch the surface of the drum
located in the toner cartridge or imaging
unit.
Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrases. a. pages per minute
(“Cross-reference”) Refers you to additional detailed information. (See "Finding more information" on
page 16).About this user’s guide_ 16
FINDING MORE INFORMATION
You can find information about setting up and using your machine in the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen.
MATERIAL NAME DESCRIPTION
Quick Installation
Guide
This guide provides information on setting up your machine. This guide is provided in the box with the printer.
User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, maintaining your machine,
troubleshooting, and replacing supplies.
Machine Driver Help This help provides you with information about the printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing (See "Using help"
on page 56).
Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com/printer.
Downloadable
software
You can download useful software programs from the Samsung website.
• Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint)
• SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: provides convenient tools for network administrators who need to manage many machines
simultaneously. This program is for network model only. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com, See "Features by Models" on
page 18)Features of your new product_ 17
features of your new product
Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Print with excellent quality and speed
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 x 1200 dpi
effective output.
• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 16 ppm and
letter-sized paper at up to 17 ppm.
Handle many different types of printable material
• The 150-sheet tray supports plain paper in various sizes,
letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized media,
postcards, and heavy paper.
Create professional documents
• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with
words, such as “Confidential” (See "Using watermarks" on
page 57).
• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of
paper and can then be taped together to form a poster (See
"Printing posters" on page 56).
• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain
paper (See "Using overlays" on page 58).
Save time and money
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single
sheet of paper (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 56).
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper
manually (See "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)"
on page 56).
Print in various environments
• You can print with various operating systems such as
Windows, Linux, and Macintosh OS systems.
• Your machine is equipped with a Hi-Speed USB 2.0
interface.
• Your machine comes with a built-in network interface,
Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX. SCX-3205W(K) only)
• Your machine comes with a built-in network interface 802.11
b/g/n wireless LAN. (SCX-3205W(K) only) For some
counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied.
Copy the original in high quality
• You can copy the original and print them in enhanced image
quality and size.
Scan the originals
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of BMP,
JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.
• Use one button to scan your original to the connected
computer.
Eco Print
• You can reduce toner and paper usage (See "Eco Print
button" on page 22).
IPv6 (SCX-3205W(K) only)
• The machine supports IPv6 (See "IPv6 Configuration" on
page 34).
AirPrint
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from iPhone, iPad
and iPod touch running iOS 4.2 or later.Features of your new product_ 18
FEATURES BY MODELS
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Features by models include:
FEATURES SCX-3200 SERIES SCX-3205W(K) SERIES
Print ● ●
Eco Print ● ●
Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual) ● ●
Copy ● ●
Scan ● ●
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● ●
Print Screen ●
IPv6 ●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN ●
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN
a
a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be
applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine.
●
SyncThru™ Web Service ●
(●: Included, Blank: Not included) Introduction_ 19
1.introduction
This chapter gives you an overview of your machine:
This chapter includes:
• Machine overview
• Control panel overview
• Understanding the status LED
• Introducing the useful buttons
MACHINE OVERVIEW
Front view
3
6
1
10
11
12
9
7
8
5
4
2
13
14
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 Scanner lid 6 Front door 11 Inner cover
2 Scanner glass 7 Tray 12 Toner cartridge
3 Control panel 8 Paper length guide 13 Toner cartridge handle
4 Output tray (face down) 9 Paper width guide 14 Toner cartridge drum
5 Output support 10 Scan unitIntroduction_ 20
Rear view
1 2 3
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 USB port
2 Power cord receptacle
3 Network port
a
a.SCX-3205W(K) onlyIntroduction_ 21
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13 12
1 Power ( ) Allows you to turn the power on or off (See "Power button" on page 23).
2 Eco Print Turn the Eco mode on or off (See "Eco Print button" on page 22).
3 Scan to Sends scanned data (See "Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)" on page 64).
4 ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides the ID card like a driver’s license to a single side of paper (See "ID card copying" on page 63).
5 Front LED
When the LED lights on, place the front side of an ID card facing down on the scanner glass (See "ID card copying" on
page 63).
6 Back LED
When the LED lights on, place the back side of an ID card facing down on the scanner glass (See "ID card copying" on
page 63).
7 Display Shows the number of pages you want to copy.
8 +/- Buttons Allows you to increase/decrease the number of page you want to copy (See "+/- buttons" on page 22).
9
Print Screen (SCX-3200
only)
Prints the displayed screen of your monitor (See "Print Screen button (SCX-3200 only)" on page 22).
WPS (SCX-3205W(K)
only)
Allows you to turn on or off the wireless network connection (See "WPS button (SCX-3205W(K))" on page 22).
10 Stop/Clear ( ) Stops an operation at any time and there are more functions (See "Stop/Clear button" on page 23).
11 Start ( ) Begins a printing, copying or scanning job depending on which function you are using.
12
Wireless LED
(SCX-3205W(K) only)
Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (See "Understanding the status LED" on page 22).
13 Status LED Shows the status of your machine (See "Understanding the status LED" on page 22).Introduction_ 22
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED
Status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
STATUS LED DESCRIPTION
Off • The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in sleep mode.
Green On • The machine is in ready mode or warming up.
Blinking • When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is
receiving data from the computer or printing
documents.
• When the LED blinks rapidly, the machine is
operating special functions.
Red On • The inner cover is opened. Close the inner
cover completely.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the
tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error.
• Your system has some problems. If this
problem occurs, contact a service
representative.
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its
estimated cartridge life
a
a.Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner
cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is
designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be
affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing
interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may
remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops
printing.
. It is recommended to
replace the toner cartridge (See "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 89).
Blinking • A small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
The estimated cartridge life
a
of toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You
may temporarily increase the printing quality by
redistributing the toner (See "Redistributing
toner" on page 77).
• The machine is printing in manual feed mode or
in manual duplex mode.
Orange On A paper jam has occurred (See "Clearing paper
jams" on page 78).
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured. Samsung
cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality.
Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung
toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
All printing errors will appear in the Smart Panel program window. If
the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Wireless LED (SCX-3205W(K) only)
WIRELESS LED STATUS DESCRIPTION
Blue Off ( ) Wireless network is disconnected.
On ( ) Wireless network is connected.
Slowly blinks
( )
The machine starts connecting to a
wireless network.
Fast blinks
( )
• The machine is connecting to
access point (or wireless router).
• Wireless network connection is
being disconnected.
INTRODUCING THE USEFUL BUTTONS
Print Screen button (SCX-3200 only)
If you press Print Screen button for less than two seconds, the green light
blinks fast on the Status LED, and then the machine prints the whole
screen displayed in the monitor.
If you press Print Screen button for more than two seconds, the Status
LED lights on green, and then the machine prints an active screen
displayed in the monitor.
• The page will be printed on the default page like A4 or Letter.
• Print Screen can only be used in the Windows and Macintosh
operating systems.
• You can only use this function with a USB-connected machine.
• You can use this function only when the Smart Panel program is
installed and running.
• You can only use this function in Eco Print mode off.
Eco Print button
You can turn the Eco Print mode on or off by simply pressing the button. If
you set the Eco Print mode on, the machine automatically sets the 2-UP
and Toner Save option on and print with those options.
1. Press Eco Print button on the control panel.
2. Eco Print LED lights on. Then, Eco Print mode is on.
To turn off Eco Print mode, press Eco Print button one more time.
+/- buttons
You can determine the number of copies (up to 99 copies) you want to copy
by pressing +/- buttons. The default setting value is 1.
• If you press +/- buttons briefly, the number of copies
increases/decreases by single digits.
• If you press +/- buttons long, the number of copies increases/decreases
by ten-fold.
WPS button (SCX-3205W(K))
This feature automatically detects which WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™)
mode your access point uses. By pushing a button on the wireless LAN
router/access point and the machine, you can setup the wireless network
and security settings (See "Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))" on
page 36).Introduction_ 23
Stop/Clear button
By pressing Stop/Clear button, you can do the following functions.
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Printing a configuration
report
In ready mode, press and hold this button
long enough (about two seconds) until the
Status LED blinks slowly, and release the
button (See "To print a configuration report"
on page 24).
Printing a network
configuration report
(SCX-3205W(K) only)
In ready mode, press and hold this button for
four seconds until the Status LED blinks fast,
and release the button (See "Printing a
network configuration report" on page 30).
Supplies information
report
In the ready mode, press and hold this button
for about 6 seconds until the Status LED is
on, and release (See "To print a supplies
information report" on page 24).
Canceling print job Press Stop/Clear button during a
operation. The print job is cleared from both
the machine and the computer and then the
machine returns to ready mode. This may
take some time depending on the size of the
print job.
Power button
By pressing Power button, you can turn the machine on or off.
Turning on the machine
1. Plug in the power cord.
2. Press Power button on the control panel.
When the machine is powered on, you can see LED looping on the
display. Then, the machine is in ready mode.
If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for
about two seconds.Getting started_ 24
2.getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
• Setting up the hardware
• Printing a report
• Supplied software
• System requirements
• Installing USB connected machine’s driver
• Sharing your machine locally
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the
Quick Installation Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Installation Guide
first and follow the steps below:
Location
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow
extra space for opening cover(s) and tray(s).
The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the
edge of your desk or table.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing (See "Altitude adjustment" on
page 46).
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline
greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be
affected.
2mm
(0.08 in)
2mm
(0.08 in)
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3. Remove tape holding the machine securely.
4. Install the toner cartridge.
5. Load paper (See "Loading originals" on page 48).
6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.
7. Turn the machine on (See "Turning on the machine" on page 23).
This machine will not operate when the power main fails.
PRINTING A REPORT
Print a configuration or supplies information page to make sure that the
machine is operating properly.
To print a configuration report
In the ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for long enough (about two seconds) until the Status LED blinks
slowly, and release.
For SCX-3205W(K), you can print a network configuration report (See
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 30).
To print a supplies information report
In the ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for about six seconds until the Status LED lights on, and release.
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you
must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS
user, install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS
user, download the software from the Samsung website
(www.samsung.com/printer) and install.
Machine software is occasionally updated for reasons like the release
of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest
version from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer).OS CONTENTS
Windows • Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your machine’s features.
• Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning
documents on your machine.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on
page 70).
• SmarThru
a
:
a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open
another image editor program such as Adobe Photoshop, from
SmarThru. For details, refer to the on-screen help supplied on the
SmarThru program (See "SmarThru" on page 70).
This program is the accompanying
Windows-based software for your multifunctional
machine.
• Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out
about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program
information and installed scan driver's condition.
• Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set
up printer’s other options from your computer.
• SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only)
Macintosh • Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your machine’s features.
• Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for scanning
documents on your machine.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on
page 70).
• Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out
about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program
information and installed scan driver's condition.
• Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set
up printer’s other options from your computer.
• SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only)
Linux • Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full
advantage of your machine’s features.
• SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on
page 70).
• Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set
up printer’s other options from your computer.
• SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses. (SCX-3205W(K) only)
Getting started_ 25
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements:
Windows
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM
FREE
HDD
SPACE
Windows®
2000
Intel® Pentium® II 400
MHz (Pentium III 933
MHz)
64 MB
(128 MB)
600 MB
Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows
Server® 2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(512 MB)
1.25 GB to
2 GB
Windows
Server® 2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2 GB)
10 GB
Windows
Vista®
Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB
(1 GB)
15 GB
Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz
32-bit or 64-bit processor
or higher
1 GB
(2 GB)
16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB
memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows
Server® 2008
R2
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz
(x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64)
processors (2 GHz or
faster)
512 MB
(2 GB)
10 GB
• Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
Macintosh
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM
FREE
HDD
SPACE
Mac OS X
10.3 ~ 10.4
• Intel®
Processors
• PowerPC G4/ G5
• 128 MB for a
PowerPC based
Mac (512 MB)
• 512 MB for a
Intel-based Mac
(1 GB)
1 GBGetting started_ 26
Linux
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Operating
system
RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 10.0, 10.1 (32 bit)
OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32.64 bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1
(32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 5.04, 5.10, 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10,
9.04, 9.10 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)
INSTALLING USB CONNECTED MACHINE’S
DRIVER
A locally connected machine is a machine directly connected to your
computer by a USB cable.
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 m (10 ft.).
Windows
You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.
The following steps are recommended for most users who use a machine
directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine
operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered
on.
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the
installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
will appear.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM Drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2
click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM Drive and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control window.
3. Select Install now.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
• For SCX-3205W(K), you can access the Wireless Setting and
Installation menu. The menu allows you to install a wireless
network to connect to the machine with an USB cable (See
"Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))" on page 36).
• The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom
Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom
Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and
choose individual component to install. The Install Software
Only allows you to install the supplied software, such as Smart
Panel. Follow the instruction on the window.
4. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
The software searches for the machine.
If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following
Mac OS X
10.5
• Intel®
Processors
• 867 MHz or
faster Power PC
G4/ G5
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X
10.6
• Intel®
Processors
1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
OPERATING
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM
FREE
HDD
SPACEGetting started_ 27
window will appear.
• After connecting the machine, click Next.
• Check if you want to install the software without
connection of the printer.
- Check this option to install the software without a machine
connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be
skipped, and completes the installation.
• Search again
When you press this button, the firewall notice window
appears.
- Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows
operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows
Firewall, and inactivate this option.
- Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside
the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by
individual programs.
• Direct Input
The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on
the network.
- Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host
name. Then click Next.
To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network
configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration
report" on page 30).
- Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC
Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared
printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next.
• Help
- This help button gives you the detailed information about
how to connect the machine.
5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click Next.
If the software searched only one machine, the confirmation
window appears.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung web site, click On-line
Registration.
If your machine is not connected yet to the network or computer,
click How to connect?. How to connect? gives detailed
information about how to connect the machine. Follow the
instructions in the window.
9. Click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to
repair or reinstall the driver.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and
powered on.
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >
Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.
c) Select the option you wish to execute, then follow the instruction
on the window.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
12. Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer
and then click OK.
13. After the installation is finished, click Restart.
14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
15. Click Add on the Printer List.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will
pop up.
16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab.
• For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB
connection.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click Default and find the USB
connection.
17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
• For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print
Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
18. Click Add.Getting started_ 28
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e) Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
f) Enter the password and click OK.
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h) Read the license agreement and click Continue.
i) Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
j) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
k) When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, Click Continue.
l) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website
to install the printer software.
Follow the steps below to install the software.
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3. From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver
package to your computer.
4. Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the
package.
5. Double-click cdroot > autorun.
6. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
7. When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop
icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your
convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that
is available through your system menu or from the driver package
Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator.
Installing the Smart Panel
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3. From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to
your computer.
4. Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package.
5. Double-click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.
Installing the Printer Settings Utility
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3. From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings Utility
package to your computer.
4. Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract the
package.
5. Double-click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root”
in the Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer
driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
c) Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
d) Click Uninstall.
e) Click Next.
f) Click Finish.Getting started_ 29
SHARING YOUR MACHINE LOCALLY
Follow the steps below to set up computers to share your machine locally.
If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine by a USB cable
and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer
connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the
host computer to print.
2
1
1
Host computer A computer which is directly connected to
the machine by USB cable.
2
Client computers Computers which use the machine shared
through the host computer.
Windows
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 26).
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
• For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel >
Hardware and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware
> Devices and Printers.
4. Right-click the printer icon.
5. For Windows XP/Vista/Server 2003/Server 2008, press Properties.
For Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
6. Select the Sharing tab.
If you are a Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2 user, check
the Change Sharing Options.
7. Check the Share this printer checkbox.
8. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 26).
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer.
4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and
press Enter in your keyboard.
In case host computer requires a User name and Password,
fill in User ID and password of the host computer account.
5. Right-click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.
6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK.
7. Open the file you want to print and start printing.
Macintosh
The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help
for other OS versions.
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 27).
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click
Print & Fax.
3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list.
4. Select Share this printer.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 27).
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click
Print & Fax.
3. Click the “+” icon.
A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.
4. Select your machine and click Add. Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 30
3.network setup (scx-3205w(k) only)
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
• Network environment
• Introducing useful network programs
• Using a wired network
• Installing network connected machine’s driver
• IPv6 Configuration
NETWORK ENVIRONMENT
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the
network setting programs.
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Network interface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
• 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN
a
a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available.
For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine.
Network operating system • Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server
2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6
Network protocols • TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR,
IPP
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR,
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP)
(See "IPv6 Configuration" on page 34.)
Wireless security • Authentication: Open System, Shared
Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal
(PSK)
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP,
AES
INTRODUCING USEFUL NETWORK PROGRAMS
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
SyncThru™ Web Service
Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to do
the following tasks.
• You can configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to
connect to various network environments.
• You can customize machine settings
(See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only)" on
page 69).
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrator.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot
network machines from any site with corporate internet access.
• Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.
SetIP
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 31.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 31.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 32.
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
USING A WIRED NETWORK
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your
network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished.
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding
port on your machine.
Printing a network configuration report
You can print a network configuration report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 31
1. Press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control panel for long
enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks fast.
2. Then, release the button.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
Setting IP address
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located
on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report.
• Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer. If your machine has a control panel, you can also
change IP address using the machine's control panel.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set IP address for you.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
Before using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall by performing
the following steps.
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Double-click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.
When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive (X represents your
CD-ROM drive).
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Select a language, then click Next.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turn on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address).
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following.
1. Open System Preferences.
2. Click Security.
3. Click the Firewall menu.
4. Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary from your model.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3. Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 32
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address).
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver
installation.
1. Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your
machine’s MAC address.
2. Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
3. Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.
4. Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and then click Apply.
When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).
6. The machine prints the network information. Confirm all the settings
are correct.
7. Close the SetIP program.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network
administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Restoring factory default settings
You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when
machine that you are using is connected to new network environment.
Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™
Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example:
2. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
3. Click Login on the upper right of the website.
The Login window appears.
4. Type in the ID and Password, and then click Login.
If it is your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in
the below default ID and password.
• ID: admin
• Password: sec00000
5. Click Settings > Network Settings.
6. Click Restore Default on the left pane of the website.
7. Click Clear.
8. Click Yes when the confirmation window appears.
9. Click OK when the success window appears.
10. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.
INSTALLING NETWORK CONNECTED
MACHINE’S DRIVER
Windows
You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below.
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and
powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
appears.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2
click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the
User Account Control windows.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 or Windows 2008
Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and
click Yes in the User Account Control windows.
3. Select Install Now.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
• For SCX-3205W(K), you can access Wireless Setting and
Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation
allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the
machine with a USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network
with USB cable" on page 38).
• The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom
Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom
Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and
choose individual component to install. The Install Software
Only allows you to install the supplied software such as the
Smart Panel. Follow the instruction on the window.
4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
The program searches for the machine.
If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the error Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 33
message appears.
• Check if you want to install the software without
connection of the printer.
- Check this option to install this program without a machine
connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be
skipped, and completes the installation.
• Search again
When you press this button, the firewall notice window
appears.
- Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows
operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows
Firewall, and inactivate this option.
- Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside
the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by
individual programs.
• Direct Input
The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on
the network.
- Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host
name. Then click Next.
To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network
configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration
report" on page 30).
- Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC
Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared
printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next.
• Help
If your machine is not connected to the computer or network,
this help button gives detailed information about the how to
connect the machine.
5. The searched machine will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click Next.
If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window
appears.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 8.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line
Registration.
If your machine is not connected yet to the network, click How to
connect?. How to connect? gives you the detailed information
about the how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in
the window.
9. Click Finish.
• After the driver setup is completed, you may enable firewall.
• If your printer driver does not work properly, follow the step below
to repair or reinstall the driver.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and
powered on.
b) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >
Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.
c) Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the
window.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears. Click Continue.
12. Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer
and then click OK.
13. The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already
configured network information, close the SetIP program.
14. Click OK to continue the installation.
15. After the installation is finished, click Restart.
16. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
17. Click Add on the Printer List.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon. A display window will
pop up.
18. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.
19. Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing
performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer
Type option.
20. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 34
21. Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
22. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print
Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
23. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a) Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b) Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c) Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
d) Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e) Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
f) Enter the password and click OK.
g) The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h) Read the license agreement and click Continue.
i) Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
j) Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
k) When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
l) When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
Install Linux Driver and add network Printer
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung
website.
3. Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory.
4. Double-click the Linux folder.
5. Double-click the install.sh icon.
6. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
8. Select Network printer and click Search button.
9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
10. Select your machine and click Next.
11. Input the printer description and Next
12.When the add printer is done, click Finish
13.When the install is done, click Finish
Add network Printer
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click Add Printer…
3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
4. Select Network printer and click the Search button.
5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
6. Select your machine and click Next.
7. Input the printer description and Next
8. When the add printer is done, click Finish.
IPV6 CONFIGURATION
TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting
to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default
settings" on page 32).
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turn on the machine.
3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will check IPv6 addresses (See "Printing a network
configuration report" on page 30).
4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printer > Add
Printer.
5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows.
6. Follow the instruction on the window.
7. The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the instruction on the
window.
If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate
IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.
Printing a network configuration report
You can print a network configuration report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.
1. In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for long enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks
fast.
2. Then, release the button.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
Setting IPv6 addresses
Machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
• Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts
with FE80).
• Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
• Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
• Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.Network setup (SCX-3205W(K) only)_ 35
Manual address configuration
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL (See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service
(SCX-3205W(K) only)" on page 69).
For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the
address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
3. Click TCP/IPv6.
4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section.
5. Select the Address/Prefix and click the Add button, then the router
prefix will automatically be entered into the address field.
Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the
hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.)
6. Click the Apply button.
Installing printer driver
Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same
as TCP/IPv4 (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on
page 32).
Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines are displayed, simply
select your machine's IPv6 address.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (See "Printing a network configuration report" on
page 30).
3. Enter the IPv6 addresses (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 36
4.wireless network setup (scx-3205w(k))
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the wireless network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
• Setting a wireless network with the WPS button
• Using a wireless network from the computer
• Setting a wireless network with USB cable
• Setting a wireless network with network cable
• Completing the installation
• Troubleshooting
For more information about the network environment, network
programs, and installing network connected machine’s driver, refer to
the following chapters.
• See "Network environment" on page 30.
• See "Introducing useful network programs" on page 30.
• See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 32.
SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH THE
WPS BUTTON
You can install a wireless network with the WPS ( ) button.
After compleleting the wireless network connection, you need to install
a machine driver to print from an application (See "Installing network
connected machine’s driver" on page 32).
Setting a wireless network with the WPS button
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network
settings by pressing the WPS ( ) button on the control panel.
If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN number from the
computer to connect to the Access Point varies depending on the
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's
guide of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
Items to prepare
You need to ensure you have the following items ready to use:
• Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™ (WPS).
• Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
• Networked computer (PIN mode only)
Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your
wireless network, for information about your network configuration.
Choosing your network connection
There are two methods to connect your machine to a wireless network
using the WPS ( ) button on the control panel.
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect
your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS ( )
button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button
on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless
router) respectively.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect
your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN
information on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point
(or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended
for a typical wireless network environment.
Connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode
To connect your machine to the wireless network in PBC mode, follow
the following steps:
You need to check the status of the wireless LED.
1. Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for about
2 - 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
• : The light blinks slowly on wireless LED. The machine
starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly
for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on access
point (or wireless router).
2. : Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless
router).
The wireless LED blinks in the order below:
a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is
connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on.
Connecting to the wireless network in PIN mode
To connect your machine to the wireless network, follow the following
steps:
You need to check the status of the wireless LED.
1. The network configuration report including PIN number must be
printed.
In ready mode, press and hold the Stop/Clear button on the
control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN
number.
2. Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for
more than 4 seconds until the status LED on.
• : The light blinks slowly on the wireless LED. The machine
starts connecting to access point (or wireless router).
3. You need to enter eight-digit PIN number within two minutes to the
computer which is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the
eight-digit PIN number
The wireless LED blinks in the order below:
a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 37
connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on.
Re-connecting to the wireless network
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to
re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously
used wireless connection settings and address.
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to
the wireless network:
• The machine is turned off and on again.
• The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
Canceling a wireless network connection process
To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is
connecting to the wireless network, press and release the
Stop/Clear button on the control panel. You need to wait 2 minuites to
re-connect the wireless network.
Disconnecting a wireless network connection
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the WPS ( )
button on the control panel for more than two seconds.
• When the Wi-Fi Network is in idle mode: The machine is
immediately disconnected from the wireless network, and the
wireless LED is off.
• When the Wi-Fi Network is being used: While the machine waits
until the current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the wireless
LED. Then, the wireless network connection is automatically
disconnected. The wireless LED is off.
When the Wi-Fi Network is disconnected, press the WPS ( )
button on the control panel. The Wi-Fi network is on and the
setting a wireless network begins.
USING A WIRELESS NETWORK FROM THE
COMPUTER
Choosing your network connection
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and
the machine at a time. There are types of network connections to consider.
• Wireless network without access point (Ad-Hoc mode)
• Wireless network with an access point (Infrastructure mode)
How to print a network configuration report
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
To print the report:
1. In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button on the control
panel for long enough (about four seconds) until the Status LED blinks
fast.
2. Then, release the button.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
IP addresses
Every device in a network has a unique numerical address called an IP
Address. Your machine came with a Default IP address of 192.0.0.192,
which you can verify by printing out a Network Configuration Report or
Configuration Report.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report.
• Static IP assignment: Use the SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer (See "Setting IP address" on page 31).
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set this address for you.
Wireless network name and network key
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first
set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network
Key are created for the network. Locate this information before proceeding
with the machine installation.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes
and SOHOs. This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
• See "Installing the machine on a wireless
network with an access point (Windows)" on
page 38.
• See "Installing the machine on a wireless
network with an access point (Macintosh)" on
page 40.
Ad-Hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The
wireless computer and wireless machine
communicates directly.
• See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc
wireless network (Windows)" on page 39.
• See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc
wireless network (Macintosh)" on page 41.
After choosing your configuration, follow the simple directions for your
computer operating system, but first locate the software CD supplied
with the machine before proceeding.
Installing a wireless network with cables
You can install a wireless network to connect to the machine with either a
USB cable or a network cable. For most users, we recommend using a USB
cable with the program provided in the supplied software CD.
The following are two ways to install a wireless network with cables.
• With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network using the
program in the supplied software CD. Only Windows and Macintosh
operating system are supported (See "Setting a wireless network with
USB cable" on page 38).
You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility
with USB cable after installing driver. (Windows and Macintosh
operating system are supported.)
• With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using the
SyncThru™ Web Service program (See "Setting a wireless network withWireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 38
network cable" on page 42).
SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH USB
CABLE
Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your
wireless network, for information about your network configuration.
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an
access point (Windows)
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless interface
• USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network in Windows
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer, access point and machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation
window appears.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008
R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control windows.
4. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
• Install Now: First you must configure the wireless network
settings of your printer to print through wireless.
• Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless
network settings of your printer with a USB cable then install the
printer driver. Press this button to set up the wireless connection
if you have not set up the wireless connection before.
5. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
6. The software searches the wireless network.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
7. After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices.
Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using and click
Next.
If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or
if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of
access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre
Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on
the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window does appear when the
access point has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. The window
may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA.
• In case of WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication
and enter WEP security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
• In case of WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
8. The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings
are right. Click Next.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is
shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 39
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP.
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is
shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the
machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the
network administrator to get the static IP address.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address,
with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP
address of your machine to 1.)
9. When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
10. Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Then, click
Next.
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup
procedure.
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.
Then, click Next.
11. Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.
12. Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine
as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine.
Click Next.
13. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test
page.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 15.
14. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
15. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information
from Samsung, click On-line Registration.
16. Click Finish.
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless
network (Windows)
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Wireless network computer
• Software CD provided with your machine
• Wireless network machine
• USB cable
Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Windows
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• The software CD should automatically run and an installation
window appear.
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then
Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive. Click OK.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008
R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control windows.
4. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
• Install Now: First you must configure the wireless network
settings of your printer to print through wireless.
• Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless
network settings of your printer with a USB cable then install the
printer driver. Press this button to set up the wireless connection
if you have not set up the wireless connection before.
5. Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
6. The software searches the wireless network.
If the software has failed to search the network, check if the
USB cable is connected properly between the computer and
machine, and follow the instruction on the window.
7. After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your
machine has searched appears.
If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last
wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is
airportthru and Signal is Printer Self Network.
Then, click Next.
If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless
network from the list.
If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced
Setting button.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 40
name you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the
ad-hoc network has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
8. The window which shows the wireless network setting appears.
Check the settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know
the computer’s network configuration information. If the
computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless
network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the
computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless
network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static
wireless network setting, you must contact the network
administrator to get the static IP address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP
to change the assignment method to Receive IP address
automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP
to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP
address, with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits
from IP address of your machine to 1.)
9. When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow
the steps on the window.
Click Next if you are finished the computer’s wireless network
settings.
If you set the computer’s wireless network as DHCP, it will take
several minutes to receive the IP address.
10. The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup
procedure.
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.
Then, click Next.
11. Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.
12. Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine
as the default machine and change the port name of each machine.
Click Next.
13. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test
page.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 15.
14. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
15. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information
from Samsung, click On-line Registration.
16. Click Finish.
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an
access point (Macintosh)
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network in Macintosh
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer, access point and machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
4. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
5. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
7. Enter the password and click OK.
8. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
9. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
10. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
11. Select Easy Install and click Install.Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 41
Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components
necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select
Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be
installed.
12. Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
13. The software searches the wireless network.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
14. After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices.
Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using and click
Next.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of
access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre
Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on
the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window does appear when the
access point has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. The window
may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA.
• In case of WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication
and enter WEP security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
• In case of WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
15. The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings
are right. Click Next.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is
shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP.
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is
shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the
machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the
network administrator to get the static IP address.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address,
with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP
address of your machine to 1.)
16. The wireless network is connecting according to the network
configuration.
17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
18. After the installation is finished, click Restart.
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless
network (Macintosh)
If you do not have a access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Wireless network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Macintosh
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2. Turn on your computer and machine.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
4. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
5. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
7. Enter the password and click OK.
8. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
9. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
10. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
11. Select Easy Install and click Install.
Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components
necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select
Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 42
installed.
12. Click Wireless Setting and Installation.
13. The software searches the wireless network devices.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
14. After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your
machine has searched appears.
If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last
wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is
airportthru and Signal is Printer Self Network.
Then, click Next.
If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless
network from the list.
If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced
Setting button.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID
name you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64,
WEP128)
• Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
• Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network
key value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption,
select the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the
ad-hoc network has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
15. The window which shows the wireless network setting appears.
Check the settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know
the computer’s network configuration information. If the
computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless
network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the
computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless
network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static
wireless network setting, you must contact the network
administrator to get the static IP address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP
to change the assignment method to Receive IP address
automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP
to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP
address, with changed last three digits.)
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits
from IP address of your machine to 1.)
16. The wireless network is connecting according to the network
configuration.
17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
18. After the installation is finished, click Restart.
SETTING A WIRELESS NETWORK WITH
NETWORK CABLE
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your
wireless network, for information about your network configuration.
Preparing items
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• Network cable
Setting IP address
Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located
on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report (See "How to print a network configuration report" on page 37).
• Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 43
from your computer.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set this address for you.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel.
2. Double-click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.
When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your
CD-ROM drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address.)
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac
OS manual.
1. Open System Preferences.
2. Click Security.
3. Click the Firewall menu.
4. Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary for your model.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html.
3. Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window
as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
• MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the
Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons.
For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
• IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address.)
• Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
• Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Before starting you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your
wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was
set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not
know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set
up your network.
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, make sure cable
connection status. Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 44
1. Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
The Login window appears.
4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login.
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the
below default ID and password.
• ID: admin
• Password: sec00000
5. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
6. Click Wireless > Wizard.
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration.
However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select
Custom.
7. Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
• SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a
wireless network. access points and wireless devices attempting
to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same
SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
• Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
connections (See "Wireless network name and network key" on
page 37).
- Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
- Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the
SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc,
select the machine’s SSID. Note that “airportthru” is the default
SSID of your machine.
8. Click Next.
If wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network key) and click Next.
9. The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup.
If the setup is right, click Apply.
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your
machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the
network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN
and wired LAN simultaneously.
COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION
After you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer, print
another copy of the Network Configuration Report and keep it for future
reference. You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on
your network.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Solve problems that might occur during wireless setting and installing the
machine driver.
Wireless network problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the
followings.
Printers Not Found
• Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the
machine.
• USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine.
Connect machine to your computer using the USB cable.
• The machine does not support wireless network. Check the
machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied with
your machine and prepare a wireless network machine.
Connecting Failure - Not found SSID
• The machine is unable to search network name (SSID) which you
have selected or typed in. Check the network name (SSID) on your
access point and try connecting again.
• Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
• You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured security on
your access point and machine.
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error
• Your computer is not receiving a signal form your machine. Check
the USB cable and your machine power.
• When Temporal Key Integrity Protocol(TKIP) security is set up for
the access point, connection might fail. Change the access point
settings.
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network
• Your machine is connected with wired network cable. Remove the
wired network cable from your machine.
PC Connection Error
• The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
- For DHCP network environment
The print receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when
computer is configured to DHCP.
- For Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when computer is
configured to static address.
If you computer has following addresses,
- IP address: 192.168.1.100
- Subnet address: 255.255.255.0
- Gateway address: 192.168.1.1
Type in the following address for your machine,
- IP address: 192.168.1.101
- Subnet address: 255.255.255.0
- Gateway address: 192.168.1.1Wireless network setup (SCX-3205W(K))_ 45
Solving other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the
followings.
For information on access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
• Your computer, access point or machine may not be turned on.
• Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the reception is far
from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty
receiving the signal.
• Cycle the power for access point (or wireless router), machine and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
• Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
If the computer and the machine is connected on a same network it
cannot be searched, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off
and try searching the machine again.
• Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
• Check whether access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or
wireless router) administrator.
• Check whether the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver
and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due
to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if
the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been
reset.
• Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to access point (or wireless router).
• This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. For some
counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Other wireless communication
(Bluetooth) is not supported.
• When using the Ad-hoc mode, for operating systems such as Windows
Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time
you use the wireless machine.
• You cannot use infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode at the same time
for Samsung wireless network machine.
• The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
For most networks, the machine should be within 30 meters (100 feet) of
the wireless access point (or wireless router).
• The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the
wireless signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router)
are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal
or concrete.
• The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including baby
monitors, motors, cordless phones, security system cameras, other
wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.Basic setup_ 46
5.basic setup
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like
to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
• Altitude adjustment
• Setting the default tray and paper
• Using the power saving feature
• Changing font setting
ALTITUDE ADJUSTMENT
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality
of print.
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
0
4,000 m
(13,123 ft)
3,000 m
(9,842 ft)
2,000 m
(6,561 ft)
1,000 m
(3,280 ft)
4
3
2
1
1 High 1
2 High 2
3 High 3
4 Normal
You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility.
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70).
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu,
select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer
driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Setting.
3. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select necessary options from the
drop-down list.
4. Click the Apply button.
If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web Service
screen appears automatically. This can be also adjusted via SyncThru™
Web Service.
SETTING THE DEFAULT TRAY AND PAPER
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing
job.
From your computer
Windows
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
• For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel >
Hardware and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware
> Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click on your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printing Preferences.
If Printing Preferences item has a ► mark, you can select
other printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
5. Click Paper tab.
6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.
If you want to use special-sized paper such as a billing paper,
select Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See
"Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
Macintosh
Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to
change the default setting manually each time they want to print using
other settings.
1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Print.
3. Go to Paper Feed pane.
4. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.
5. Go to Paper pane.
6. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print.
7. Click Print to print.
Linux
1. Open Terminal Program.
2. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following:
[root@localhost root]# lpr Basic setup_ 47
3. Select Printer and click Properties…
4. Click on the Advanced tab.
5. Select the tray (source) and its options, such as paper size and type.
6. Press OK.
USING THE POWER SAVING FEATURE
When you will not be using the machine for a while, you can use this feature
to save power.
You change power save in Printer Settings Utility.
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X.
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu,
select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer
driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Setting.
3. Click Setting > Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the
drop-down list, and then click Apply.
CHANGING FONT SETTING
Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country.
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X.
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu,
select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer
driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Setting.
3. Click Emulation.
4. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting.
5. Click Setting.
6. Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list.
7. Click Apply.
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding
languages.
• Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
• Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)
• Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
• Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
• OCR: OCR-A, OCR-BMedia and tray_ 48
6.media and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
• Loading originals
• Selecting print media
• Changing the tray size
• Loading paper in the tray
• Printing on special media
• Using the output support
LOADING ORIGINALS
You can use the scanner glass to load an original for copying or scanning.
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the
best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images.
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3. Close the scanner lid.
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy
quality and toner consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the
printout. Always keep it clean (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on
page 75).
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then
close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the scanner lid open.
• Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
• Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid
may fall on your hands and get hurt.
• Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meets the
guidelines for use with your machine and from the appropriate tray.
Guidelines for selecting the print media
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide
may cause the following problems:
• Poor print quality
• Increased paper jams
• Premature wear on the machine.
• Permanent fuser damage, not covered under warranty.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are
described in print media specifications (See "Print media specifications"
on page 93).
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce
sharper, more vibrant images.
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how
crisp the printing looks on the paper.
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the
sheets characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable
temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which
cannot be controlled.
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it
meets the specifications in this user’s guide and that it meets your
output requirements.
• Using print media that does not meet these specifications may
cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Media and tray_ 49
the warranty or service agreements.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to
media type used (See "Print media specifications" on page 93).
• Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
• Use designated print media (See "Print media specifications" on
page 93).
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer
may lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a
fire.
Media sizes supported in each mode
MODE SIZE TYPE SOURCE
Copy mode Letter, A4,
Legal, Oficio, US
Folio, Executive,
JIS B5, A5
For details about
paper type, click
the following link
("Print media
specifications"
on page 93).
Tray
Simplex
printing
For details about
paper size, click
the following link
("Print media
specifications"
on page 93).
For details about
paper type, click
the following link
("Print media
specifications"
on page 93).
Tray
Duplex
printing
(Manual)
a
a.75 to 90 g/m2
(20~24 lbs bond) only (See "Print media specifications"
on page 93).
Letter, A4,
Legal, US Folio,
Oficio
Plain, Color,
Preprinted,
Recycled, Bond,
Archive
Manual feeding
in the tray
CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To
change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.
3
1
2
1 Tray
2 Paper length guide
3 Paper width guide
1. Open front door and pinch the paper length guide and pull it out to
extend the tray.
Because the machine is very light, it can move when you open and
close the tray or install and remove the toner cartridge. Be careful
not to move the machine when performing these tasks.
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading the paper. Insert the paper into the tray.
3. Load paper with the print side facing up. Make sure that all four corners
are flat in the tray.
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the
paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.Media and tray_ 50
4. Pinch the paper length guide to adjust the guide so that it is flush up
against the rear edge of the paper; then pinch the paper width guides so
they are flush against the sides of the paper.
• Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to
warp.
• Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper
jams.
LOADING PAPER IN THE TRAY
Tray
1. Open the front door, pinch the paper length guide and pull it out to
extend the tray. Then, adjust the tray size to the media size you are
loading (See "Changing the tray size" on page 49).
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading papers.
3. Place the paper with the side you want to print facing up.
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray.
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
panel (See "Setting the default tray and paper" on page 46).
• If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether
the paper meets the media specifications. Then, try placing
one sheet at a time in tray (See "Print media specifications" on
page 93, and "Printing on special media" on page 51).
• The settings made from the machine driver override the
settings on the control panel.
Manual feeding in the tray
The tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as
postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on
letterhead or colored paper.
Tips on using the manual feeding method
• If you select Paper > Source > Manual Feeder from your printer
driver, you need to press Start button each time you print a page.
Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the
tray.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add media while printing.
• Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into
the tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
• Always load the use recommended print media to avoid paper jams
and print quality problems (See "Print media specifications" on
page 93).
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading
them into the tray.
1. Load the paper in the tray.
• When printing on special media, you must follow the
loading guideline (See "Printing on special media" on
page 51).
• When paper does not feed well while printing, gently push
the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically.
2. Squeeze the tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of
the paper. Do not force them too much, or the paper will bend
resulting in a paper jam or skew.
3. Open the output tray and support.
4. To print from an application, open the application and open the print
menu.
5. Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
6. Click on the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an
appropriate paper type.
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to
Label.
7. Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK.
8. Start printing.Media and tray_ 51
If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first
page prints out, and press Start button. Repeat this step for
every page to be printed.
PRINTING ON SPECIAL MEDIA
The table below shows the available special media for printing.
When printing on a special media, we recommend you feed one paper
at a time. Check the maximum input number of media for tray (See
"Print media specifications" on page 93).
TYPES TRAY
MANUAL FEEDING
IN TRAY
A
a.Load one paper at a time.
Plain ● ●
Thick ● ●
Thin ● ●
Cotton ●
Color ●
Preprinted ●
Recycled ● ●
Envelope ●
Transparency ●
Labels ●
CardStock ●
Bond ●
Archive ● ●
(●: supported, Blank: Not supported)
The following media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This
paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the
tray. Selecting the appropriate media will let you get the best printout
quality. Selecting inappropriate media can result in poor or unfused print
quality; and/or cause jamming problems.
• Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printing on 60 to 120
g/m2
(16 to 32 lbs bond).
• Thick: 90 to 163 g/m2
(24 to 43 lbs bond) thick paper.
• Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lbs bond) thin paper.
• Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond) cotton paper.
• Color: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond) color-back grounded paper.
• Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond) preprinted/letterhead
paper.
• Recycled: 60 to 90 g/m2
(16 to 24 lbs bond) recycled paper.
When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled and/or
jamming may occur due to excessive curl.
• CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2
(28 to 43 lbs bond) cardstock.
• Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond) envelope.
• Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2
(37 to 39 lbs bond) transparency
paper.
• Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lbs bond) labels.
• Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2
(28 to 32 lbs bond) bond.
• Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2
(19 to 24 lbs bond) If you need to keep the
print-out for a long time, such as for archives.
Envelopes
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the
envelopes.
To print on an envelope, the stamp area should be on the left side and the
end of the envelope with the stamp area should enter the printer first in the
center of the tray.
• When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed
90 g/m2
otherwise, jams may occur.
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less
than 6 mm ( 0.24 inch.) of curl, and should not contain air.
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, either
damaged.
- Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and
pressure of the machine during operation.
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.
• Do not use stamped envelopes.
• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining,
self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to
the corner of the envelope.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s
fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps
and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even
damage the fuser.
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm ( 0.59
inch.) from the edges of the envelope.
• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.Media and tray_ 52
Transparencies
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for laser
printers.
• Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand
machine’s fusing temperature.
• Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
• Do not leave unused transparencies on the paper tray for long periods of
time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
• To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle transparencies
carefully.
• To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn
edges.
• Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.
• To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the
printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out.
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for laser
machines.
• When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your
machine’s fusing temperature (about 170°C (338 °F)).
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between
them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the
labels, causing serious jams.
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm
(0.51 inch.) of curl in any direction.
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can
cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to
machine components.
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the
machine.
• Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are
wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/Custom-sized paper
Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with this
machine.
• Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 183 mm
(7.20 inches) long.
• In software applications, set the margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
Letterhead/Preprinted paper
SINGLE-SIDED DOUBLE-SIDED
Face up Face down
• Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that
will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected
to the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C(338 °F) for 0.1
second.
• Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not
adversely affect machine rollers.
• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to
prevent changes during storage.
• Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the
paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted
paper, reducing print quality.Media and tray_ 53
USING THE OUTPUT SUPPORT
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the
surface, and do not allow children near it.
The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help
the printed pages to align. The machine sends printouts to the output tray by
default.Printing_ 54
7.printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
• Introducing useful software program
• Printer driver features
• Basic printing
• Opening printing preferences
• Using help
• Using special print features
• Changing the default print settings
• Setting your machine as a default machine
• Printing to a file (PRN)
• Macintosh printing
• Linux printing
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP.
INTRODUCING USEFUL SOFTWARE PROGRAM
Samsung AnyWeb Print
This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of
Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the ordinary
program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link the website where
the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows
operating systems.
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
• Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection
• Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer driver:
Some models or operating systems may not support some of the
feature(s) in the following table.
Printer driver
FEATURE WINDOWS
Print quality option ●
Poster printing ●
Multiple pages per sheet ●
Booklet printing (manual) ●
Fit to page printing ●
Reduce and enlarge printing ●
Different source for first page ●
Watermark ●
Overlay ●
Double-sided printing (manual) ●
(●: supported)
BASIC PRINTING
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary
depending on the application you use.
• Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the
composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check
the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine.
Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications (See
"System requirements" on page 25).
• When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see
a warning mark, , or . An exclamation mark ( ) means you
can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( )
mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s
settings or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing
from various Windows applications.
• Macintosh basic printing (See "Macintosh printing" on page 59).
• Linux basic printing (See "Linux printing" on page 60).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP.
Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your
operating system or the application you are using.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.Printing_ 55
You can select the basic print settings, including the number of copies
and the print range from within the Print window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer
driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print
window to change the print setting (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 55).
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung AnyWeb
Print too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing
the image. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers >
Samsung AnyWeb Print to link the website where the tool is
available for the download.
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
• For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. For Windows Server 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista,
double-click your machine.
For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, right-click your printer icon > context
menus > See what’s printing.
If See what’s printing item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with selected printer.
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the
machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop/Clear button
on the control panel.
OPENING PRINTING PREFERENCES
You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing
Preferences.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer.
4. Click Properties or Preferences.
Using Presets setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each of the preferences tab except
for the Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future
use.
To save a Presets item:
1. Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.
3. Click (Add). When you save Presets, all current driver settings are
saved.
Select more options and click (Update), settings will be added to the
Presets you made.
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-down list. The
machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected.
To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets drop-down list and click
(Delete).
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default
Preset from the Presets drop-down list.Printing_ 56
USING HELP
Click the question mark on the upper-right corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with
information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Samsung tab in
the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of
the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver updates or
registration and so on, click appropriate buttons.
USING SPECIAL PRINT FEATURES
Special print features include:
• "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 56.
• "Printing posters" on page 56.
• "Printing booklets (Manual)" on page 56.
• "Change percentage of your document" on page 57.
• "Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 57.
• "Using watermarks" on page 57.
• "Using overlays" on page 58.
• "Print quality options" on page 58.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To
print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one
sheet.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type
drop-down list.
3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16)
in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the
sheet.
6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Printing posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16
sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one
poster-size document.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
3. Select the page layout you want.
Available layouts:
• Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.
• Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.
• Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16
pages.
4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters
or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to
make it easier to paste the sheets together.
5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.
Printing booklets (Manual)
This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the
pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a
booklet.
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4,
US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
8
9
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down
list.
3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In
order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the
available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be
automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without
or mark).
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.
Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)
You can print on both sides of a paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how
you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter,
Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper (See "Print media specifications"
on page 93).
We recommend not to print on both sides of special media, such as
labels, envelopes, or thick paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage
the machine.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
2. Click the Advanced tab.Printing_ 57
3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding
option you want.
• None
• Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
bookbinding.
• Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
calendars.
4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the
printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the
document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job.
Change percentage of your document
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the
printed page by typing in a percentage you want.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
This feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size
regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to
check fine details on a small document.
A
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page.
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using watermarks
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document.
For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading
“DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all
pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They
can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.
Using an existing watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the
Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in
the preview image.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.
Creating a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can
enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview
window.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on
the first page only.
4. Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font
Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from
the Message Angle section.
5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.
6. When you have finished, click OK or Print until you exit the Print
window.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark
drop-down list.
Editing a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks
list and change the watermark message and options.
4. Click Update to save the changes.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing_ 58
Deleting a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark
drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current
Watermarks list and click Delete.
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using overlays
An overlay is content you store on your hard disk drive that can be
superimposed over any document you print. An overlay is often used to take
the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you
can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is
currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s
letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the
machine, instead you can just print the letterhead overlay on your
document.
Creating a new overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay file
containing your content.
1. Create or open a document containing the content you want to use in
a new page overlay. Position the items exactly where you want them
to appear when they are added to the original.
2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preference.
(See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down
list. The Edit Overlay window appears.
4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the
File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The
default is C:\Formover.)
6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk
drive.
The overlay document size must match same as the document
you print. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
Using an overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your
document. To print an overlay on your document:
1. Create or open the document you want to print.
2. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down
list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file
you want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external
source, you can also load the file when you access the Open
window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay
List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the
Overlay List box.
6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If
this box is checked, a message window appears each time you
submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm that you wish
to print an overlay over your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the
overlay automatically prints with your document.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints over your document.
The resolution of the overlay document must match the resolution
of the original print job.
Deleting an overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.
3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
4. Click Delete.
5. When the confirmation message window appears, click Yes.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Print quality options
Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your
specific printing needs.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 55).
2. Click the Graphics tab.
• The options you can select may vary depending on your printer
model.
• Refer to the help for each option’s information provided from
the Printing Preferences.
• Font/Text: Select Clear Text to print text sharper than on a normal
document. Use All Text Black to print solid black, regardless of the
color it appears on the screen.
• Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows you to emphasize edges of
texts and fine lines for improving readability.
• Advanced: Click this button, you can select Darkness and Toner
Save features.
- Darkness: The option adjusts the toner density on print output.
The values are Normal, Light and Dark.
- Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner
cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant
reduction in print quality.
On: Select this option to allow the machine to use less toner on
each page.
Off: Select this option if you do not wan to save toner when
printing a document.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.Printing_ 59
CHANGING THE DEFAULT PRINT SETTINGS
Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the
printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software
application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer
driver.
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
• For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printing preferences.
If Printing preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
5. Change the settings on each tab.
6. Click OK.
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in
Printing Preferences.
SETTING YOUR MACHINE AS A DEFAULT
MACHINE
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
• For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. Select your machine.
4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2
If Set as default printer item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
PRINTING TO A FILE (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. You can print the
document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer. The document is
saved with the printer formatting, such as font selection and color
specifications, in a .prn file that can be printed on another printer.
To save a print job as a file
1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.
2. Click Print.
3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example C:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in
Documents and Settings or Users. The saved folder may differ,
depending on your operating system or the application you are
using.
MACINTOSH PRINTING
This chapter explains how to print using a Macintosh. You need to set the
print environment before printing.
• USB connected (See "Macintosh" on page 27).
Printing a document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver
setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a
Macintosh:
1. Open an application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
4. Open the File menu and click Print.
5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you
want to print.
6. Click Print.Printing_ 60
Changing printer settings
You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine
name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending
on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer
properties pane is similar to the following.
• The setting options may differ depending on models and
Macintosh OS versions.
• The following panes may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
The following pane is the first pane you will see when you open the printer
properties pane. Select other advanced features from the drop down list.
Layout
The Layout dialog provides options to adjust how the document
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet
of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to
access the following features.
• Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be
printed on one page (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 60).
• Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing
direction on a page similar to the examples on UI.
• Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page
on the sheet.
• Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper
180 degrees.
Graphics
The Graphics dialog provides options for selecting Resolution. Select
Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the
graphic features.
• Resolution (Quality): This option allows you to select the printing
resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed
characters and graphics. A higher setting will also increase the time
it takes to print a document.
• Darkness: This option allows you to enhance the darkness of the
printouts. The available options are Normal, Light, and Dark.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If
you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper
type.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings dialog provides Toner Save Mode, Reprint When
Jammed, and Power Save options. Select Printer Settings from the
drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features:
• Toner Save Mode: Selecting this option extends the life of your
toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant
reduction in print quality.
- Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is
determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine (For
some models, you cannot change the setting from the machine.
In this case, the default setting is Off).
- On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on
each page.
- Off: Set this option if you do not need to save toner when printing
a document.
• Power Save: When this option is checked, the switches to the
power save mode after a predetermined amount of time.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
3. Select the other options you want to use.
4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages
you want to print on one sheet of paper.
LINUX PRINTING
Printing from applications
There are several Linux applications that allow you to print using the
Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print using any of these
applications.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Print directly using LPR.Printing_ 61
3. From the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from
the printer list and click Properties.
4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at
the top of the window.
• General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper
type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex
feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of
pages per sheet.
• Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the
text options, such as spacing or columns.
• Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used
when printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or
image position.
• Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper
source and special print features.
If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not
supported by your machine.
5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your
print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
Printing files
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the
standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS
LPR utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the
standard LPR tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press
Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click
Open.
2. From the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and
change the print job properties.
3. Click OK to start printing.
Configuring printer properties
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers
configuration, you can change the various properties for your printer.
1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2. Select your machine from the available printers list and click Properties.
3. The Printer Properties window opens.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
• General: This option allows you to change the printer location and
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in
Printers configuration.
• Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If
you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa
while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab.
• Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By
clicking Options, you can set the default device options.
• Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check
box to see previous jobs on the job list.
• Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click
Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click
Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected
class.
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties
window.Copying_ 62
8.copying
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.
This chapter includes:
• Basic copying
• Changing the settings for each copy
• ID card copying
When printing a fluorescent color, due to the property of the scanner,
the result may differ from the original.
BASIC COPYING
The following is the normal procedure for copying your originals.
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
2. Enter the number of copies using the +/- buttons if necessary.
You can copy an original up to 99 pages at a time.
• If you press +/- buttons short, the number of one’s place
appeared on the display increases or decreases one by one.
• If you press +/- buttons long, the number of ten’s place
appeared on the display increases or decreases one by one.
3. If you want to customize the copy settings including Darkness, Original
Type and more by using the Printer Settings Utility (See "Changing the
settings for each copy" on page 62).
4. Press Start button to begin copying.
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press
Stop/Clear button and the copying will stop.
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly
and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for
each copy, use the Printer Settings Utility.
If you press Stop/Clear button on the control panel while setting
the copy options, all of the options you have set for the current copy
job will be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will
automatically return to their default status after the machine completes
the copy in progress.
Original Type
The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document type for the current copy job.
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from
the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Settings.
3. Click Copy > Original Type. Select the appropriate value from the
drop-down list, and then click Apply.
• Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
• Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
• Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
Darkness
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can
adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from
the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Setting.
3. Click Copy > Darkness. Select the appropriate value from the
drop-down list, and then click Apply.
• Lightest: Works well with lightest print.
• Light: Works well with light print.
• Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals.
• Dark: Works well with dark print.
• Darkest: Works well with darkest print.
Erasing background images
You can set the machine to print an image without its background. This
copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when
copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper
or a catalog.
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the Status
bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from
the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Setting.
3. Click Copy > Auto Suppress Background. Select the appropriate
value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply.
• Off: Does not use this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
Setting the copy scan size
1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from
the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel.
2. Click Printer Setting.
3. Click Copy > Copy Scan Size. Select the appropriate value from the
drop-down list, and then click Apply.Copying_ 63
ID CARD COPYING
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
1. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
2. Press ID Copy button on the control panel.
Then, the Front LED on the control panel lights on.
3. Press Start button on the control panel. Your machine begins
scanning the front side of an original.
When scanning the front side of an original is finished the Back LED on
the control panel lights on.
4. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
5. Press Start button on the control panel to begin scanning the back
side of an original.
6. The machine prints both sides of an original without reducing its size.
• If you do not press Start button, only the front side will be
copied.
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may
not be printed.
• If you press Stop/Clear button, the copy job is canceled.Scanning_ 64
9.scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.
This chapter includes:
• Basic scanning method
• Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)
• Using Samsung Scan and Fax manager
• Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
• Scanning using the WIA driver
• Macintosh scanning
• Linux Scanning
When scanning a fluorescent color, due to the property of the scanner,
the result my differ from the original.
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including a computer speed, available disk space, memory,
the size of the image being scanned and color bit depth settings.
Thus, depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may
not be able to scan at a certain resolution, especially using enhanced
resolution.
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name (See "Features by Models" on
page 18).
BASIC SCANNING METHOD
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the
network.
• Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: Scan the originals from the control
panel. Then, the scanned data will be stored in the connected
computers My Documents folder. When you install all the software in
the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is also
automatically installed on your computer. This feature can be used via
the local connection or the network connection (See "Using Samsung
Scan and Fax manager" on page 64).
• TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning
an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or
the network connection (See "Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software"
on page 65).
• SmarThru: This program is the accompanying software for your
machine. You can use this program to scan images or documents. This
feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection
(See "SmarThru" on page 70).
• WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature,
your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB
cable (See "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 66).
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING TO
YOUR COMPUTER (SCAN TO PC)
You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan and Fax
Manager program that is installed in your USB connected computer.
Scan to PC feature only works when your machine is connected via
USB.
For USB connected machine
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
3. Press Scan to button on the control panel.
4. Press Start button on the control panel to begin scanning.
• Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My
Pictures > Samsung folder.
• You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and
Fax Manager program.
• From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >
Samsung Printers > Scan and Fax Manager > Scan and Fax
Manager > Quick Scan.
USING SAMSUNG SCAN AND FAX MANAGER
If you have installed the printer driver, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager
program is installed too. For program information and the scanner's status,
start Samsung Scan and Fax Manager. With this program, you can change
scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are
saved in your computer.
The Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program can only be used in
the Windows and Mac OS system. If you use the Macintosh, click the
following link ("Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager" on
page 67).
1. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Scan and Fax Manager > Scan and Fax Manager > Quick
Scan.
You can open Samsung Scan and Fax Manager by right-clicking
the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and selecting Scan
and Fax Manager.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan and Fax
Manager window.
3. Press Properties.
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the file saving
destination and scan settings, to add or delete application program, and
to change the file format to be saved.
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab
(Local or Network).
5. When setting is done, press OK.Scanning_ 65
Set Scan Button tab
Scan Destination
• Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently
linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program
you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel
Destination List.
• Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to
open scanned image.
You can choose only one application to open scanned image from
the Available Destination List.
• Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to
Available Destination List.
• Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the
user in the Available Destination List.
• File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF and TIFF.
Scan Property
• Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.
• Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default
saving folder.
• Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.
• Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.
• Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.
• ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does
not support this option, it will be grayed out.
• Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied
scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.
• Default: Allows you to go back to default options.
Change Port tab
Local Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via USB port.
Network Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via network port.
• Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your
machine.
• IP or Host name: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your
machine.
Scan Assistant
When you press Quick Scan in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager, the
Scan Assistant window appears. Scan Assistant allows you to adjust
scan settings and start the scanning process.
• Favorites: Allows you to save the current preferences settings for
future use. When you save Favorites, all current scan settings are
saved. To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop
down list. The machine is now set to scan according to the setting
you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Favorites
drop down list and click Delete. To set a favorite as startup, select
the favorite you want to set as startup, then click the Set as default
button.
• Scan settings: The following scan options are available.
- Image Type: Allows you to chose the proper color settings for
image scanning.
- Resolution: Allows you to choose the image resolution.
- Document Size: Allows you to choose the proper size of the
scanned image.
- Document Source: Allows you to choose the device (scan
glass) you want to scan with.
- Prompt for additional pages: If this check box is checked, you
can scan pages continuously. This option is useful when you
scan multi-page documents and/or when Document Source is
set to Flatbed (platen glass). In this case a sequence of scanned
images is processed as a single document.
- Pages to Scan: Allows you to specify how many pages are to be
scanned. This option is available when Document Source is set
to ADF(Document feeder).
• Preference: The following scan options are available.
- Auto crop image after preview: If this option is checked, the
scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size.
- Preview on program start: If this option is checked, the
scanning area will be selected automatically as shown in the
preview.
- Blank page detection: This operation automatically detects
whether the scanned image is blank or not.
- Delete page: Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the
scanning process.
- Separate files: Blank page will work as a scan job separator.
That is, when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank
page will divide scanned image sequence into parts. Each
part will be treated as a separate document (group).
- Start from scanner: If this option is checked, scanning process
is managed using scanner touch screen rather than from the
computer. The option is not available for some scanner models.
• Advanced: In the Advanced mode, additional options such as
Image Adjustment, Image Enhancement, and Additional
Settings are available.
- Image Adjustment: Allows you to perform some transformations
of the scanned image. These transformations include automatic
adjustment of image size, straightening and rotation.
- Image Enhancement: Allows you to remove various defects of
the image and improve its quality.
- Additional settings: Allows special processing of scanned
images. These transformations include stitching several partial
image scans into a single image, processing of scanned books
and watermark stamping.
Click the Help button from the lower-left corner of the window and
click on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window
appears with information about that option's feature which is
provided from the Scan Assistant.
SCANNING WITH TWAIN-ENABLED SOFTWARE
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use
TWAIN-compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop.
Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
3. Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop.
4. Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
5. Scan and save your scanned image.Scanning_ 66
SCANNING USING THE WIA DRIVER
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by
Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike
the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust
images without using additional software.
• The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista/7 with a USB
port.
• Depending on the selected Control Panel view, the path may
differ.
Windows XP
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
3. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Scanners and Cameras.
4. Double-click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and Camera
wizard appears.
5. Click Next.
6. Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click
Preview to see how your options affect the picture.
7. Click Next.
8. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the
picture.
9. Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer. Choose
one of the options on screen.
10. Click Next.
11. Click Finish.
Windows Vista
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Scanners and Cameras.
4. Double-click Scan a document or picture. Windows Fax and Scan
application appears.
• You can click on View scanners and cameras to view
scanners,
• If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint
program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera...
5. Click New Scan. Scan driver appears.
6. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
7. Click Scan.
If you want to cancel the scan job, press Cancel button on the
Scanner and Camera wizard.
Windows 7
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers > Printers and Faxes.
4. Click right button of mouse on device driver icon and select Start Scan.
New Scan application appears.
5. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
6. Click Scan.
MACINTOSH SCANNING
You can scan documents using Image Capture program. Mac OS offers
Image Capture program.
Scanning with USB
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.
If No camera or scanner connected message appears,
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists,
refer to the Image Capture’s help.
4. Set the scan options on this program.
5. Scan and save your scanned image.
• For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the
Image Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software.
Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Scanning with network (SCX-3205W(K) only)
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.
4. For Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5
Click Devices and click Browse Devices.
For Mac OS X 10.6
Select your device below SHARED. Skip to step 7.
5. For Mac OS X 10.4
Select your machine in TWAIN devices option. Make sure that Use
TWAIN software check box is checked, and click Connect.
• If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port.
• If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click Change Port..
to select port.
Refer to scan manager for Change port.. use (See "Setting
scan information in Scan and Fax Manager" on page 67).
For Mac OS X 10.5
Make sure that Connected check box is checked beside your machine Scanning_ 67
in Bonjour Devices.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X 10.4 steps
above.
6. Set the scan options on this program.
7. Scan and save your scanned image.
• For Mac OS X 10.3, use TWAIN-compliant software.
• For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the
Image Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software.
Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.4.7 or higher.
Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager
When you want to find out about Scan and Fax Manager program
information, to check the installed scan driver's condition, to change
scan settings and to add or delete the folders where scanned
documents to computer are saved in Scan and Fax Manager program,
follow the below steps.
1. From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar, click Scan and Fax
Manager.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager.
3. Press Properties.
4. Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings,
to add or delete application programs, and to format files. You can
change the scanning machine by using Change Port (Local or
Network).
5. When done, press OK.
LINUX SCANNING
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.
Scanning
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
2. Click the button to switch to Scanners configuration.
3. Select the scanner on the list.
If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer
and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically
selected.
If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer, you can
select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is
in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set
the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.
4. Click Properties.
5. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading
originals" on page 48).
6. From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane.
7. Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview
Pane.
8. Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections.
• Image Quality: This option allows you to select the color
composition and the scan resolution for the image.
• Scan Area: This option allows you to select the page size. The
Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select the
option from the Job Type drop-down list (See "Adding Job Type
Settings" on page 67).
Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options.
9. When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the
progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.
10. The scanned image appears.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar (See "Using the
Image Manager" on page 68).
11.When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.
12. Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the
file name.
13. Click Save.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings for later use.Scanning_ 68
To save a new Job Type setting
1. Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
2. Click Save As.
3. Enter the name for your setting.
4. Click OK.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job
1. Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down list.
2. The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved
setting is automatically selected for the scan job.
To delete a Job Type setting
1. Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down
list.
2. Click Delete.
The setting is deleted from the list.
Using the Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and
tools to edit your scanned image.
Use the following tools to edit the image.
TOOLS NAME FUNCTION
Save Saves the image.
Undo Cancels your last action.
Redo Restores the action you canceled.
Scroll Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crop Crops the selected image area.
Zoom Out Zooms the image out.
Zoom In Zooms the image in.
Scale Allows you to scale the image size; you can
enter the size manually, or set the rate to
scale proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.
Rotate Allows you to rotate the image; you can select
the number of degrees from the drop-down
list.
Flip Allows you to flip the image vertically or
horizontally.
Brightness Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast
of the image, or to invert the image.
Properties Shows the properties of the image.
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the on
screen help.Management tools_ 69
10.management tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
This chapter includes:
• Introducing useful management tools
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only)
• Using the Smart Panel program
• SmarThru
• Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name (See "Features by Models" on
page 18).
INTRODUCING USEFUL MANAGEMENT TOOLS
The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently.
• "Using SyncThru™ Web Service (SCX-3205W(K) only)" on page 69.
• "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 70.
• "SmarThru" on page 70.
• "Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator" on page 71.
USING SYNCTHRU™ WEB SERVICE
(SCX-3205W(K) ONLY)
Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™
Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™ Web Service to:
• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
• Change printer preference.
• Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.
• Get support for using the machine.
To access SyncThru™ Web Service
1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to
log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service
without logging in but you won’t have access to Settings tab and
Security tab.
1. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
The Login window appears.
2. Type in the ID and Password then click Login.
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the
below default ID and password.
• ID: admin
• Password: sec00000
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Information tab
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can
check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print
reports such as an error report and so on.
• Active Alerts: This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in
the machine and their severity.
• Supplies: This item allows you to check how many pages are
printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge.
• Usage Counters: This item allows you to check the usage count by
print types: simplex, duplex.
• Current Settings: This item allows you to check the machine and
network information.
• Print information: This item allows you to print reports such as
system related reports, e-mail address and font reports.
Settings tab
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
• Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided
by your machine.
- System: You can set settings related to your machine.
- Printer: You can set settings related to printing jobs.
- Copy: You can set settings related to copying jobs.
• Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the
network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, network
protocols and so on.
- Restore Default: You can restore default network settings.
Security tab
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You
need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
• System Security: You can set the system administrator’s
information.
• Network Security: You can set settings for IPv4/IPv6 filtering,
802.1x, Authentication servers.Management tools_ 70
Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.
• Firmware Upgrade: You can upgrade your machine’s firmware.
• Contact Information: You can view the contact information.
• Link: You can view the links to useful sites where you can download
or check information.
USING THE SMART PANEL PROGRAM
The Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine
status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. For Windows
and Macintosh, Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the
machine software. For Linux, you can download Smart Panel from the
Samsung website and install (See "Installing the Smart Panel" on page 28).
To use this program, your computer has to meet the following system
requirements:
• Windows. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet
or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 25).
• Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM
and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System
requirements" on page 25).
• Linux. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or
exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 25).
• Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML
Help.
If you need to know the exact model name of your machine, you can
check the supplied software CD.
Understanding Smart Panel
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Smart
Panel.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel
icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux).
You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).
Windows Double-click this icon in Windows.
Macintosh Click this icon in Mac OS X.
Linux Click this icon in Linux.
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select
Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver
name > Smart Panel.
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine,
first select the correct machine model you want in order to access
the corresponding Smart Panel.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart
Panel icon and select your machine.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in
use.
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the
estimated level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge, and various other
types of information. You can also change settings.
1
Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
2
Buy Now You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
3
User’s Guide You can view the online User’s Guide.
This button changes to Troubleshooting
Guide when error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
4
Printer
Setting
You can configure various machine settings in the
Printer Settings Utility window. Some machines do
not have this feature.
If you connect your machine to a network,
the SyncThru™ Web Service window
appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility
window.
5
Driver Setting You can set all of the machine options you need in
the Printing Preferences window. This feature is
available only for Windows (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 55).
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel
icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options
window.
SMARTHRU
The supplied software CD provides you with SmarThru. SmarThru offers
you convenient features to use with your machine.
Starting SmarThru
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru.
1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly
connected to each other.
2. Once you have installed SmarThru, you will see the SmarThru icon on
your desktop.Management tools_ 71
3. Double-click the SmarThru icon.
4. The SmarThru appears.
• Scan to: Allows you to scan an image and save it to an application
or folder, email it, or publish it on a website.
• Image: Allows you to edit an image you have saved as a graphic file
and send it to a selected application or folder, email it, or publish it on
a website.
• Print: Allows you to print images you have saved. You can print
images in black and white or color mode if your machine supports it.
For more information about SmarThru, click at the top right corner
of the window. The SmarThru help window appears; you can view on
screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru. Before you begin the
uninstall, ensure that all applications are closed on your computer.
a) From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
b) Select Samsung Printers > SmarThru 4 > Uninstall SmarThru
4.
c) When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, read the
statement and click OK.
d) Click Finish.
Using SmarThru
Scanning
1. Click Scan To.
• Application: Scanning an image and placing it in an image editor
application such as Paint or Adobe Photoshop.
• E-mail: Scanning an image and emailing it. Allows you to scan
an image, preview it, and email it.
To send an image by e-mail, you must have a mail client
program, like Outlook Express, which has been set up with
your e-mail account.
• Folder: Scanning an image and saving it to a folder. Allows you
to scan an image, preview it, and save it to the folder of your
choice.
• OCR: Scanning an image and performing text recognition. Allows
you to scan an image, preview it, and send it to the OCR program
for text recognition.
- Recommended scan option for OCR.
- Resolution: 200 or 300 dpi.
- Image type: grayscale or black & white.
• Web: Scanning an image, previewing it, and publishing it on a
website, using the specified file format for the image you want to
publish.
• Settings: Customizing settings of Scan To basic functions.
Allows you to customize settings for Application, E-mail, OCR,
and Web functions.
2. Set scan settings and click Scan.
Printing
1. Click Print.
2. Select the file you want to print.
3. Select the machine you want to use for printing.
4. Click Print to start the job.
USING THE LINUX UNIFIED DRIVER
CONFIGURATOR
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring
machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified
Driver Configurator (See "Installing the Unified Linux Driver" on page 28).
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration
window.1 Printers
Configuration
2 Scanners
Configuration
3 Ports
Configuration
Management tools_ 72
To use the on screen help, click Help.
3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver
Configurator.
Printers configuration window
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
Printers tab
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the
machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator
window.
1 Switches to Printers configuration.
2 Shows all of the installed machine.
3 Shows the status, model name and URL of your machine.
The printer control buttons are as follows:
• Refresh: Renews the available machines list.
• Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.
• Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.
• Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default
machine.
• Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.
• Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is
working properly.
• Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties.
Classes tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.
1 Shows all of the machine classes.
2
Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the
class.
• Refresh: Renews the classes list.
• Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.
• Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.Management tools_ 73
Scanners configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of
installed Samsung machine devices, change device properties, and scan
images.
1 Switches to Scanners configuration.
2 Shows all of the installed scanners.
3 Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner.
• Properties: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a
document.
Ports configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of
each port, and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner
has terminated the job for any reason.
1 Switches to Ports configuration.
2 Shows all of the available ports.
3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status.
• Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
• Release port: Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port
or USB port. Since the machine device contains more than one device
(printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of
“consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing
mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The
drivers talk to their devices via so-called machine ports. The current
status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration.
The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of
the machine device, while another block is in use.
When you install a new machine device onto your system, it is strongly
recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver
Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the
new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for
machine’s functionality. For machine scanners, I/O ports are being
chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied
by default.Maintenance_ 74
11.maintenance
This chapter provides information about maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes:
• Printing a machine report
• Cleaning the machine
• Storing the toner cartridge
• Tips for moving & storing your machine
PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT
You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help
troubleshoot printer problems.
In ready mode, press and hold Stop/Clear button for about two seconds,
then release.
A configuration page prints out.
CLEANING THE MACHINE
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty
environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the most
optimum print quality.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent or other strong
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
• If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with
toner, we recommend that you use a cloth or tissue dampened
with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in
the air and might be harmful if inhaled.
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft and lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth
slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the
machine.
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can accumulate
inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems such as
toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and
reduces these problems.
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to
cool down.
2. Open the scan unit.
3. Open the inner cover.
4. Pull the toner cartridge out.
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to
light for more than few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper,
if necessary.Maintenance_ 75
• Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the toner
cartridge or imaging unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to
avoid touching this area.
5. With a dry and lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from
the toner cartridges area.
While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage
the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents
such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can
occur and cause damage to the machine.
After cleaning, let the machine to dry completely.
6. Reinsert the toner cartridge.
7. Close the inner cover and the scan unit completely in order.
8. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the
day as needed.
1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
4. Close the scanner lid.
STORING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Toner cartridge storage
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and
longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;
this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The
toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful
shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is
removed from the printer, always store the cartridge according to the
following guidelines:
• Inside the protective bag from the original package.
• Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if
was installed in the machine.
• Do not store consumable in any of the following conditions:
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight or room light.Maintenance_ 76
- Dusty places.
- A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
- An environment with salty air.
Handling instructions
• Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this
can cause internal damage and toner spillage.
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of
non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine
caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung
brand toner cartridge.
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,
if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you
may need to change the cartridge more often.
TIPS FOR MOVING & STORING YOUR MACHINE
• When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise,
the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can
cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality.Troubleshooting_ 77
12.troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
• Redistributing toner
• Tips for avoiding paper jams
• Clearing paper jams
• Solving other problems
REDISTRIBUTING TONER
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
• White streaks or light printing occurs.
• The Status LED blinks red.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing
the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light
printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
1. Open the scan unit.
2. Open the inner cover.
3. Pull the toner cartridge out.
4. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the drum in the toner cartridge or imaging unit. Use
the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
5. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into
the opening in the machine.
The tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within
the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks Troubleshooting_ 78
into place completely.
6. Close the inner cover and the scan unit completely in order. Ensure that
they are securely closed.
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, refer to the guidelines below:
• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (See "Loading
paper in the tray" on page 50).
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
• Use only recommended print media.
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing the right
side (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 50).
• If duplexing, print one sheet at a time using Start button (See
"Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 56).
• If you are printing on a special paper, print one sheet at a time using
Start button (See "Manual feeding in the tray" on page 50).
CLEARING PAPER JAMS
If a paper jam occurs, the Status LED on the control panel lights orange.
Find and remove the jammed paper.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and
carefully. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the
jam.
2
1
1 Scan unit
2 Inner cover
In the tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open the scan unit first, and then the inner cover.
2. Close the inner cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from
the machine.
If the paper does not eject, go to the next step.Troubleshooting_ 79
3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, check inside the machine (See "Inside the machine" on
page 79).
4. Close the inner cover and the scan unit in order. Printing automatically
resumes.
Inside the machine
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Be careful when removing paper from this area
to prevent getting your fingers burnt.
1. Open the scan unit first, and then the inner cover.
2. Close the inner cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from
the machine.
If the paper does not eject, go to the next step.
3. Open the inner cover.
4. Open the fuser unit cover.
5. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to the next step.Troubleshooting_ 80
6. Pull the toner cartridge out.
7. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
8. Insert the toner cartridge back into the machine.
9. Close the inner cover and the scan unit in order. Printing automatically
resumes.
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS
The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is
corrected. If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Other problems include:
• See "Power problems" on page 81.
• See "Paper feeding problems" on page 81.
• See "Printing problems" on page 82.
• See "Printing quality problems" on page 83.
• See "Copying problems" on page 85.
• See "Scanning problems" on page 86.
• See "Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem" on page 86.
• See "Common Windows problems" on page 87.
• See "Common Linux problems" on page 87.
• See "Common Macintosh problems" on page 88.Troubleshooting_ 81
Power problems
Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine is
not receiving
power,
or the connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected
properly.
• Plug in the power cord and press Power
button on the control panel.
• Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it.
- For Local Printing
- For Network Printing (SCX-3205W(K) only)
Paper feeding problems
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Paper jams during
printing.
Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams"
on page 78).
Paper sticks
together.
• Check the maximum paper capacity of the
tray (See "Print media specifications" on
page 93).
• Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper (See "Print media specifications" on
page 93).
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan
the paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to
stick together, replace with a new stack.
Multiple sheets of
paper do not feed.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and
weight.
Paper does not feed
into the machine.
• Remove any obstructions from inside the
machine.
• Paper has not been loaded correctly.
Remove paper from the tray and reload it
correctly.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the
machine (See "Print media specifications" on
page 93).
The paper keeps
jamming.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing
on special materials, use the manual feeder.
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use
only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine (See "Print media
specifications" on page 93).
• There may be debris inside the machine.
Clean the machine inside (See Cleaning the
inside).
Transparencies stick
together in the paper
exit.
Use only transparencies specifically designed
for laser printers. Remove each transparency as
it exits from the machine.
Envelopes skew or
fail to feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both
sides of the envelopes.Troubleshooting_ 82
Printing problems
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine
does not print.
The machine is
not receiving
power.
Check the power cord
connections.
The machine is
not selected as
the default
machine.
Select your machine as your
default machine in your Windows.
Check the machine for the followings:
• The scan unit is not closed. Close the scan unit.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (See
"Clearing paper jams" on page 78).
• No paper is loaded. Load paper (See "Loading
paper in the tray" on page 50).
• The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner
cartridge.
If a system error occurs, contact a service
representative.
The connection
cable between
the computer and
the machine is
not connected
properly.
Disconnect the machine cable and
reconnect it.
The connection
cable between
the computer and
the machine is
defective.
If possible, attach the cable to
another computer that is working
properly and print a job. You can
also try using a different machine
cable.
The port setting is
incorrect.
Check the Windows printer
settings to make sure that the print
job is sent to the correct port. If the
computer has more than one port,
make sure that the machine is
attached to the correct one.
The machine may
be configured
incorrectly.
Check the Printing Preferences
to ensure that all of the print
settings are correct (See "Opening
printing preferences" on page 55).
The printer driver
may be
incorrectly
installed.
Repair the machine software (See
"Installing USB connected
machine’s driver" on page 26).
The machine is
malfunctioning.
• Check the LEDs on the control
panel to see if the machine is
indicating a system error. If the
error cannot be cleared, contact
a service representative.
• Checking an error message is
also possible from the Smart
Panel on your computer (See
"Using the Smart Panel
program" on page 70).
The machine
does not print.
The document
size is so big that
the hard disk
space of the
computer is
insufficient to
access the print
job.
Allocate more hard disk space on
your computer for spooling, and try
printing.
The output tray is
full.
It can hold up to 50 (80 g/m2
)
sheets of plain paper. Once the
paper is removed from the output
tray, the machine resumes
printing.
The machine
selects print
materials from
the wrong paper
source.
The paper option
that was selected
in the Printing
Preferences may
be incorrect.
For many software applications,
the paper source selection is
found under the Paper tab within
the Printing Preferences. Select
the correct paper source. See the
printer driver help scree. (See
"Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
A print job is
extremely slow.
The job may be
very complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page
or try adjusting the print quality
settings.
Half the page is
blank.
The page
orientation setting
may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in
your application. See the printer
driver help screen.
The paper size
and the paper
size settings do
not match.
Ensure that the paper size in the
printer driver settings matches the
paper in the tray.
Or, ensure that the paper size in
the printer driver settings matches
the paper selection in the software
application settings you use.
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
The machine
cable is loose or
defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and
reconnect. Try a print job that you
have already printed successfully.
If possible, attach the cable and
the machine to another computer
that you know works and try a print
job. Finally, try a new machine
cable.
The wrong printer
driver was
selected.
Check the application’s printer
selection menu to ensure that your
machine is selected.
The software
application is
malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another
application.
The operating
system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine off
and back on again.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSTroubleshooting_ 83
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,
there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the
The machine problem.
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
If you are in a
DOS
environment, the
font setting for
your machine
may be set
incorrectly.
See "Changing font setting" on
page 47.
Pages print, but
they are blank.
The toner
cartridge is
defective or out of
toner.
Redistribute the toner, if
necessary.
If necessary, replace the toner
cartridge.
The file may have
blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that it
does not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such
as the controller
or the board, may
be defective.
Contact a service representative.
The machine
does not print
PDF files
correctly. Some
graphics, text,
or illustrations
are missing.
Incompatibility
between the PDF
file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image
may enable the file to print. Turn
on Print As Image from the
Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print
when you print a PDF file as
an image.
The print quality
of photos is not
good. Images
are not clear.
The resolution of
the photo is very
low.
Reduce the photo size. If you
increase the photo size in the
software application, the resolution
will be reduced.
Before printing,
the machine
emits vapor
near the output
tray.
Using damp
paper can cause
vapor during
printing.
This is not a problem. Just keep
printing.
The machine
does not print
special- sized
paper, such as
billing paper.
Paper size and
paper size setting
do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the
Edit... in the Paper tab in the
Printing Preferences (See
"Opening printing preferences" on
page 55).
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Light or faded print • If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on
the page, the toner supply is low. You may be able
to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life (See
"Redistributing toner" on page 77). If this does not
improve the print quality, install a new toner
cartridge.
• The paper may not meet paper specification; for
example, the paper may be too moist or rough
(See "Print media specifications" on page 93).
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution
setting is too low or the toner save mode is on.
Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save
mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may
indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning
(See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74).
Toner specks • The paper may not meet specification; for
example, the paper may be too moist or rough
(See "Print media specifications" on page 93).
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside
of your machine. Contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a
service representative (See "Clearing paper jams"
on page 78).
Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on
the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try
reprinting the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or
the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a
different brand of paper (See "Print media
specifications" on page 93).
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing
processes can cause some areas to reject toner.
Try a different kind or brand of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to
Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set
type to Thick (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 55).
• If these steps do not correct the problem, contact
a service representative.Troubleshooting_ 84
White Spots If white spots appear on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a
paper falls to the inner devices within the
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.
Clean the inside of your machine (See "Cleaning
the inside" on page 74).
• The paper path may need cleaning (See
"Cleaning the inside" on page 74).
Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge
inside the machine has probably been scratched.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one
(See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89).
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine
may be dirty (See "Cleaning the inside" on
page 74).
Black background If the amount of background shading becomes
unacceptable:
• Change to a lighter weight paper (See "Print
media specifications" on page 93).
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry
conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than
80% RH) can increase the amount of background
shading.
• Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a new
one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 89).
Toner smear If toner smears on the page:
• Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning
the inside" on page 74).
• Check the paper type and quality (See "Print
media specifications" on page 93).
• Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a
new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 89).
Vertical repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the
page at even intervals:
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still
have the same problem, remove the toner
cartridge and, install a new one (See "Replacing
the toner cartridge" on page 89).
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If
the defects occur on the back of the page, the
problem will likely correct itself after a few more
pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact
a service representative.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Background
scatter
A
Background scatter results from bits of toner
randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a
fresh ream of paper. Do not open packages of
paper until necessary so that the paper does not
absorb too much moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope,
change the printing layout to avoid printing over
areas that have overlapping seams on the
reverse side. Printing on seams can cause
problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire surface
area of a printed page, adjust the print quality
through your software application or in Printing
Preferences (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 55).
Toner particles are
around bold
characters or
pictures
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of
paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to
the Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab,
and set the paper type to Recycled.
Misformed
characters
• If characters are improperly formed and producing
hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick.
Try different paper (See "Print media
specifications" on page 93).
Page skew
A a B b C c
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality (See "Print
media specifications" on page 93).
• Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too
loose against the paper stack.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSTroubleshooting_ 85
Copying problems
Curl or wave • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high
temperature and humidity can cause paper curl
(See "Print media specifications" on page 93).
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Wrinkles or
creases
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality (See "Print
media specifications" on page 93).
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts
are dirty
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the
machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 74).
Solid Color or
Black pages
A
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly.
Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the
toner cartridge and install a new one (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89).
• The machine may require repair. Contact a
service representative.
Loose toner • Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning
the inside" on page 74).
• Check the paper type and quality (See "Print
media specifications" on page 93).
• Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new
one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 89).
• If the problem persists, the machine may require
repair. Contact a service representative.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Character Voids
A
Character voids are white areas within parts of
characters that should be solid black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another type
of transparency. Because of the composition of
transparencies, some character voids are
normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the
paper. Remove the paper and turn it over.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications
(See "Print media specifications" on page 93).
Horizontal stripes
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
A a B b C
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears
appear:
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly.
Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove
the toner cartridge and install a new one (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 89).
• If the problem persists, the machine may require
repair. Contact a service representative.
Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed
into the machine:
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to
Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set
type to Thin (See "Opening printing preferences"
on page 55).
An unknown image
repetitively
appears on a few
sheets or loose
toner, light print, or
contamination
occurs.
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of
1,000 m (3,281 ft.) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality such as
loose toner or light imaging. You can select a correct
altitude of your machine location (See "Altitude
adjustment" on page 46).
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTION
Copies are too light
or too dark.
Adjust darkness to lighten or darken the
backgrounds of copies using Printer Settings Utility
(See "Changing the settings for each copy" on
page 62).
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSTroubleshooting_ 86
Scanning problems
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The scanner does not
work.
• Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass.
• There may not be enough available memory to
hold the document you want to scan. Try the
Prescan function to see if that works. Try
lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the machine cable is connected
properly.
• Make sure that the machine cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known good
cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly.
Check scan setting in the SmarThru or the
application you want to use to make certain that
the scanner job is being sent to the correct port
(for example, USB001).
The unit scans very
slowly.
• Check if the machine is printing received data.
If so, scan the document after the received data
has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
Message appears on
your computer
screen:
• Device can’t be
set to the H/W
mode you want.
• Port is being used
by another
program.
• Port is Disabled.
• Scanner is busy
receiving or
printing data.
When the current
job is completed,
try again.
• Invalid handle.
• Scanning has
failed.
• There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. Try your job again when that job is
finished.
• The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
• The machine cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up properly.
• Ensure that the machine is properly connected
and the power is on, then restart your
computer.
• The USB cable may be improperly connected
or the power may be off.
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTION
Samsung Scan and
Fax Manager does
not work.
Check your system requirements. Samsung Scan
and Fax Manager works in Windows and Mac OS
(See "System requirements" on page 25).
Smears, lines,
marks, or spots
appear on copies.
• If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness
to lighten the background of your copies using
Printer Settings Utility (See "Changing the
settings for each copy" on page 62).
• If there are no defects on the original, clean the
scan unit (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on
page 75).
Copy image is
skewed.
• Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
Blank copies print
out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner
glass.
Image rubs off the
copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a
new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the
machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper
jams occur.
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the
tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh
supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper
remaining in the machine after a paper jam has
been cleared.
Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than
expected before
running out of toner.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or
heavy lines. For example, your originals may be
forms, newsletters, books, or other documents
that use more toner.
• The scanner lid may be left open while copies
are being made.
• Turn the machine off and back on.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONTroubleshooting_ 87
Common Windows problems
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
“File in Use”
message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software
from the startup group, then restart Windows.
Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation”
messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and
try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A
printer timeout error
occurred” messages
appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just
keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If
the message appears in ready mode or after
printing has been completed, check the connection
and/or whether an error has occurred.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your
computer for further information on Windows error messages.
Common Linux problems
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not print.
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your
system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and
switch to the Printers tab in Printers
configuration window to look at the list of
available machines. Make sure that your
machine is displayed on the list. If not, open
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
• Check if the machine is started. Open Printers
configuration and select your machine on the
printers list. Look at the description in the
Selected printer pane. If its status contains
Stopped string, press Start button. After
that normal operation of the machine should be
restored. The “stopped” status might be
activated when some problems in printing
occurred. For instance, this could be an
attempt to print a document when the port is
claimed by a scanning application.
• Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional
components of machine (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
user applications to the same port is possible.
To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at
a time is allowed to gain control over the
device. The other user will encounter “device
busy” response. You should open ports
configuration and select the port assigned to
your machine. In the Selected port pane you
can see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should either
wait for completion of the current job or press
the Release port button, if you are sure that
the present application is not functioning
properly.
• Check if your application has special print
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in
the command line parameter, then remove it to
print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print”
-> “Setup printer” and edit command line
parameter in the command item.
• The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet
Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket
printing instead of ipp or install a later version
of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).
The machine does
not print whole
pages, and output is
printed on half the
page.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color
machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript
Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL
Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest
version of AFPL Ghostscript from
http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and
install it to solve this problem.Troubleshooting_ 88
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Linux error messages.
Common Macintosh problems
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not print PDF files
correctly. Some
parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations
are missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the
file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the
Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
The document has
printed, but the print
job has not
disappeared from
the spooler in Mac
OS X 10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to Mac OS X 10.3.3. or
higher.
Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the Cover
page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover
page printing. The English alphabet and numbers
are displayed normally on the Cover page.
When printing a
document in
Macintosh with
Acrobat Reader 6.0
or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your
machine driver matches the one in Acrobat
Reader.
Refer to the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Macintosh error messages.
I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end.
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane: Device
dialog on the Acquire menu. If not, you should
install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for
Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home
page. For the detailed information, refer to the
Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end
application.
If you wish to use another kind of scan
application, refer to application’s Help.
I encounter the
“Cannot open port
device file” error
when printing a
document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR
GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress.
Known versions of CUPS server break the print
job whenever print options are changed and then
try to restart the job from the beginning. Since
Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing,
the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port
locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs.
If this situation occurs, try to release the port by
selecting Release port in Port configuration
window.
The machine does
not appear on the
scanners list.
• Ensure your machine is attached to your
computer, connected properly via the USB port,
and is turned on.
• Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is
installed in your system. Open Unified Linux
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure
that driver with a name corresponding to your
machine's name is listed in the window.
• Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional
components of machine (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
user applications to the same port is possible.
To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at
a time is allowed to gain control over the
device. The other user will encounter “device
busy” response. This usually happens when
starting a scan procedure. An appropriate
message box appears.
To identify the source of the problem, open the
Ports configuration and select the port
assigned to your scanner, port's symbol
/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at
/dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to
/dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth
sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you
can see if the port is occupied by another
application. If this is the case, you should either
wait for completion of the current job or press
the Release port button, if you are sure that
the present port application is not functioning
properly.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not scan.
• Ensure a document is loaded into the machine,
ensure your machine is connected to the
computer.
• If there is an I/O error while scanning.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONSSupplies_ 89
13.supplies
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
• How to purchase
• Available supplies
• Available maintenance parts
• Replacing the toner cartridge
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your
sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories.
HOW TO PURCHASE
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance
parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies,
select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service.
AVAILABLE SUPPLIES
When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of
supplies for your machine:
MODEL NUMBER
• 104 (MLT-D104S): Available in all regions except those listed in
Region A and B.
• 1042 (MLT-D1042S): Region A
a
a.Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia,
Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia,
Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia,
Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.
• 1043 (MLT-D1043S): Region B
b
:
b.Region B: China, Bangladesh, India, Nepal, Ukraine, Vietnam.
• 104 (MLT-D104X): Not available in all regions.
*Refer to your local Samsung website for availability.
To replace a toner cartridge, see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 89.
Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s
lifespan may differ.
You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same
country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will
be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of
these vary from country to country.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot
guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or
repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
AVAILABLE MAINTENANCE PARTS
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the
machine.
Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized
service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The
warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it
has reached its “Average Yield”.
Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality
and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The
purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The
maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each
item has been met.
PARTS AVERAGE YIELD
A
a.Yield is affected by operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connecting method, media type, media size, and
job complexity.
Transfer roller Approx. 30,000 pages
Fuser unit Approx. 30,000 pages
Pickup roller Approx. 30,000 pages
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life,
• The Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you
the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.
• The machine stops printing.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the model
number for the toner cartridge used in your machine (See "Available
supplies" on page 89).Supplies_ 90
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.
2. Open the scan unit.
3. Open the inner cover.
4. Pull the toner cartridge out.
5. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package.
6. Slowly shake the cartridge side to side five or six times to distribute the
toner evenly inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per
cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging
unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
7. Remove the cap protecting the toner cartridge.
8. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into
the opening in the machine.
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the
machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into
place completely.
9. Close the inner cover and the scan unit completely in order.
10. Turn the machine on.Specifications_ 91
14.specifications
This chapter covers the machines primary specifications.
This chapter includes:
• Hardware specifications
• Environmental specifications
• Electrical specifications
• Print media specifications
The specification values are listed below: specifications are subject to change without notice: See www.samsung.com/printer for possible changes in
information.
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Dimension Height 234 mm (9.21 inches)
Depth 299 mm (11.77 inches)
Width 388 mm (15.28 inches)
Weight Machine with consumables 7.5 kg (16.53 lbs)
Package weight Paper 1.22 kg (2.69 lbs)
Plastic 0.24 kg (0.52 lbs)
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Noise Level
a
a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
Ready mode 26 dB(A)
Printing mode 49 dB(A)
Copying mode 49 dB(A)
Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)
Storage (unpacked) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Humidity Operation 10 to 80% RH
Storage (unpacked) 20 to 80% RH
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and
void the product warranty.ITEM DESCRIPTION
Power rating
a
a.See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and type of current (A) for your machine.
110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V
Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 270W
Ready mode Less than 36W
Power save mode • SCX-3200 Series: 3.8W
• SCX-3205W(K): 5.6 W
Power off mode Less than 0.45 W
Specifications_ 92Specifications_ 93
PRINT MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE SIZE
DIMENSIONS
PRINT MEDIA WEIGHT
A B
a.If media weight is over 120 g/m2
(32 lbs), load a paper into the tray one by one.
/CAPACITY
Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches) 60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lbs bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(20 lbs
bond)
60 to 163 g/m2
(16 to 43 lbs
bond)
• 1 sheet for manual feeding in
the tray
Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches)
US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 0 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lbs bond)
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches)
• 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)
Thick paper Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section 90 g/m2
(24 lbs bond)
• 140 sheets
90 to 163 g/m2
(24 to 43 lbs
bond)
• 1 sheet for manual feeding in
the tray
Thin paper Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray
Transparency Letter, A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g/m2
(37 to 39 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray
Labels
c
c. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield).
Letter, Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5
Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray
Card stock Letter, Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5
Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 163 g/m2
(28 to 43 lbs bond)
• 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray
Minimum size (custom) 76 x 196 mm (3.00 x 7.70 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2
(16 to 43 lbs bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches)
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions.
TRAY
MANUAL FEEDING IN THE
TRAYContact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 94
contact samsung worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITE
ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com
ARMENIA 0-800-05-555
AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com
AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)
www.samsung.com
AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555
BAHRAIN 8000-4726
BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr
(French)
BRAZIL 0800-124-421
4004-0000
www.samsung.com
CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com
CHINA 400-810-5858
010-6475 1880
www.samsung.com
COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com
COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com
CZECH
REPUBLIC
800-SAMSUNG
(800-726786)
www.samsung.com
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com
ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com
EGYPT 0800-726786
EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com
EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com
ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com
KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500
FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com
FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864 € 0,14/min)
www.samsung.com
GEORGIA 8-800-555-555
GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com
HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com
HONG KONG (852) 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
INDIA 3030 8282
1800 110011
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
www.samsung.com
INDONESIA 0800-112-8888
021-5699-7777
www.samsung.com
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com
JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com
JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com
JORDAN 800-22273
KSA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com
BAHRAIN 8000-4726
LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com
LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com
MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com
MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) (€
0,10/min)
www.samsung.com
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786)
www.samsung.com
NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com
NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com
PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITEContact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 95
PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-8-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
02-5805777
www.samsung.com
POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG
(172678)
022-607-93-33
www.samsung.com
PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com
QATAR 800-2255
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru
SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172
678)
www.samsung.com
SWEDEN 0771 726 7864
(SAMSUNG)
www.samsung.com
SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
www.samsung.com
SYRIA 1825-22-73
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500
TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com
THAILAND 1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
www.samsung.com
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com
U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
UKRAINE 8-800-502-000 www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITE
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru
VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com
VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com
COUNTRY/REG
ION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITEGlossary_ 96
glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well
as mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards
Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g
802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band.
802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps.
802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave
ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that
connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local
area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of
WLAN radio signals.
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can
scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and
white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file
format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to
prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing
additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of
the machine.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that
will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that
the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box
state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,
received fax data.Glossary_ 97
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,
such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that
the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer
equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one
print cycle.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer
limits 2,400 pages a day.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes
caused by telephone line noise.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as
another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in
use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It
consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm
when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a
network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented
by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement
of technology related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to
the peripheral (for example, a printer). Glossary_ 98
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of
an organization's information or operations with its employees.
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal
website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing
the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer
can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution
than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be
used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over
TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates
the status of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g.,
00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network
Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers
trying to locate machines on large networks.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently
compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method
recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted
information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.Glossary_ 99
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is
usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its
usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets
worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning
mechanism, and paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser
printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a
device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer
to the printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can
be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can
produce in one minute.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies
many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for
remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables
centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and
passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting)
concept to manage network access.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated
Inter-process communication mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple,
text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network
(WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to
communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a
maximum length of 32 characters.Glossary_ 100
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to
determine which part of the address is the network address and which
part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which
contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and
photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper.
Toner can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser,
causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a
TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can
be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a
UNC path is: \\\\
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,
currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE
802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP
provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as
it is transmitted from one end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant
scanner.
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless
(Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the
security features of WEP.
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small
business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the
wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop
devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a
wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a
wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you
can configure the wireless network connection easily without a
computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description
Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for
portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It
is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a
vector-based device-independent document format.
GT-P7100
Benutzerhandbuch2 Dieses Handbuch verwenden
Dieses Handbuch verwenden
Vielen Dank für den Erwerb dieses Samsung-Mobilgeräts. Dieses Gerät, das auf der
herausragenden Technologie und den hohen Standards von Samsung beruht, bietet Ihnen mobile
Kommunikation und Unterhaltung in hoher Qualität.
Dieses Benutzerhandbuch wurde speziell entwickelt, um Sie Schritt für Schritt durch die
Funktionen und Optionen Ihres Geräts zu führen.
Lesen Sie den folgenden Abschnitt zuerst
• Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise und dieses Benutzerhandbuch vor der Verwendung des
Geräts aufmerksam durch, um seine sichere und sachgemäße Verwendung zu gewährleisten.
• Die Beschreibungen in diesem Handbuch beziehen sich auf die Standardeinstellungen Ihres
Geräts.
• Bilder und Bildschirmdarstellungen in diesem Benutzerhandbuch können vom Erscheinungsbild
des tatsächlichen Produkts abweichen.
• Der Inhalt in diesem Benutzerhandbuch kann vom Produkt oder von Software, die von
Dienstanbietern oder Netzbetreibern bereitgestellt wird, abweichen. Änderungen des Inhalts
dieses Benutzerhandbuchs ohne vorherige Bekanntmachung ist vorbehalten. Die neueste
Version des Benutzerhandbuchs steht auf www.samsung.com zur Verfügung.Dieses Handbuch verwenden 3
• Die verfügbaren Funktionen und zusätzliche Dienste können sich je nach Gerät, Software und
Netzbetreiber unterscheiden.
• Der Aufbau und die Zustellung dieses Benutzerhandbuchs beruhen auf dem AndroidBetriebssystem und können abhängig vom Betriebssystem des Benutzers abweichen.
• Anwendungen und ihre Funktionen können sich je nach Land, Region oder HardwareSpezifikationen unterscheiden. Samsung ist nicht haftbar für Leistungsprobleme, die durch
Anwendungen von Drittanbietern verursacht werden.
• Samsung ist nicht haftbar für Leistungsprobleme und Inkompatibilitäten, die durch Bearbeitung
der Registry-Einstellungen durch den Benutzer verursacht werden.
• Tonquellen, Hintergrundbilder und Bilder, die in diesem Gerät bereitgestellt werden, unterliegen
einer Lizenzvereinbarung für eingeschränkte Nutzung zwischen Samsung und ihren jeweiligen
Eigentümern. Extrahieren und Nutzen dieser Materialien für gewerbliche oder andere Zwecke
stellt eine Verletzung der Urheberrechtsgesetze dar. Samsung ist nicht haftbar für derartige
Verletzungen der Urheberrechte durch den Benutzer.
• Bewahren Sie dieses Benutzerhandbuchs zum späteren Nachschlagen auf.4 Dieses Handbuch verwenden
Copyright
Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics
Dieses Benutzerhandbuch ist durch internationale Urheberrechtsgesetze geschützt.
Kein Teil dieses Benutzerhandbuchs darf ohne die vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung
durch Samsung Electronics in irgendeiner Form oder durch irgendwelche Mittel, elektronisch
oder mechanisch, einschließlich von Fotokopieren, Aufzeichnen oder Speichern in einem
Informationsspeicher- und -abrufsystem, reproduziert, verteilt, übersetzt oder übertragen werden.
Markenzeichen
• SAMSUNG und das SAMSUNG-Logo sind eingetragene Markenzeichen von Samsung
Electronics.
• Google, das stilisierte Google-Logo, Android und das stilisierte Android-Logo sind Marken von
Google, Inc.
• Bluetooth® ist ein weltweit eingetragenes Warenzeichen der Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Dieses Handbuch verwenden 5
• Oracle und Java sind eingetragene Marken von Oracle und/oder ihren verbundenen
Unternehmen. Andere Namen und Bezeichnungen können Marken ihrer jeweiligen Inhaber
sein.
• Wi-Fi®, das Logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED und das Logo Wi-Fi sind eingetragene Marken von Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• Alle anderen Markenzeichen und Urheberrechte sind das Eigentum ihrer jeweiligen Besitzer.6 Inhalt
Inhalt
Gerät und Zubehör ................................................................................ 7
Verpackungsinhalt ............................................................................................................. 8
Mit dem Gerät vertraut machen ..................................................................................... 9
SIM-Karte einsetzen ........................................................................................................ 12
Gerät laden ........................................................................................................................ 13
Gerät ein- und ausschalten ........................................................................................... 16
Sicherheitshinweise ............................................................................ 18Gerät und Zubehör 7
Gerät und Zubehör
Ihr GALAXY Tab 10.1v™-Gerät beinhaltet umfangreiches Zubehör, einschließlich Headset,
PC-Datenkabel und Adapter. In diesem Handbuch werden die Teile des Geräts, das Laden
des Akkus, das Ein- und Ausschalten des Geräts sowie weitere hilfreiche Informationen
beschrieben. Weitere Informationen finden Sie unter www.samsung.com.
In diesem Abschnitt
Verpackungsinhalt auf Seite 8
Mit dem Gerät vertraut machen auf Seite 9
SIM-Karte einsetzen auf Seite 12
Gerät laden auf Seite 13
Gerät ein- und ausschalten auf Seite 168 Gerät und Zubehör
Verpackungsinhalt
Überprüfen Sie, ob der Produktkarton die folgenden Artikel enthält:
• Mobilgerät
• USB-Netzadapter
• PC-Datenkabel
• Headset
• Benutzerhandbuch
• Die mit dem Gerät mitgelieferten Artikel können sich unterscheiden, je nachdem
welche Software und welches Zubehör in Ihrer Region erhältlich sind oder von Ihrem
Netzbetreiber angeboten werden.
• Bei Ihrem örtlichen Samsung-Händler können Sie zusätzliche Zubehörteile kaufen.
• Die mitgelieferten Zubehörteile erbringen in Verbindung mit dem Gerät die optimale
Leistung.
• Andere Zubehörteile als die mitgelieferten sind unter Umständen nicht mit dem Gerät
kompatibel.Gerät und Zubehör 9
Mit dem Gerät vertraut machen
Ein/Aus-Taste
3,5-mm-Headsetbuchse
Lautsprecher
Lichtsensor
Touchscreen
Multifunktionsbuchse
Vordere Kamera
LED10 Gerät und Zubehör
Lautstärketaste
Mikrofon
Fotolicht
Hinteres Kameraobjektiv
Interne Antenne
SIM-Karten-Einschub
LautsprecherGerät und Zubehör 11
Bevor Sie das Gerät zum ersten Mal verwenden, müssen Sie den Akku laden.
Siehe „Gerät laden“ auf Seite 13.)
Auf der Supportwebsite des Betreibers und im Benutzerhandbuch (verfügbar unter
www.samsung.com) sind die grundlegenden Features des Geräts beschrieben, unter anderem das
erstmalige Einschalten.
Halten Sie die Linsen der vorderen und hinteren Kamera mit einem fusselfreien Lappen sauber.
Schmierflecken und Fingerabdrücke entstellen Ihre Bilder. Das Fotolicht der hinteren Kamera
befindet sich neben der Linse. Das Aufnehmen von Bildern und Videos wird im Benutzerhandbuch
beschrieben.
› Infos zum Touchscreen
Mit dem Touchscreen des Geräts können Sie ganz einfach Elemente auswählen oder Funktionen
durchführen.
• Verwenden Sie keine scharfen Gegenstände, um ein Zerkratzen des Touchscreens zu vermeiden.
• Achten Sie darauf, dass der Touchscreen nicht mit anderen elektrischen Vorrichtungen in
Kontakt kommt. Elektrostatische Entladungen können Fehlfunktionen des Touchscreens
verursachen.
• Achten Sie darauf, dass der Touchscreen nicht mit Wasser in Kontakt kommt. Durch Feuchtigkeit
oder Kontakt mit Wasser können Fehlfunktionen des Touchscreens verursacht werden.12 Gerät und Zubehör
• Für die optimale Nutzung des Touchscreens sollten Sie die Schutzfolie vor der Verwendung des
Geräts vom Bildschirm entfernen.
• Der Touchscreen verfügt über eine Schicht, die geringe elektrische Ladungen erkennt, wie sie
vom menschlichen Körper abgegeben werden. Zur Erzielung der optimalen Leistung tippen
Sie mit der Fingerspitze auf den Touchscreen. Der Touchscreen reagiert nicht, wenn mit spitzen
Gegenständen wie einem Eingabestift oder Bleistift darauf getippt wird.
SIM-Karte einsetzen
Vor der Nutzung des Geräts müssen Sie eine SIM-Karte einsetzen.
1 Öffnen Sie die Abdeckung des SIM-Karteneinschubs an der Seite des Geräts.
2 Setzen Sie die SIM-Karte ein, und schließen Sie die Abdeckung des SIM-Karteneinschubs.Gerät und Zubehör 13
Gerät laden
Das Gerät verfügt über einen eingebauten Akku. Vor der Nutzung des Geräts muss es vollständig
geladen werden.
• Verwenden Sie nur von Samsung zugelassene Ladegeräte. Nicht zugelassene Ladegeräte
können zu explodierenden Akkus bzw. Schäden am Gerät führen.
• Wenn der Akku schwach ist, gibt das Gerät einen Warnton aus und zeigt eine
entsprechende Warnmeldung auf dem Display an. Außerdem ist das Akkusymbol
leer und wird rot angezeigt. Wenn der Akku zu schwach wird, schaltet sich das Gerät
automatisch aus. Laden Sie den Akku umgehend auf, um das Gerät weiter nutzen zu
können.14 Gerät und Zubehör
› Gerät laden
1 Schließen Sie das PC-Datenkabel an den USB-Netzadapter und das andere Ende des PCDatenkabels an die Multifunktionsbuchse an.
Falsches Anschließen des Reiseadapters kann zu schweren Schäden am Gerät führen.
Schäden durch unsachgemäße Verwendung sind von der Garantie nicht abgedeckt.Gerät und Zubehör 15
2 Stecken Sie den USB-Netzadapter in eine Netzsteckdose.
• Sie können das Gerät verwenden, während es geladen wird, dann kann das Aufladen des
Akkus jedoch länger dauern.
• Während das Gerät aufgeladen wird, kann es vorkommen, dass der Touchscreen und die
Touchtasten aufgrund einer instabilen Spannungsversorgung nicht funktionieren. Sollte
dies vorkommen, trennen Sie das USB-Netzteil von der Netzsteckdose ab oder trennen
Sie das PCDatenkabel vom Gerät ab.
• Beim Aufladen kann sich das Gerät erwärmen. Das ist normal und hat keine Auswirkung
auf die Lebensdauer des Geräts oder seine Leistungsfähigkeit.
• Falls das Gerät nicht richtig lädt, bringen Sie es zusammen mit dem Ladegerät in ein
Samsung- Kundendienstzentrum.
3 Wenn das Gerät vollständig geladen ist, trennen Sie es vom Adapter.16 Gerät und Zubehör
Gerät ein- und ausschalten
Mit der Ein/Aus-Taste schalten Sie das Gerät ein und aus.
Ein/Aus-Taste
› Gerät einschalten
Folgen Sie nach dem erstmaligen Einschalten des Geräts den Bildschirmhinweisen, um es für den
Betrieb einzurichten.Gerät und Zubehör 17
› SIM entsperren
Falls Sie dreimal die falsche SIM-PIN eingeben, wird die SIM-Karte gesperrt, und Sie können das
Gerät nicht verwenden. Sie benötigen einen PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) von Ihrem Betreiber, um
die SIM zu entsperren und eine neue PIN festzulegen.
› Gerät ausschalten
Halten Sie die Taste Ein/Aus gedrückt, und wählen Sie OK aus.
Weitere Informationen zum Arbeiten mit Touchscreen und Menüs finden Sie im
Benutzerhandbuch.18 Sicherheitshinweise
Sicherheitshinweise
Lesen Sie die nachstehenden Informationen vollständig durch, bevor Sie das Gerät verwenden, um Verletzungen Ihrer
eigenen Person und anderer sowie Schäden am Gerät zu vermeiden.
Warnung: Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen, Feuer und Explosionen
Verwenden Sie keine beschädigten Netzkabel oder Stecker und keine lockeren Netzsteckdosen.
Berühren Sie das Netzkabel nicht mit nassen Händen und trennen Sie das Ladegerät nicht durch
Ziehen am Kabel ab.
Das Netzkabel darf nicht gebogen oder beschädigt werden.
Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht während des Ladevorgangs und berühren Sie das Gerät nicht mit
nassen Händen.
Schließen Sie das Ladegerät und den Akku nicht kurz.
Lassen Sie das Ladegerät und den Akku nicht fallen und schützen Sie diese Teile vor
Erschütterungen.
Laden Sie den Akku nicht mit Ladegeräten, die nicht vom Hersteller zugelassen sind.Sicherheitshinweise 19
Verwenden Sie Ihr Gerät nicht während eines Gewitters.
Bei dem Gerät können Fehlfunktionen auftreten und Sie setzen sich einem erhöhten Risiko aus, einen Stromschlag zu
erleiden.
Verwenden Sie keinen beschädigten oder leckenden Lithium-Ion-Akku (Li-Ion).
Wenden Sie sich für die sichere Entsorgung von Li-Ion-Akkus an das nächste Kundendienstzentrum.
Behandeln und entsorgen Sie Akkus und Ladegeräte mit Sorgfalt.
• Verwenden Sie nur von Samsung zugelassene Akkus und Ladegeräte, die speziell für das Gerät ausgelegt sind.
Inkompatible Akkus und Ladegeräte können schwere Verletzungen oder Schäden am Gerät verursachen.
• Werfen Sie Akkus oder Geräte niemals ins Feuer. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Akkus oder Geräte entsprechend den
geltenden örtlichen Bestimmungen.
• Legen Sie weder Akkus noch das Gerät auf oder in ein Heizgerät wie z.B. eine Mikrowelle, einen Ofen oder einen
Heizkörper. Die Akkus können dadurch überhitzen und explodieren!
• Zerdrücken oder zerstechen Sie den Akku nicht. Vermeiden Sie es, den Akku hohem Druck auszusetzen, der zu einem
internen Kurzschluss und einer Überhitzung führen kann.
Schutz von Gerät, Akkus und Ladegeräten vor Beschädigung.
• Setzen Sie das Gerät und Akkus nicht sehr niedrigen oder sehr hohen Temperaturen aus.
• Extreme Temperaturen können Verformungen des Geräts verursachen und verringern die Ladekapazität und
Nutzungsdauer des Geräts und der Akkus.
• Verhindern Sie versehentlichen Kontakt der Anschlussklemmen von Akkus mit Metallteilen, da auf diese Weise eine
stromführende Verbindung hergestellt werden kann, die zu kurzfristiger oder dauerhafter Beschädigung des Akkus
führen kann.
• Verwenden Sie niemals ein beschädigtes Ladegerät oder einen beschädigten Akku.20 Sicherheitshinweise
Achtung: Befolgen Sie alle Sicherheitswarnungen und Vorschriften bei der
Verwendung des Geräts in Bereichen mit eingeschränkter Nutzung.
Schalten Sie das Gerät aus, wo seine Verwendung verboten ist.
Erfüllen Sie alle Vorschriften, die die Verwendung von Mobilgeräten in bestimmten Bereichen einschränken.
Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe anderer elektronischer Geräte.
Die meisten elektronischen Geräte arbeiten mit Hochfrequenzsignalen. Dieses Gerät kann andere elektronische Geräte
stören.
Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe eines Schrittmachers.
• Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht innerhalb eines Abstands von 15 cm zu einem Schrittmacher, da dieses Gerät einen
Schrittmacher stören kann.
• Wenn Sie das Gerät verwenden halten Sie einen Mindestabstand von 15 cm zum Schrittmacher ein.
• Um mögliche Störungen eines Schrittmachers zu minimieren, verwenden Sie das Gerät an der gegenüberliegenden
Körperseite des Schrittmachers.
Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht in einem Krankenhaus oder in der Nähe medizinischer Gerät, die
durch Hochfrequenzen gestört werden können.
Wenn Sie selbst medizinische Geräte verwenden, wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller dieser Geräte, um die Störfestigkeit
dieser Geräte gegenüber Hochfrequenzen zu gewährleisten.
Wenn Sie ein Hörgerät verwenden, wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller für Informationen über
Funkstörungen.
Einige Hörgeräte können durch die Hochfrequenzen dieses Geräts gestört werden. Wenden Sie sich an den Hersteller, um
die Sicherheit Ihres Hörgeräts zu gewährleisten.Sicherheitshinweise 21
Schalten Sie das Gerät in explosionsgefährdeten Umgebungen aus.
• Befolgen Sie in explosionsgefährdeten Umgebungen immer sämtliche Vorschriften, Anweisungen und Hinweisschilder.
• Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht an einer Zapfsäule (Tankstelle), in der Nähe von Treibstoffen, Chemikalien oder in
Sprengbereichen.
• Lagern und transportieren Sie entzündliche Flüssigkeiten, Gase oder Sprengstoffe nicht am selben Ort, an dem sich das
Gerät mit Zubehör befindet.
Schalten Sie das Gerät in einem Flugzeug aus.
Die Verwendung des Geräts in Flugzeugen ist verboten. Dieses Gerät kann die elektronischen Navigationsinstrumente von
Flugzeugen stören.
Elektronische Vorrichtungen in Kraftfahrzeugen können durch die Funkfrequenz des Geräts
gestört werden.
Die elektronischen Vorrichtungen in Ihrem Fahrzeug können durch die Funkfrequenz des Geräts gestört werden. Wenden
Sie sich für weitere Informationen an den Hersteller.
Richtige Pflege und Nutzung des Mobilgeräts
Halten Sie das Gerät trocken.
• Feuchtigkeit und Flüssigkeiten aller Art können Teile des Geräts oder elektronische Schaltkreise beschädigen.
• Sollte das Gerät nass geworden sein, Schalten Sie das Gerät aus. Trocknen Sie das Gerät mit einem Tuch und bringen Sie
es zu einem Kundendienstzentrum.
• Durch Flüssigkeit wird die Farbe des Etiketts verändert, das Wasserschäden im Gerät anzeigt. Wasser beschädigt das
Gerät und kann zum Erlöschen der Herstellergarantie führen.22 Sicherheitshinweise
Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht an staubigen und schmutzigen Plätzen auf.
Durch Staub können Fehlfunktionen des Geräts verursacht werden.
Legen Sie das Gerät nicht auf schräge Flächen.
Das Gerät kann durch Herunterfallen beschädigt werden.
Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht an heißen oder kalten Plätzen auf. Verwenden Sie das Gerät bei -20
bis 45 °C.
• Das Gerät kann explodieren, wenn es in einem geschlossenen Fahrzeug gelassen wird, da die Temperatur in Fahrzeugen
bis zu 80 °C erreichen kann.
• Setzen Sie das Gerät nicht über längere Zeit direkter Sonnenbestrahlung aus (wie auf dem Armaturenbrett eines
Fahrzeugs).
• Bewahren Sie den Akku bei -20 bis 45 °C auf.
Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht zusammen mit Metallgegenständen wie Münzen, Schlüssel und
Schmuck auf.
• Das Gerät kann sich verformen oder Schäden davontragen.
• Wenn die Akkukontakte mit Metallgegenständen in Kontakt kommen, kann ein Feuer verursacht werden.
Bringen Sie das Gerät nicht in die Nähe magnetischer Felder.
• Durch Magnetfelder können Fehlfunktionen des Geräts oder Entladen des Akkus verursacht werden.
• Karten mit Magnetstreifen wie Kreditkarten, Telefonkarten, Reisepässe und Bordkarten können durch Magnetfelder
beschädigt werden.
• Verwenden Sie keine Taschen oder Accessoires mit Magnetverschlüssen und bringen Sie das Gerät nicht für längere Zeit
mit magnetischen Feldern in Kontakt.Sicherheitshinweise 23
Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe von Heizungen, Mikrowellengeräten,
Kochvorrichtungen oder Hochdruckbehältern auf.
• Der Akku kann undicht werden.
• Das Gerät kann sich überhitzen und ein Feuer verursachen.
Lassen Sie das Gerät nicht fallen und setzen Sie es keinen Erschütterungen aus.
• Der Bildschirm des Geräts kann beschädigt werden.
• Durch Biegen oder Verformen können das Gerät oder Teile davon beschädigt werden.
Verwenden Sie keinen Blitz nahe der Augen von Menschen oder Tieren.
Durch Verwenden eines Blitzes in der Nähe von Augen können ein vorübergehender Sichtverlust oder Schäden an den
Augen verursacht werden.
Gewährleistung der maximale Nutzungsdauer des Akkus und des Ladegeräts.
• Lassen Sie einen Akku nie länger als eine Woche am Ladegerät, da ein Überladen die Lebensdauer des Akkus verkürzt.
• Mit der Zeit entladen sich unbenutzte Akkus und müssen vor Gebrauch erneut geladen werden.
• Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Akku erst nach mehrmaligem, vollständigem Entladen und Laden die volle Kapazität
erreicht.
• Trennen Sie Ladegeräte von der Stromquelle, wenn sie nicht verwendet werden.
• Verwenden Sie die Akkus nur für den vorgesehenen Zweck.
Verwenden Sie nur vom Hersteller zugelassene Akkus, Ladegeräte, Zubehör und Teile.
• Die Verwendung von Akkus oder Ladegeräten von Drittanbietern kann die Nutzungsdauer des Geräts verkürzen oder
Fehlfunktionen verursachen.
• Samsung ist nicht haftbar für die Sicherheit des Benutzers, wenn Zubehör und Teile verwendet werden, die nicht von
Samsung zugelassen sind.24 Sicherheitshinweise
Nicht auf das Gerät oder den Akku beißen oder daran saugen
• Dadurch kann das Gerät beschädigt oder eine Explosion verursacht werden.
• Wenn das Gerät von Kindern benutzt wird, achten Sie auf die sachgemäße Verwendung.
Bei der Verwendung des Geräts:
• Sprechen Sie direkt in das Mikrofon.
• Vermeiden Sie Kontakt mit der eingebauten Antenne des Geräts. Das Berühren der Antenne führt möglicherweise zur
Übertragung von mehr hochfrequenter Strahlung als erforderlich.
• Halten Sie das Gerät entspannt, drücken Sie die Tasten nur leicht, verwenden Sie Spezialfunktionen, die die Anzahl der zu
betätigenden Tasten verringern (wie z. B. Texterkennung), und machen Sie regelmäßig Pausen.
Schützen Sie Ihr Gehör
• Durch laute Töne über längere Zeit können Gehörschäden verursacht werden.
• Laute Töne beim Lenken eines Fahrzeugs können Sie ablenken und einen Unfall verursachen.
• Verringern Sie vor dem Anschließen der Ohrhörer an eine Audioquelle immer die Lautstärke und
verwenden Sie nur die minimale Lautstärkeneinstellung, die zum Hören des Gesprächs oder der Musik
erforderlich ist.
Geben Sie Obacht, wenn Sie das Gerät beim Gehen oder Laufen verwenden.
Achten Sie immer auf Ihre Umgebung, um sich und andere nicht zu verletzen.
Tragen Sie das Gerät nicht in der Gesäßtasche oder an der Hüfte.
Sie können sich verletzen oder das Gerät beschädigen, wenn Sie fallen.Sicherheitshinweise 25
Zerlegen, modifizieren oder reparieren Sie das Gerät nicht.
• Veränderungen oder Modifizierungen am Gerät können zum Erlöschen der Herstellergarantie führen. Lassen Sie das
Gerät in einem Samsung-Kundendienstzentrum warten.
• Bauen Sie den Akku nicht auseinander und stechen Sie nicht hinein, weil dadurch eine Explosion oder ein Feuer
verursacht werden können.
Das Gerät weder mit Farbe anmalen noch mit Aufklebern bekleben.
Farbe und Aufkleber können bewegliche Teile verstopfen oder behindern und dadurch den ordnungsgemäßen Betrieb
Ihres Geräts verhindern. Falls Sie auf die Farbe oder Metallteile dieses Produkts allergisch reagieren, kann dies bei Ihnen
eventuell Juckreiz, Ausschläge oder Hautschwellungen verursachen. Nutzen Sie das Produkt in diesem Fall keinesfalls
weiter und suchen Sie umgehend einen Arzt auf.
Reinigung des Geräts:
• Reinigen Sie das Gerät und das Ladegerät mit einem Tuch oder einem Radiergummi.
• Verwenden Sie keine Chemikalien oder Lösungsmittel.
Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht, wenn das Display gesprungen oder zerbrochen ist.
Zerbrochenes Glas oder Kunststoff kann Verletzungen an Händen und Gesicht verursachen. Lassen Sie das Gerät von
einem Samsung-Kundendienstzentrum reparieren.
Verwenden Sie das Gerät nicht für andere als die vorgesehenen Zwecke.
Stören Sie nicht andere, wenn Sie das Gerät in der Öffentlichkeit verwenden.
Lassen Sie das Gerät nicht von Kindern verwenden.
Ihr Gerät ist kein Spielzeug. Lassen Sie keine Kinder damit spielen, da diese sich selbst und andere verletzen bzw. das Gerät
beschädigen könnten.26 Sicherheitshinweise
Installieren Sie Mobilgeräte und Ausrüstung mit Sorgfalt.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass alle Mobilgeräte oder zugehörige Ausrüstung, die in Ihrem Fahrzeug eingebaut ist, sicher
befestigt sind.
• Legen Sie das Gerät und Zubehör nicht in der Nähe oder im Aktionsbereich eines Airbags ab. Bei unsachgemäß
eingebauten Mobilgeräten können durch sich schnell aufblasende Airbags schwere Verletzungen herbeigeführt werden.
Mobilgeräte dürfen nur von ausgebildetem Fachpersonal gewartet und repariert werden.
Kundendienst durch nicht entsprechend ausgebildetes Personal kann das Gerät beschädigen und zum Erlöschen der
Herstellergarantie führen.
Behandeln Sie SIM-Karten mit Sorgfalt.
• Entfernen Sie niemals eine Speicherkarte aus dem Gerät, während Daten auf der Karte gelesen oder gespeichert
werden. Anderenfalls kann es zu Datenverlusten und/oder Schäden an der Karte oder am Gerät kommen.
• Schützen Sie die Karten vor starken Erschütterungen, statischer Entladung und elektrischer Störung durch andere
Geräte.
• Berühren Sie die goldfarbenen Kontakte von Speicherkarten nicht mit Ihren Fingern oder mit metallischen
Gegenständen. Wenn die Kontakte verschmutzt sind, reinigen Sie sie mit einem weichen Tuch.
Sichern Sie alle wichtigen Daten.
Samsung übernimmt keinerlei Haftung oder Verantwortung für Datenverluste.Sicherheitshinweise 27
Verbreiten Sie keine urheberrechtlich geschützten Materialien
Verbreiten Sie keine urheberrechtlich geschützten Materialien, die Sie ohne Erlaubnis der Eigentümer des Inhalts für
andere aufgenommen haben. Dies stellt einen Verstoß gegen die Urheberrechtsgesetze dar. Der Hersteller haftet nicht
für rechtliche Probleme, die durch die illegale Nutzung urheberrechtlich geschützter Materialien durch den Benutzer
verursacht werden.
Informationen zur SAR-Zertifizierung (Spezifische Absorptionsrate)
Ihr Gerät entspricht den Normen der Europäischen Union (EU), die Grenzwerte für die Belastung durch elektromagnetische
Funkwellen (HF) von Radio- und Telekommunikationsausrüstung vorgeben. Diese Standards verbieten den Verkauf
von Mobilgeräten, die eine maximale Belastungsrate (auch Specific Absorption Rate oder SAR genannt) von 2,0 W/kg
überschreiten.
Bei Tests wurde eine maximale SAR von 0,939 W/kg für dieses Modell ermittelt. Bei normalem Gebrauch ist der tatsächliche
SAR-Wert wahrscheinlich erheblich niedriger, da das Gerät so ausgelegt ist, dass nur die für die Übertragung zur nächsten
Basisstation erforderliche HF-Energie abgestrahlt wird. Durch das automatische Senden bei möglichst niedrigen SARWerten wird Ihre Gesamtbelastung durch HF-Energie verringert.
Die Konformitätserklärung auf der Rückseite dieses Handbuchs bestätigt die Konformität dieses Geräts mit der
europäischen Richtlinie über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationseinrichtungen (R&TTE – Radio & Terminal
Telecommunications Equipment).
Wenn Sie dieses Produkt am Körper tragen oder benutzen, müssen Sie damit gemäß der RF
Strahlenschutzrichtlinie stets einen Mindestabstand von 5 mm zu Ihrem Körper einhalten.28 Sicherheitshinweise
Korrekte Entsorgung von Altgeräten
(Elektroschrott)
(In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten
Sammelsystem)
Die Kennzeichnung auf dem Produkt, Zubehörteilen bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation gibt an, dass
das Produkt und Zubehörteile (z.B. Ladegerät, Kopfhörer, USB-Kabel) nach ihrer Lebensdauer nicht zusammen
mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden dürfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät und Zubehörteile bitte
getrennt von anderen Abfällen, um der Umwelt bzw. der menschlichen Gesundheit nicht durch unkontrollierte
Müllbeseitigung zu schaden.
Helfen Sie mit, das Altgerät und Zubehörteile fachgerecht zu entsorgen, um die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von
stofflichen Ressourcen zu fördern.
Private Nutzer wenden sich an den Händler, bei dem das Produkt gekauft wurde, oder kontaktieren die zuständigen
Behörden, um in Erfahrung zu bringen, wo Sie das Altgerät bzw. Zubehörteile für eine umweltfreundliche Entsorgung
abgeben können.
Gewerbliche Nutzer wenden sich an ihren Lieferanten und gehen nach den Bedingungen des Verkaufsvertrags vor. Dieses
Produkt und elektronische Zubehörteile dürfen nicht zusammen mit anderem Gewerbemüll entsorgt werden.Sicherheitshinweise 29
Korrekte Entsorgung des Akkus dieses Produkts
(In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten
Altbatterie-Rücknahmesystem)
Die Kennzeichnung auf dem Akku bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation oder Verpackung gibt an, dass
der Akku zu diesem Produkt nach seiner Lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll
entsorgt werden darf.
Wenn der Akku mit den chemischen Symbolen Hg, Cd oder Pb gekennzeichnet ist, liegt der Quecksilber-, Cadmium-
oder Blei-Gehalt der Akku über den in der EG-Richtlinie 2006/66 festgelegten Referenzwerten. Wenn Akkus nicht
ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden, können sie der menschlichen Gesundheit bzw. der Umwelt schaden.
Bitte helfen Sie, die natürlichen Ressourcen zu schützen und die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen
Ressourcen zu fördern, indem Sie die Akkus von anderen Abfällen getrennt über Ihr örtliches kostenloses AltbatterieRücknahmesystem entsorgen.
Der Akku in diesem Produkt ist nicht austauschbar. Für weitere Informationen bezüglich eines Akkuaustauschs
kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Netzanbieter oder Verkäufer.30 Sicherheitshinweise
Haftungsausschlussklausel
Bestimmte Inhalte und Dienste, die durch dieses Gerät zugänglich sind, sind Eigentum von Dritten und durch
Urheberrechts-, Patent-, Markenrechts- und/oder andere Gesetze zum Schutz von geistigem Eigentum geschützt.
Derartige Inhalte und Dienste werden ausschließlich für Ihre persönliche, nichtkommerzielle Nutzung bereitgestellt.
Sie dürfen keine Inhalte oder Dienste in einer Weise nutzen, die nicht durch den Eigentümer der Inhalte oder den
Dienstanbieter genehmigt wurde. Ohne das Vorstehende einzuschränken, dürfen Sie keine Inhalte oder Dienste, die
durch dieses Gerät angezeigt werden, modifizieren, kopieren, erneut veröffentlichen, hochladen, zur Verfügung stellen,
übertragen, übersetzen, verkaufen, damit abgeleitete Werke schaffen oder in irgendeiner Weise oder auf irgendeinem
Medium verteilen, außer wenn Sie dazu ausdrücklich durch den jeweiligen Eigentümer der Inhalte oder Dienstanbieter
autorisiert wurden.
“DIE INHALTE UND DIENSTE DRITTER WERDEN OHNE MÄNGELGEWÄHR BEREITGESTELLT. SAMSUNG ÜBERNIMMT KEINE
HAFTUNG FÜR DERART BEREITGESTELLTE INHALTE ODER DIENSTE, WEDER AUSDRÜCKLICH NOCH IMPLIZIT, FÜR KEINE
ZWECKE. SAMSUNG WEIST AUSDRÜCKLICH JEGLICHE IMPLIZITE GARANTIEN ZURÜCK, EINSCHLIESSLICH, ABER NICHT
BESCHRÄNKT AUF, GARANTIEN DER MARKTFÄHIGKEIT ODER EIGNUNG FÜR EINEN BESTIMMTEN ZWECK. SAMSUNG
ÜBERNIMMT KEINE GARANTIE FÜR DIE FEHLERFREIHEIT, GÜLTIGKEIT, RECHTZEITIGKEIT, RECHTMÄSSIGKEIT ODER
VOLLSTÄNDIGKEIT VON IRGENDWELCHEN INHALTEN ODER DIENSTEN, DIE DURCH DIESES GERÄT VERFÜGBAR GEMACHT
WERDEN, UND UNTER KEINEN UMSTÄNDEN, EINSCHLIESSLICH VON FAHRLÄSSIGKEIT, IST SAMSUNG HAFTBAR, WEDER
AUS VERTRAG NOCH AUS UNERLAUBTER HANDLUNG, FÜR IRGENDWELCHE DIREKTE, INDIREKTE, NEBEN-, BESONDERE
ODER FOLGESCHÄDEN, ANWALTSGEBÜHREN, KOSTEN ODER IRGENDWELCHE ANDERE SCHÄDEN, DIE AUS ODER IN
VERBINDUNG MIT IRGENDWELCHEN DARIN ENTHALTENEN INFORMATIONEN ODER ALS EIN ERGEBNIS DER VERWENDUNG
IRGENDWELCHER INHALTE ODER DIENSTE DURCH SIE ODER DRITTE ENTSTEHEN, SELBST WENN SAMSUNG AUF DIE
MÖGLICHKEIT DERARTIGER SCHÄDEN HINGEWIESEN WURDE”. Sicherheitshinweise 31
Dienste Dritter können jederzeit beendet oder unterbrochen werden, und Samsung gibt keine Erklärung ab und
übernimmt keine Garantie, dass irgendwelche Inhalte oder Dienste für irgendeine Zeitdauer verfügbar bleiben werden.
Inhalte und Dienste werden von Dritten mit der Hilfe von Netzen und Übertragungseinrichtungen übertragen, über die
Samsung keine Kontrolle hat. Ohne die Allgemeingültigkeit dieser Haftungsausschlussklausel einzuschränken, weist
Samsung ausdrücklich jegliche Verantwortung oder Haftung für irgendwelche Unterbrechungen oder Aussetzungen von
irgendwelchen Inhalten oder Diensten, die durch dieses Gerät verfügbar gemacht werden, zurück.
Samsung ist weder verantwortlich noch haftbar für Kundendienste, die zu den Inhalten und Diensten in Beziehung stehen.
Jegliche Fragen oder Anforderungen nach Diensten, die zu den Inhalten oder Diensten in Beziehung stehen, sind direkt an
die jeweiligen Inhalts- und Dienstanbieter zu richten.Das in Abschnitt 10 genannte Verfahren für die Feststellung
der Konformität, das im Anhang [IV] der Richtlinie 1999/5/
EC beschrieben wird, wurde unter Beteiligung der benannten
Stelle(n) durchgeführt:
BABT, Forsyth House,
Churchfield Road,
Walton-on-Thames,
Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Kennzeichen: 0168
Die technische Dokumentation wird unter folgender Anschrift
geführt:
Samsung Electronics QA Lab.
und kann auf Anfrage eingesehen werden.
(Vertreter in der EU)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager
(Ort und Datum) (Name und Unterschrift der/des Bevollmächtigten)
* Dies ist nicht die Adresse des Samsung-Kundendienstzentrums. Die
Adresse oder Telefonnummer des Samsung-Kundendienstzentrums
finden Sie auf der Garantiekarte oder erfahren Sie von dem
Geschäft, in dem Sie das Produkt erworben haben.
Konformitätserklärung
(Funkanlagen
und elekommunikationsendeinrichtungen)
Wir, Samsung Electronics
erklären unter unserer alleinigen Verantwortung, dass dem
Produkt
GSM-WCDMA-Wi-Fi-Mobilgerät : GT-P7100
die Konformität mit den folgenden Normen und/oder anderen
normgebenden Dokumenten bescheinigt wird:
Sicherheit EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009
SAR EN 50371 : 2002
EN 62311 : 2008
IEC 62209-2 : 2010
Empfehlung des Rates 1999/519/EC
EMV EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008)
EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009)
EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007)
EN 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007
EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003
Funk EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03)
EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03)
EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12)
Hiermit erklären wir, dass alle wesentlichen Funktestreihen
ausgeführt wurden und dass das oben genannte Produkt allen
wesentlichen Anforderungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EC entspricht.Printed in Korea
GH68-33615A
www.samsung.com German. 03/2011. Rev. 1.0
Einige der Inhalte in diesem Handbuch können sich von Ihrem Gerät unterscheiden, dies ist
abhängig von der Software oder dem Dienstanbieter.
P7100
Guide de prise en
main rapide2 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi
Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi
Nous vous remercions de la confiance que vous nous accordez en achetant ce SmartPad
Samsung. Ce SmartPad vous permettra d’accéder à des outils de communication et de
divertissement exceptionnels, basés sur les critères de qualité et sur la technologie innovante
de Samsung.
Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et
caractéristiques de votre SmartPad.
A lire avant toute utilisation
• Veuillez lire attentivement ce guide avant d’utiliser votre SmartPad, afin de l’utiliser en toute
sécurité.
• Les instructions et descriptions mentionnées dans ce guide sont basées sur les paramètres par
défaut de votre SmartPad.
• Les illustrations utilisées dans ce guide peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit.
• Le contenu de ce guide peut différer en fonction du produit et de la version logicielle fournie par
votre opérateur et peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus
récente de ce mode d’emploi, rendez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com.
• Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier en fonction de la
version logicielle ou de l’opérateur.
• La mise en forme et la distribution de ce guide sont basées sur les systèmes d’exploitation
Android et peuvent varier en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’utilisateur.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 3
• Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre région ou des
caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance
relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers.
• Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités
découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur.
• Les sons, fonds d’écran et images fournies dans ce SmartPad sont sous licence pour une
utilisation limitée entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires respectifs. Extraire et utiliser ces supports
à des fins commerciales ou autres constitue une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits
d’auteur. Samsung n’est pas responsable des infractions sur les droits d’auteur commises par
l’utilisateur.
• Veuillez conserver ce guide pour pouvoir l’utiliser ultérieurement.
Droits d’auteur
Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics
Ce guide est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur.
Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque
moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement
ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce
document sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics.4 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi
Marques déposées
• SAMSUNG, et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées et enregistrées de Samsung
Electronics.
• Google, le logo Google, Android et le logo Android sont des marques de Google Inc.
• Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ou de ses filiales. Les autres marques
sont déposées et demeurent la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs.
• Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Toutes les autres marques déposées et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs
détenteurs respectifs.Sommaire 5
Sommaire
Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires ..................................................... 6
Contenu du coffret ............................................................................................................. 7
Présentation du SmartPad ............................................................................................... 8
Insérer de la carte SIM .................................................................................................... 11
Mettre la batterie en charge ......................................................................................... 12
Allumer le SmartPad ....................................................................................................... 15
Consignes de sécurité ......................................................................... 176 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires
Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires
Votre SmartPad GALAXY Tab 10.1v™ est fourni avec plusieurs accessoires, notamment un
casque, un câble de connexion PC et un chargeur. Ce guide vous permettra de découvrir les
différents composants de votre SmartPad, la façon dont vous pourrez installer et recharger
la batterie et allumer et éteindre votre SmartPad. Pour obtenir des informations détaillées,
consultez le site www.samsung.com.
Contenu de cette section
Contenu du coffret - page 7
Présentation du SmartPad - page 8
Insérer de la carte SIM - page 11
Mettre la batterie en charge - page 12
Allumer le SmartPad - page 15Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 7
Contenu du coffret
Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents:
• SmartPad
• Adaptateur secteur USB
• Câble de connexion
• Kit piéton
• Guide de prise en main rapide
• Les éléments fournis avec votre SmartPad peuvent varier en fonction des logiciels et
accessoires disponibles dans votre zone géographique ou proposés par votre opérateur.
• Vous pouvez acquérir d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung.
• Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour votre SmartPad.
• Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, ne soient pas compatibles
avec votre SmartPad.8 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires
Présentation du SmartPad
Touche marche/arrêt
Prise audio de 3,5 mm
Haut-parleur
Capteur de luminosité
Écran tactile
Connecteur à fonctions
multiples
Objectif avant
Témoin lumineuxVotre SmartPad et ses accessoires 9
Touche de volume
Microphone
Flash de l’appareil photo
Antenne interne
Objectif photo arrière
Compartiment pour
carte SIM
Haut-parleur10 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires
Vous devez recharger la batterie avant d’utiliser le SmartPad pour la première fois.
(Reportez-vous à la section « Mettre la batterie en charge » à la page 12.)
Le site d’assistance de votre fournisseur d’accès Internet et le mode d’emploi (disponible sur
www.samsung.com) vous permettront de découvrir comment allumer votre SmartPad et vous
fourniront une description des autres fonctions de base de votre SmartPad.
Veillez à ce que les objectifs avant et arrière de l’appareil photo soient toujours propres en les
nettoyant avec un chiffon doux. Les tâches et les empreintes de doigt risquent de réduire la
qualité des photos. Le flash de l’appareil photo arrière se trouve à côté de l’objectif. La prise de
photos et l’enregistrement de vidéos sont décrits dans le Mode d’emploi.
› À propos de l’écran tactile
L’écran tactile de votre SmartPad facilite la sélection des éléments et des fonctions. Découvrez les
manipulations de base relatives à l’utilisation de l’écran tactile.
• N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus afin de ne pas rayer l’écran.
• Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges
électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
• Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut
provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
• Pour un fonctionnement optimal de l’écran tactile, retirez le film de protection avant d’utiliser
votre SmartPad.Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 11
• Votre écran tactile comporte une couche qui détecte les petites charges électriques émises par
le corps humain. Pour de meilleures performances, appuyez sur l’écran tactile avec le bout de
votre doigt. L’écran tactile ne réagira pas si vous utilisez des outils pointus, stylet ou stylo par
exemple.
Insérer de la carte SIM
Vous devez insérer une carte SIM avant d’utiliser le SamrtPad.
1 Ouvrez le cache du compartiment pour carte SIM situé sur le côté du SmartPad.
2 Insérez la carte SIM, puis fermez le cache du compartiment.12 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires
Mettre la batterie en charge
Votre SmartPad dispose d’une batterie interne non amovible. Avant de pouvoir utiliser votre
SmartPad, vous devez l’avoir rechargé complètement.
• Utilisez exclusivement un chargeur homologué par Samsung. L’utilisation d’un chargeur
non homologué peut provoquer l’explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre
SmartPad.
• Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, le SmartPad émet un signal sonore
et affiche un message d’avertissement. L’icône de batterie est alors vide et clignote.
Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, le SmartPad s’éteint
automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre le SmartPad en marche.Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 13
› Recharger le SmartPad
1 Branchez la fiche USB du câble de connexion sur l’adaptateur secteur USB, puis branchez
l’autre fiche sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples du SmartPad.
Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager le SmartPad. Les
dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.14 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires
2 Branchez l’adaptateur secteur USB sur une prise de courant.
• Vous pouvez utiliser le SmartPad lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Dans ce cas, il est
possible que le rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de temps.
• Lorsque le SmartPad est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne
fonctionne pas en raison d’une alimentation électrique instable. Dans ce cas, débranchez
l’adaptateur secteur USB de la prise de courant ou débranchez le câble de connexion du
SmartPad.
• Il est possible que le SmartPad chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de rechargement. Ce
phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du SmartPad.
• Si votre SmartPad ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son
chargeur dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung.
3 Lorsque le SmartPad est complètement chargé, débranchez-le du chargeur.Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires 15
Allumer le SmartPad
La touche marche/arrêt permet d’allumer et d’éteindre le SmartPad.
Touche marche/
arrêt
› Allumer l’appareil
Si vous allumez votre SmartPad pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran
pour le configurer.16 Votre SmartPad et ses accessoires
› Débloquer une carte SIM
Si vous saisissez un code PIN de déverrouillage de la carte SIM incorrect à trois reprises, la carte
SIM est bloquée et vous ne pouvez alors pas utiliser votre SmartPad. Il vous faut alors obtenir une
clé de déverrouillage du code PIN (PUK) auprès de votre opérateur pour débloquer la carte SIM et
définir un nouveau code PIN.
› Eteindre le SmartPad
Maintenez la touche marche/arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur OK.
Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de l’écran tactile et des menus, reportez-vous au Mode
d’emploi.Consignes de sécurité 17
Consignes de sécurité
Afin d’éviter de blesser votre entourage ou vous-même, ou bien d’endommager votre SmartPad, veuillez lire toutes les
informations suivantes avant d’utiliser votre SmartPad.
Avertissement : Évitez les chocs électriques, le feu et les explosions
N’utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d’alimentation endommagé(e)s ou de prises électriques mal
fixées
Ne touchez pas le cordon d’alimentation lorsque vos mains sont mouillées et ne tirez pas sur le
chargeur pour le débrancher
Ne tordez pas ou n’endommagez pas le cordon d’alimentation
N’utilisez et ne touchez pas votre SmartPad avec les mains mouillées lorsque celui-ci est en cours
de chargement
Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou la batterie
Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou la batterie et ne les exposez pas aux chocs
Ne rechargez pas la batterie en utilisant un chargeur non homologué par Samsung
N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad pendant un orage
Le SmartPad peut mal fonctionner et les risques de choc électrique peuvent augmenter.18 Consignes de sécurité
Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) lorsque celle-ci coule ou est endommagée
Contactez le centre de traitement agréé le plus proche de chez vous afin de vous séparer de vos batteries Li-Ion en toute
sécurité.
Manipulez et jetez les batteries et les chargeurs avec précaution
• N’utilisez que les batteries et les chargeurs homologués par Samsung et spécialement conçus pour votre SmartPad.
L’utilisation de batteries et de chargeurs incompatibles peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager votre
SmartPad.
• Ne jetez jamais une batterie ou un SmartPad au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant
l’élimination des batteries et des appareils mobiles usagé(e)s.
• Ne posez jamais une batterie ou un SmartPad à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à
micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou des radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, la batterie peut exploser.
• N’écrasez ou ne perforez jamais la batterie. Évitez d’exposer la batterie à une pression externe élevée qui risquerait
d’entraîner un court-circuit interne et une surchauffe.
Protégez le SmartPad, la batterie et le chargeur contre toute détérioration
• Évitez d’exposer votre SmartPad et la batterie à des températures très basses ou très élevées.
• Des températures extrêmes peuvent déformer le SmartPad et réduire la capacité de chargement, ainsi que sa durée de
vie et celle de la batterie.
• Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les
bornes + et – de la batterie et de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente.
• N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e).Consignes de sécurité 19
Attention : Respectez tous les avertissements de sécurité et les
réglementations en vigueur lorsque vous utilisez votre SmartPad dans un
endroit où son utilisation est réglementée
Éteignez votre SmartPad lorsque son utilisation est interdite
Respectez toutes les réglementations interdisant l’utilisation des appareils mobiles dans certaines zones spécifiques.
N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad à proximité d’autres appareils électroniques
La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de radiofréquence radiofréquence. Il est possible que votre
SmartPad cause des interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques.
N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad à proximité d’un stimulateur cardiaque
• Maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm entre votre SmartPad et le stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute
interférence.
• Il est fortement conseillé, lors d’un appel, de positionner le SmartPad sur le côté opposé à l’implant.
• Si vous pensez que votre SmartPad vient perturber le fonctionnement d’un stimulateur cardiaque ou d’un appareil
médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur ou de l’appareil médical.
N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad dans un hôpital ou à proximité d’équipements médicaux en raison
des interférences qu’il pourrait produire
Si vous utilisez vous-même des équipements médicaux, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’éviter toute interférence de
radiofréquence.20 Consignes de sécurité
Si vous utilisez un appareil auditif, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’obtenir plus d’informations
sur les interférences
Il est possible que certains appareils auditifs subissent des interférences causées par la radiofréquence de votre SmartPad.
Afin de vous assurer d’une utilisation de votre appareil auditif en toute sécurité, contactez votre fabriquant.
Éteignez le SmartPad dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion
• Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique d’utilisation dans un environnement explosif.
• N’utilisez pas votre SmartPad dans une station-service, dans les zones potentiellement explosives ou à proximité de
produits combustibles ou chimiques.
• Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle
que le SmartPad, ses composants ou ses accessoires.
Éteignez votre SmartPad lorsque vous voyagez en avion
Les SmartPads peuvent engendrer des interférences avec les équipements aéronautiques. Conformez-vous aux
réglementations en vigueur et éteignez votre SmartPad.
Il est possible que les appareils électroniques se trouvant à bord d’un véhicule motorisé subissent
des dysfonctionnements provoqués par la radiofréquence de votre propre SmartPadConsignes de sécurité 21
Pour entretenir et bien utiliser votre SmartPad
Conservez votre SmartPad au sec
• L’humidité et tous types de liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les circuits éléctroniques de votre SmartPad.
• En cas de contact avec un liquide, retirez la batterie sans allumer votre SmartPad. Séchez votre SmartPad avec un chiffon
et confiez-le à un service de réparation.
• Les liquides modifient la couleur de l’étiquette indiquant que l’intérieur du SmartPad a été endommagé. L’eau peut
endommager votre SmartPad et entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant.
N’utilisez pas ou ne rangez pas votre SmartPad dans des endroits poussiéreux ou sales
La poussière peut causer des dysfonctionnements de votre SmartPad.
Ne posez pas votre SmartPad sur des surfaces inclinées
Si votre SmartPad tombe, il peut être endommagé.
Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad dans des endroits chauds ou froids. Utilisez votre SmartPad à
des températures comprises entre -20° C et 45° C
• Votre SmartPad peut exploser si vous le laissez dans un véhicule fermé, la température intérieure pouvant monter
jusqu’à 80°C.
• N’exposez pas votre SmartPad à la lumière directe du soleil de manière prolongée (comme par exemple sur le tableau de
bord d’une voiture).
• Conservez la batterie à des températures allant de -20°C à 45°C.22 Consignes de sécurité
Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad à proximité d’objets métalliques, comme par exemple des
pièces, des clés ou des colliers
• Votre SmartPad pourrait être déformé ou subir des dysfonctionnements.
• Les bornes de la batterie peuvent causer des incendies si elles sont mises en contact avec des objets métalliques.
Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad à proximité de champs magnétiques
• Lorsqu’il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre SmartPad peut subir des dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut
se décharger.
• Les cartes à piste, comme par exemple les cartes de crédit, les cartes de téléphone et les cartes d’embarquement
peuvent être endommagées par des champs magnétiques.
• N’utilisez pas de housses ou d’accessoires équipés de fermetures aimantées et évitez toute exposition prolongée de
votre SmartPad à des champs magnétiques.
Ne conservez pas votre SmartPad à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à microondes, d’équipements de cuisine chauffants ou de conteneurs à haute pression
• La batterie peut couler.
• Votre SmartPad peut surchauffer et causer un incendie.
Ne laissez pas tomber votre SmartPad et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs
• L’écran de votre SmartPad pourrait être endommagé.
• Votre SmartPad peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir des dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou
le déformez.
N’utilisez pas le flash de l’appareil photo trop près des yeux de personnes ou d’animaux
Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une perte temporaire de la vue.Consignes de sécurité 23
Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur
• Ne laissez pas la batterie en charge pendant plus d’une semaine, car une surcharge risque de réduire sa durée de vie.
• Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit
être rechargée avant utilisation.
• Lorsque le chargeur n’est pas utilisé, ne le laissez pas branché à une prise de courant.
• Utilisez la batterie pour votre SmartPad uniquement.
N’utilisez que des batteries, chargeurs, accessoires et fournitures homologué(e)s par Samsung
• Utiliser des batteries ou des chargeurs génériques peut réduire la durée de vie de votre SmartPad ou provoquer des
dysfonctionnements.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l’utilisateur si celui-ci utilise des accessoires ou des éléments
non homologués par Samsung.
Ne mordez et ne portez pas à votre bouche le SmartPad ou la batterie
• Mordre ou porter le SmartPad ou la batterie à votre bouche pourrait endommager votre SmartPad ou provoquer une
explosion.
• Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent le SmartPad de façon appropriée s’ils doivent l’utiliser.
Lors de l’utilisation du SmartPad:
• Parlez directement dans le microphone.
• Évitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de votre SmartPad. Le fait de toucher l’antenne peut entraîner la transmission
par l’appareil d’un nombre de fréquences radio plus important que nécessaire.
• Tenez le SmartPad de façon décontractée, appuyez légèrement sur les touches, utilisez des fonctions spéciales afin de
réduire le nombre de touches sur lesquelles vous devez appuyer (telle que la fonction de saisie prédictive) et prenez des
pauses fréquentes.24 Consignes de sécurité
Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre SmartPad en marchant ou en bougeant
Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d’éviter de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes.
Ne placez pas votre SmartPad dans vos poches arrières ou à votre ceinture
Vous pouvez être blessé ou endommager votre SmartPad si vous tombez.
Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vous-même votre SmartPad
• Toute modification ou tout changement effectué(e) sur votre SmartPad peut entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du
fabricant. Pour tout besoin de service, confiez votre SmartPad à un service après-vente Samsung.
• Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une explosion ou un incendie.
Ne peignez jamais votre SmartPad et n’y apposez jamais d’autocollants
La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles du SmartPad et perturber son fonctionnement.
Si vous êtes allergique à la peinture ou aux pièces métalliques du SmartPad, vous pouvez souffrir de démangeaisons,
d’eczéma ou de boursouflures de la peau. Si ces symptômes apparaissent, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser le SmartPad et
consultez un médecin.
Lors du nettoyage de votre SmartPad :
• Essuyez votre SmartPad ou le chargeur avec un chiffon ou une gomme.
• N’utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents.
N’utilisez pas le SmartPad si son écran est fissuré ou cassé
Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage. Confiez votre SmartPad à un service après-vente
Samsung afin de le faire réparer.Consignes de sécurité 25
Utilisez votre SmartPad uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions auxquelles il est destiné
Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre SmartPad dans un lieu public
Ne laissez pas les enfants utiliser votre SmartPad
Votre SmartPad n’est pas un jouet. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec, car ils pourraient se blesser ou blesser d’autres
personnes et endommager le SmartPad.
Installez le SmartPad et ses accessoires avec précaution
• Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre SmartPad et de ses accessoires dans votre véhicule.
• Évitez de placer votre SmartPad ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone d’ouverture des airbags. Si l’équipement
mobile n’est pas installé correctement, le déclenchement de l’airbag risque de provoquer des blessures graves.
Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé
Le recours aux services d’un technicien non agréé risque d’entraîner des dégâts sur le SmartPad et d’annuler la garantie du
fabricant.26 Consignes de sécurité
Manipuler les cartes SIM avec soin
• Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque le SmartPad y enregistre ou y lit des informations, car vous risqueriez de perdre des
données et/ou d’endommager la carte ou le SmartPad lui-même.
• Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les interférences émises par d’autres
appareils.
• Ne touchez pas les contacts dorés de la carte avec vos doigts ou avec des objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyezla avec un chiffon doux.
Veillez à sauvegarder les données importantes
Samsung ne sera en aucun cas tenu responsable en cas de perte de données.
Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur
Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur que vous avez enregistrés sans la permission des
détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire, vous seriez en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le
fabricant n’est en aucun cas responsable de l’utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par les droits d’auteur.Consignes de sécurité 27
Informations sur la certification DAS
Votre SmartPad a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences (RF) émises recommandées
par le Conseil de l’Union européenne. Ces normes empêchent la vente d’appareils mobiles qui dépassent le niveau
d’exposition maximal (également connu sous le nom de DAS ou Débit d’absorption spécifique) de 2 watts par kilogramme.
Lors des tests, la valeur DAS maximum enregistrée pour ce modèle était de 0,939 W/kg. En condition normale d’utilisation,
la valeur DAS réelle sera généralement beaucoup plus faible, car le SmartPad n’émet que l’énergie RF nécessaire à la
transmission du signal vers la station de base la plus proche. Le SmartPad minimise ainsi votre exposition globale à
l’énergie RF en émettant automatiquement à des niveaux plus faibles dès que cela est possible.
Par ailleurs, il est également recommandé d’utiliser autant que possible le kit piéton. Cependant, on veillera dans ce cas à
éloigner le SmartPad du ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des enfants et des adolescents.
Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des appareils mobiles exige de prendre de
quelconques précautions. Cependant, si certains s’inquiètent des risques potentiels liés à une durée d’utilisation excessive
du SmartPad, nous leur conseillons d’utiliser le kit piéton afin de tenir le SmartPad éloigné de la tête et du corps.
La Déclaration de conformité figurant au dos de ce mode d’emploi prouve que votre SmartPad est conforme à la
directive européenne relative aux équipements terminaux de télécommunications et aux équipements radio. Pour plus
d’informations sur le DAS et les normes européennes correspondantes, veuillez consulter le site Web de Samsung mobile.
Lorsque vous transportez le produit ou que vous le portez sur vous, respectez une distance de 5 mm entre votre
corps et le produit, conformement aux directives en matiere d’exposition RF.28 Consignes de sécurité
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit
(Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires
électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets
ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé
publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le
recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable.
Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités
locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage.
Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de
vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux.Consignes de sécurité 29
Élimination de la batterie de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de
collecte sélective sont mis en place)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être
éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg,
Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux
niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si la batterie n’est pas correctement éliminée, ces substances
peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement.
Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer la batterie des autres
types de déchets et à la recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et batteries.
La batterie rechargeable integree a ce produit ne peut pas etre remplacee par l’utilisateur. Pour savoir comment la
remplacer, veuillez contacter votre fournisseur de services.
Limitation de responsabilité
Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de ce SmartPad appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers
et sont protégés par les lois sur les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle.
Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre usage personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale.
Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée par le propriétaire des
contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire
de contenus ou du fournisseur de services concerné, il vous est interdit de modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer,
de diffuser, de transmettre, de traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une quelconque manière et sur quelque
support que ce soit, des contenus ou des services affichés par l’intermédiaire de ce SmartPad, ou d’en créer des dérivés.
LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS “ EN L’ÉTAT “. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE,
SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS LES CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT OU IMPLICITEMENT, 30 Consignes de sécurité
À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE
CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG
NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L’ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU L’EXHAUSTIVITÉ DES CONTENUS OU DES
SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L’INTERMÉDIAIRE DE CET APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y
COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, DES
DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D’AVOCAT, DES FRAIS
OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L’UTILISATION DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU
PAR UN TIERS (OU DE TOUTE INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE), MÊME SI SAMSUNG A ÉTÉ
INFORMÉ DE L’ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. DANS LA MESURE OÙ CERTAINS PAYS N’AUTORISENT PAS L’EXCLUSION
DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES
EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES.
Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment, et Samsung ne garantit pas qu’un contenu ou un
service restera disponible pendant une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis par des tiers au moyen
de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission qui échappent au contrôle de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère
général du présent avis, Samsung décline expressément toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension de
tout contenu ou service fourni par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil.
Samsung n’est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux services. Toute question ou demande de service
portant sur les contenus ou les services doit être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et de services
concernésLa procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans
l’article 10, puis reprise à l’alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a
été conduite sous contrôle de l’organisme suivant :
BABT, Forsyth House,
Churchfield Road,
Walton-on-Thames,
Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Numéro d’identification : 0168
Documentation technique détenue par :
Samsung Electronics QA Lab.
disponible sur simple demande.
(Représentant pour l’union européenne)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Directeur Général
(lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité)
* Il ne s’agit pas de l’adresse du service après-vente de Samsung. Pour
obtenir l’adresse ou le numéro de téléphone du service après-vente
de Samsung, reportez-vous au certificat de garantie ou contactez le
revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté ce produit.
Déclaration de conformité (R&TTE)
Nous, Samsung Electronics
déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que le produit
SmartPad : GT-P7100
en relation avec cette déclaration est en conformité avec les
normes suivantes et/ou d’autres documents normatifs.
SAFETY EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009
SAR EN 50371 : 2002
EN 62311 : 2008
IEC 62209-2 : 2010
Recommandation du Conseil 1999/519/EC
EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008)
EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009)
EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007)
N 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007
EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003
RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03)
EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03)
EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12)
Ce SmartPad a été testé et s’est avéré conforme aux normes
relatives à l’émission de fréquences radio. En outre, nous
déclarons que cet appareil répond à la directive 1999/5/EC.Printed in Korea
GH68-33612A
French. 04/2011. Rev. 1.0
Protégez votre acuité auditive
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut endommager votre audition.
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut
détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident.
• Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le
volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant d’entendre votre conversation ou la musique.
Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre appareil en
fonction de votre version logicielle.
www.samsung.com
GT-P7100
Snelstartgids2 Over deze snelstartgids
Over deze snelstartgids
Dank u voor de aanschaf van dit mobiele apparaat van Samsung. Dit toestel biedt hoogwaardige
mobiele communicatie en amusement op basis van de uitzonderlijke technologie en hoge
normen van Samsung.
Deze snelstartgids is bedoeld om u stap voor stap bekend te maken met de functies en
onderdelen van het toestel.
Lees dit eerst
• Lees alle veiligheidsinformatie en deze gids zorgvuldig door zodat u verzekerd bent van veilig
en correct gebruik voordat u het toestel in gebruik neemt.
• De beschrijvingen in deze gids zijn gebaseerd op de standaardinstellingen van het toestel.
• Afbeeldingen en screenshots die in deze gids worden gebruikt, kunnen er anders uitzien dan
het daadwerkelijke product.
• De inhoud van deze gids kan van product tot product verschillen of anders zijn dan de
software die door serviceproviders wordt geleverd en is onderhevig aan wijzigingen zonder
voorafgaande mededelingen. Ga naar www.samsung.com voor de meest recente versie van de
volledige gebruiksaanwijzing.Over deze snelstartgids 3
• Welke functies en extra diensten beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van het toestel, de software en
uw provider.
• De opmaak en presentatie van deze gids is gebaseerd op het besturingssysteem Android en kan
verschillen afhankelijk van het besturingssysteem van de gebruiker.
• Toepassingen en de bijbehorende functies kunnen per land, regio of hardwarespecificatie
verschillen. Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor prestatieproblemen die worden veroorzaakt door
toepassingen van derden.
• Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor prestatie- of compatibiliteitsproblemen die worden
veroorzaakt door het bewerken van de instellingen in het register door de gebruiker.
• Geluidsbronnen, achtergronden en afbeeldingen in dit apparaat zijn onder licentie verstrekt
met beperkte gebruiksrechten tussen Samsung en de betreffende eigenaren. Het overnemen
en gebruiken van deze materialen voor commerciële of andere doeleinden maakt inbreuk op
de copyright-wetgeving. Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor inbreuk op het copyright door
de gebruiker.
• Bewaar de gids, zodat u deze later kunt raadplegen.4 Over deze snelstartgids
Auteursrechten
Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics
Deze gebruiksaanwijzing is beschermd onder internationale auteursrechtwetten.
Geen enkel onderdeel van deze snelstartgids mag worden gereproduceerd, gedistribueerd,
vertaald of verzonden in welke vorm dan ook of op welke elektronische of mechanische wijze
dan ook, inclusief door deze te fotokopiëren, op te nemen of op te slaan in een systeem voor het
opslaan en ophalen van informatie, zonder voorafgaande schriftelijke toestemming van Samsung
Electronics.
Handelsmerken
• SAMSUNG en het SAMSUNG-logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van Samsung Electronics.
• Google, het gestileerde Google-logo, Android en het gestileerde Android-logo zijn
handelsmerken van Google Inc.
• Bluetooth® is wereldwijd een gedeponeerd handelsmerk van Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• Oracle en Java zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van Oracle en/of daarbij aangesloten
bedrijven. Andere namen kunnen handelsmerken zijn van de betreffende eigenaars.Over deze snelstartgids 5
• Wi-Fi®, het Wi-Fi CERTIFIED-logo en het Wi-Fi-logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken van de
Wi-Fi Alliance.
• Alle overige handelsmerken en auteursrechten zijn het eigendom van de betreffende eigenaars.6 Inhoudsopgave
Inhoudsopgave
Uw toestel en accessoires .................................................................... 7
Uitpakken ............................................................................................................................. 8
Kennismaken met het toestel .......................................................................................... 9
De SIM-kaart plaatsen .................................................................................................... 12
Het toestel opladen ......................................................................................................... 13
Het toestel in- en uitschakelen ..................................................................................... 16
Veiligheidsvoorschriften .................................................................... 18Uw toestel en accessoires 7
Uw toestel en accessoires
Uw GALAXY Tab 10.1v™-toestel wordt geleverd met een aantal accessoires, waaronder een
headset, pc-datakabel en adapter. In deze gids worden de onderdelen van het toestel beschreven,
hoe u de batterij kunt opladen, hoe u het toestel kunt in- en uitschakelen en andere nuttige
informatie. Raadpleeg www.samsung.com voor de volledige gebruiksaanwijzing.
In dit gedeelte
Uitpakken op pagina 8
Kennismaken met het toestel op pagina 9
De SIM-kaart plaatsen op pagina 12
Het toestel opladen op pagina 13
Het toestel in- en uitschakelen op pagina 168 Uw toestel en accessoires
Uitpakken
Controleer of de doos de volgende onderdelen bevat:
• Mobiel toestel
• USB-stroomadapter
• Datakabel voor pc
• Headset
• Snelstartgids
• Welke onderdelen bij het toestel worden geleverd is afhankelijk van de software en
de accessoires die in uw regio beschikbaar zijn of door uw serviceprovider worden
aangeboden.
• Bij de plaatselijke Samsung-dealer zijn extra accessoires verkrijgbaar.
• De meegeleverde accessoires werken het beste met uw toestel.
• Accessoires die niet door de fabrikant worden verstrekt, zijn mogelijk niet compatibel met
het toestel.Uw toestel en accessoires 9
Kennismaken met het toestel
Aan/uit-toet
3,5-mm
headsetaansluiting
Luidspreker
Lichtsensor
Aanraakscherm
Multifunctionele
aansluiting
Camera aan de voorzijde
LED10 Uw toestel en accessoires
Volumetoets
Microfoon
Cameraflitser
Interne antenne
Cameralens achterzijde
Sleuf voor SIM-kaart
LuidsprekerUw toestel en accessoires 11
U moet de batterij opladen voordat u het toestel voor de eerste keer gebruikt.
(Zie “Het toestel opladen” op pagina 13.)
Op de ondersteuningssite van uw provider en in de gebruiksaanwijzing (beschikbaar op
www.samsung.com) worden de basisfuncties van het toestel beschreven, waaronder het toestel
voor het eerst inschakelen.
Maak de cameralenzen aan de voor- en achterkant schoon met een pluisvrije doek; vlekken en
vingerafdrukken kunnen uw foto’s vervormen. De LED-flitser van de camera op de achterzijde
bevindt zich naast de lens. Het maken van foto’s en opnemen van video’s wordt beschreven in de
Gebruiksaanwijzing.
› Over het aanraakscherm
Met het aanraakscherm van het toestel kunt u eenvoudig items selecteren en functies uitvoeren.
• Gebruik geen scherpe hulpmiddelen, om krassen op het aanraakscherm te voorkomen.
• Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet met andere elektrische apparaten in aanraking komt. Door
elektrostatische ontladingen kan het aanraakscherm beschadigd raken.
• Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet met water in aanraking komt. Het aanraakscherm kan in
vochtige omstandigheden of door water beschadigd raken.12 Uw toestel en accessoires
• Om het aanraakscherm optimaal te kunnen gebruiken, dient u het beschermende folie te
verwijderen alvorens u het toestel gebruikt.
• Het aanraakscherm heeft een laag die kleine elektrische ladingen die door het menselijk
lichaam worden veroorzaakt, detecteert. Voor de beste prestaties tikt u met uw vingertop op het
aanraakscherm. Het aanraakscherm reageert niet als het door scherpe hulpmiddelen zoals een
stylus of een pen wordt aangeraakt.
De SIM-kaart plaatsen
U moet een SIM-kaart plaatsen voordat u het toestel kunt gebruiken.
1 Open het klepje van de SIM-kaartsleuf aan de zijkant van het toestel.
2 Plaats de SIM-kaart in het toestel en sluit het klepje van de SIM-kaartsleuf.Uw toestel en accessoires 13
Het toestel opladen
Het toestel heeft een ingebouwde batterij. Voordat u het toestel kunt gebruiken, moet u dit
volledig opladen.
• Gebruik alleen door Samsung goedgekeurde opladers. Bij gebruik van nietgoedgekeurde opladers bestaat het risico dat batterijen ontploffen of dat het toestel
schade oploopt.
• Als de batterij bijna leeg is, laat het toestel een waarschuwingstoon horen en wordt er een
bericht weergegeven. Ook is het batterijsymbool leeg en wordt het rood. Als de batterij
zo zwak is dat het toestel niet meer kan worden gebruikt, wordt het toestel automatisch
uitgeschakeld. Laad de batterij op als u het toestel weer wilt gebruiken.14 Uw toestel en accessoires
› Het toestel opladen
1 Sluit het ene uiteinde van de pc-datakabel op de USB-stroomadapter aan en het andere op de
multifunctionele aansluiting.
Als u de reisadapter verkeerd aansluit, kan het toestel ernstig beschadigd raken. Schade
veroorzaakt door verkeerd gebruik valt niet onder de garantie.Uw toestel en accessoires 15
2 Sluit de USB-stroomadapter op een stopcontact aan.
• U kunt het toestel tijdens het opladen van de batterij blijven gebruiken. Hierdoor kan het
echter wel langer duren voordat de batterij volledig is opgeladen.
• Het is mogelijk dat het aanraakscherm en de aanraaktoetsen tijdens het laden niet
werken wegens een onregelmatige stroomtoevoer. Als dit gebeurt, haalt u de stekker van
de USB-adapter uit het stopcontact of haalt u de pc-datakabel uit het toestel.
• Tijdens het opladen kan het toestel warm worden. Dit is normaal en heeft geen nadelige
invloed op de levensduur of prestaties van het toestel.
• Als uw toestel niet goed oplaadt, kunt u met het toestel en de oplader naar een Samsung
Servicecenter gaan.
3 Wanneer het toestel volledig is opgeladen, koppelt u het los van de adapter.16 Uw toestel en accessoires
Het toestel in- en uitschakelen
U kunt het toestel in- en uitschakelen met de aan/uit-toets.
Aan/uit-toets
› Het toestel inschakelen
Als u het toestel voor het eerst inschakelt, volgt u de instructies op het scherm om het toestel in
te stellen.Uw toestel en accessoires 17
› Een SIM-kaart deblokkeren
Als u drie keer een onjuiste ontgrendelings-PIN-code voor de SIM-kaart ingeeft, wordt de
SIM-kaart geblokkeerd en kunt u uw toestel niet meer gebruiken. U moet een PUK-code (PIN
Unblocking Key; deblokkeringscode voor de PIN-code) bij uw provider aanvragen om de SIMkaart te deblokkeren en een nieuwe PIN-code in te stellen.
› Het toestel uitschakelen
Houd de aan/uit-toets ingedrukt en selecteer vervolgens OK.
Raadpleeg de gebruiksaanwijzing voor meer informatie over het gebruik van het aanraakscherm
en de menu’s.18 Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Lees de volgende informatie zorgvuldig door voordat u het toestel gebruikt om uzelf en anderen tegen letsel te
beschermen of schade aan het toestel te voorkomen.
Waarschuwing: Voorkom elektrische schokken, brand of explosies
Gebruik geen beschadigde elektriciteitssnoeren of stekkers of losse elektrische aansluitingen
Raak het elektriciteitssnoer niet met natte handen aan en haal de oplader niet uit het stopcontact
door aan het snoer te trekken
Buig of beschadig het elektriciteitssnoer niet
Gebruik het toestel niet terwijl het wordt opgeladen en raak het toestel niet met natte handen aan
Veroorzaak geen kortsluiting in de oplader of de batterij
Laat de oplader of de batterij niet vallen en voorkom andere plotselinge schokken
Laad de batterij niet op met opladers die niet zijn goedgekeurd door de fabrikant
Maak geen gebruik van het toestel tijdens een onweersbui
Er kan een storing optreden in uw toestel en het risico van een elektrische schok wordt verhoogd.
Raak een beschadigde of lekkende Li-Ion-batterij (Lithium Ion) niet aan
Neem contact op met het dichtstbijzijnde geautoriseerde servicecenter om Li-Ion-batterijen veilig te laten vervangen.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 19
Behandel batterijen en oplader voorzichtig en voer deze volgens de voorschriften af
• Gebruik alleen batterijen en opladers die door Samsung zijn goedgekeurd en speciaal zijn bedoeld voor uw toestel.
Incompatibele batterijen en opladers kunnen ernstig letsel of schade aan uw toestel veroorzaken.
• Gooi batterijen of apparaten nooit in open vuur. Volg alle plaatselijke voorschriften bij het afvoeren van gebruikte
batterijen of apparaten.
• Leg batterijen of apparaten nooit in of op verwarmingsapparaten, zoals een magnetron, kachel of radiator. Batterijen
kunnen exploderen als ze te heet worden.
• U mag de batterij nooit indrukken of doorboren. Stel de batterij niet bloot aan hoge externe druk om interne kortsluiting
en oververhitting te voorkomen.
Bescherm uw toestel, batterijen en opladers tegen schade
• Vermijd blootstelling van uw toestel en batterijen aan erg hoge of erg lage temperaturen.
• Door extreme temperaturen kan het toestel vervormen en kunnen de oplaadcapaciteit en levensduur van het toestel en
de batterijen afnemen.
• Voorkom dat batterijen in aanraking komen met metalen voorwerpen. Dit kan een verbinding vormen tussen de plus-
en minpolen van uw batterijen en tijdelijke of permanente schade aan batterijen veroorzaken.
• Gebruik nooit een beschadigde oplader of batterij.
Let op: Volg alle veiligheidsvoorschriften en regelgeving bij het gebruik van
het toestel in een gesloten ruimte
Schakel het toestel uit als het gebruik ervan is verboden
Houd u aan alle voorschriften die het gebruik van mobiele apparaten in bepaalde omgevingen beperkt.20 Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Gebruik het toestel niet in de buurt van andere elektronische apparaten
De meeste elektronische apparaten gebruiken RF-signalen (radio frequency). Het toestel kan storing veroorzaken op
andere elektronische apparaten.
Gebruik het toestel niet in de buurt van een pacemaker
• Vermijd indien mogelijk het gebruik van het toestel binnen 15 cm van een pacemaker omdat het toestel storing kan
veroorzaken op de pacemaker.
• Zorg ervoor dat er minstens 15 cm afstand is tussen het toestel en de pacemaker als u het toestel toch moet gebruiken.
• Gebruik het toestel niet aan de zijde van het lichaam waar de pacemaker zich bevindt, om de kans op storing op de
pacemaker te minimaliseren.
Gebruik het toestel niet in een ziekenhuis of in de buurt van medische apparatuur die gevoelig is
voor RF-signalen (radio frequency)
Als u zelf medische apparatuur gebruikt, neemt u contact op met de fabrikant van de apparatuur om te controleren of
deze beschermd is tegen RF-signalen (radio frequency).
Als u een gehoorapparaat gebruikt, neemt u contact op met de fabrikant voor informatie over
storing via radiogolven
Sommige gehoorapparaten kunnen worden gestoord door de radiofrequentie van uw toestel. Neem contact op met de
fabrikant om te controleren of u uw gehoorapparaat veilig kunt gebruiken.
Schakel het toestel uit in omgevingen met explosiegevaar
• Houd u aan alle voorschriften, instructies en informatie in omgevingen met potentieel explosiegevaar.
• Gebruik het toestel niet bij tankstations of in de buurt van brandstoffen of chemicaliën, en in gebieden met
explosiegevaar.
• Bewaar geen ontvlambare vloeistoffen, gassen en explosief materiaal in dezelfde ruimte als het toestel of de onderdelen
of accessoires van het toestel.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 21
Zet uw telefoon uit wanneer u zich in een vliegtuig bevindt
Het gebruik van het toestel in vliegtuigen is niet toegestaan. Het toestel kan storing veroorzaken op de elektronische
navigatie-instrumenten van het vliegtuig.
Elektronische apparaten in motorvoertuigen kunnen worden gestoord door de radiofrequentie
van het toestel
Elektronische apparaten in uw auto kunnen worden gestoord door de radiofrequentie van het toestel. Neem voor meer
informatie contact op met de fabrikant.
Het mobiele toestel goed onderhouden en gebruiken
Houd het toestel droog
• Vocht en allerlei soorten vloeistoffen kunnen onderdelen van het toestel of elektronische circuits beschadigen.
• Als het toestel nat is geworden, moet u het uitschakelen. Droog het toestel met een doek en breng het naar een
servicecenter.
• Door de vloeistof verandert de kleur van het label dat de waterschade in het toestel aangeeft. Waterschade aan het
toestel kan de garantie van de fabrikant laten vervallen.
Gebruik of bewaar het toestel niet in stoffige of vuile omgevingen
Door stof kan het toestel beschadigd raken.
Leg het toestel niet op hellende vlakken
Als het toestel valt, kan het beschadigd raken.22 Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Bewaar het toestel niet in een te warme of te koude omgeving. Gebruik het toestel bij een
temperatuur tussen -20°C en 45°C
• Het toestel kan ontploffen als u het achterlaat in een gesloten voertuig, omdat de temperatuur daarin tot 80°C kan
oplopen.
• Stel het toestel niet gedurende lange tijd aan direct zonlicht bloot (bijvoorbeeld op het dashboard van een auto).
• Bewaar de batterij bij een temperatuur tussen -20°C en 45°C.
Bewaar het toestel niet samen met metalen objecten zoals munten, sleutels en halsbanden.
• Het toestel kan daardoor vervormd of beschadigd worden.
• Als de contactpunten van de batterij in contact komen met metalen objecten, kan brand ontstaan.
Bewaar het toestel niet in de buurt van magnetische velden
• Het toestel kan worden beschadigd of de batterij kan worden ontladen bij blootstelling aan magnetische velden.
• Kaarten met magnetische strips, waaronder credit cards, telefoonkaarten, bankpasjes en OV-kaarten kunnen
beschadigd raken door magnetische velden.
• Gebruik geen telefoonhoesjes of accessoires met magnetische sluitingen en stel het toestel niet gedurende langere tijd
bloot aan magnetische velden.
Bewaar het toestel niet dichtbij of in verwarmingsapparatuur, magnetrons, warme kooktoestellen
of hogedrukcompartimenten.
• De batterij kan lekken.
• Het toestel kan oververhit raken en brand veroorzaken.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 23
Laat het toestel niet vallen en stel het niet bloot aan plotselinge schokken.
• Het scherm van het toestel kan beschadigd raken.
• Als het toestel wordt verbogen of vervormd, kan het beschadigd raken of functioneren onderdelen wellicht niet meer
goed.
Gebruik de flitser niet vlakbij de ogen van mensen of dieren.
Het gebruik van de flitser dichtbij de ogen kan tijdelijke verblinding of schade aan de ogen veroorzaken.
Zorg voor een optimale levensduur van batterij en oplader
• Laat batterijen niet langer dan een week achtereen opladen, aangezien te veel opladen niet bevorderlijk is voor de
levensduur.
• Batterijen die niet worden gebruikt, ontladen zich na verloop van tijd en moeten voor gebruik opnieuw worden
opgeladen.
• Laat de stekker van de oplader niet in het stopcontact zitten als u de oplader niet gebruikt.
• Gebruik de batterijen alleen voor de doelen waarvoor ze zijn bedoeld.
Gebruik alleen door de fabrikant goedgekeurde batterijen, opladers, accessoires en onderdelen
• Het gebruik van merkloze batterijen en opladers kan de levensduur van het toestel beperken of storingen in het toestel
veroorzaken.
• Samsung kan niet verantwoordelijk worden gehouden voor de veiligheid van de gebruiker wanneer de gebruikte
accessoires of onderdelen niet door Samsung zijn goedgekeurd.
Bijt of zuig niet op het toestel of op de batterij
• Hierdoor kan het toestel beschadigd raken of exploderen.
• Als kinderen gebruik maken van het toestel, zorg er dan voor dat zij het op de juiste wijze gebruiken.24 Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Bij gebruik van het toestel:
• Spreek rechtstreeks in de microfoon.
• Vermijd aanraking met de interne antenne van het toestel. Als u de antenne aanraakt, kan dit ervoor zorgen dat het
toestel meer radiogolven uitzendt dan nodig is.
• Houd het apparaat ontspannen vast, druk licht op de toetsen, gebruik speciale functies waardoor u op minder toetsen
hoeft te drukken (zoals voorspellende tekst) en neem regelmatig pauze.
Bescherm uw gehoor
• Overmatige blootstelling aan harde geluiden kan leiden tot gehoorbeschadiging.
• Blootstelling aan harde geluiden onder het rijden, kan de aandacht afleiden en een ongeval veroorzaken.
• Zet het geluidsvolume altijd laag voordat u de oortelefoon in de geluidsbron steekt. Gebruik alleen het
minimale geluidsniveau dat nodig is om uw gesprek of muziek te kunnen horen.
Wees voorzichtig als u het toestel gebruikt tijdens het wandelen of wanneer u zich verplaatst
Wees u altijd bewust van uw omgeving om letsel voor uzelf of anderen te vermijden.
Draag het toestel niet in een achterzak of om uw middel.
Als u valt, kunt u gewond raken of het toestel beschadigen.
Haal uw toestel nooit uit elkaar, breng er geen wijzigingen in aan en probeer het niet te repareren
• Door wijzigingen of aanpassingen van het toestel kan de garantie van de fabrikant vervallen. Breng het toestel naar een
Samsung Servicecenter voor service.
• Haal de batterij niet uit elkaar en probeer deze niet te doorboren omdat hierdoor explosie- of brandgevaar ontstaat.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 25
Verf het toestel niet en plak geen stickers op het toestel
Verf en stickers kunnen ervoor zorgen dat de bewegende onderdelen vastlopen, waardoor het toestel niet correct kan
werken. Als u allergisch bent voor de verf of metalen onderdelen van het product, kunt u last krijgen van jeuk, eczeem of
zwelling van de huid. Als dit gebeurt, moet u het product niet langer gebruiken en moet u uw huisarts raadplegen.
Als u het toestel schoonmaakt, gaat u als volgt te werk:
• Veeg het toestel of de oplader met een doek of een gum schoon.
• Gebruik geen chemicaliën of schoonmaakmiddelen.
Gebruik het toestel niet als het scherm gebarsten of gebroken is.
Gebroken glas of plastic kan leiden tot letsel aan uw handen en gezicht. Breng het toestel naar een Samsung Servicecenter
voor reparatie.
Gebruik het toestel voor geen ander doel dan waarvoor het bedoeld is
Probeer andere mensen niet te storen wanneer u het toestel in het openbaar gebruikt
Laat het toestel niet gebruiken door kinderen
Uw toestel is geen speelgoed. Laat kinderen niet met het toestel spelen omdat ze zichzelf en anderen kunnen bezeren of
het toestel kunnen beschadigen.
Installeer mobiele apparatuur zorgvuldig
• Zorg ervoor dat mobiele apparaten of daaraan verwante apparatuur naar behoren zijn bevestigd in uw voertuig.
• Vermijd het plaatsen van apparatuur en accessoires op een plek waar de airbag zich kan ontvouwen. Verkeerd
geïnstalleerde draadloze apparaten kunnen ernstig letsel veroorzaken als airbags zich snel ontvouwen.26 Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Laat reparaties aan het toestel alleen uitvoeren door gekwalificeerd personeel
Als u het toestel laat repareren door niet-gekwalificeerd personeel kan het toestel beschadigd raken en is de garantie van
de fabrikant niet meer geldig.
Ga voorzichtig om met SIM-kaarten
• Verwijder een kaart niet als het toestel bezig is met de overdracht of het ophalen van gegevens. Dit kan leiden tot
gegevensverlies en/of schade aan de kaart of het toestel.
• Bescherm kaarten tegen sterke schokken, statische elektriciteit en elektrische storing van andere apparaten.
• Raak geen goudkleurige contactpunten of polen aan met uw vingers of met metalen voorwerpen. Veeg, indien nodig,
geheugenkaarten schoon met een zachte doek.
Maak een back-up van belangrijke gegevens
Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor gegevensverlies.
Verspreid auteursrechtelijk beschermd materiaal niet
Verspreid auteursrechtelijk beschermd materiaal dat u hebt opgenomen, niet aan anderen zonder de toestemming van
de eigenaars van de inhoud. Als u dit wel doet, kan dit in strijd zijn met de auteursrechtwetgeving. De fabrikant is niet
aansprakelijk voor juridische problemen die worden veroorzaakt door illegaal gebruik van auteursrechtelijk beschermd
materiaal door de gebruiker.
Informatie over het SAR-certificaat (Specific Absorption Rate)
Uw toestel voldoet aan de standaarden die in de EU zijn opgesteld voor blootstelling aan radiofrequentie-energie die
wordt afgegeven door radio- en telecommunicatie-apparatuur. Deze standaarden verbieden de verkoop van mobiele
apparaten die het maximumniveau voor blootstelling overschrijden, de zogenaamde SAR (Specific Absorption Rate), van
2,0 W/kg.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 27
Tijdens tests bleek dat de maximale SAR die is opgegeven voor dit model 0.939 W/kg. Bij normaal gebruik is de feitelijke
SAR waarschijnlijk veel lager, aangezien het toestel zo is ontworpen dat slechts de minimaal benodigde hoeveelheid
RF-energie wordt gebruikt voor het verzenden van een signaal naar het dichtstbijzijnde basisstation. Door waar mogelijk
automatisch lagere niveaus te gebruiken, beperkt het toestel blootstelling aan RF-energie nog verder.
De conformiteitsverklaring achter in deze gebruiksaanwijzing geeft aan dat de telefoon voldoet aan de richtlijn van de EU
betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindapparatuur.
Wanneer u het toestel meeneemt of het gebruikt terwijl u het op uw lichaam draagt, moet u het toestel op 5 mm
van uw lichaam houden om te voldoen aan de vereisten voor blootstelling aan RF-signalen.
Correcte verwijdering van dit product
(elektrische & elektronische afvalapparatuur)
(Van toepassing in de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen waar afval gescheiden wordt ingezameld)
Dit merkteken op het product, de accessoires of het informatiemateriaal duidt erop dat het product en zijn
elektronische accessoires (bv. lader, headset, USB-kabel) niet met ander huishoudelijk afval verwijderd mogen
worden aan het einde van hun gebruiksduur. Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of de menselijke gezondheid
door ongecontroleerde afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, moet u deze artikelen van andere soorten afval
scheiden en op een verantwoorde manier recyclen, zodat het duurzame hergebruik van materiaalbronnen
wordt bevorderd.
Huishoudelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met de winkel waar ze dit product hebben gekocht of met de
gemeente waar ze wonen om te vernemen waar en hoe ze deze artikelen milieuvriendelijk kunnen laten recyclen.
Zakelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met hun leverancier en de algemene voorwaarden van de
koopovereenkomst nalezen. Dit product en zijn elektronische accessoires mogen niet met ander bedrijfsafval voor
verwijdering worden gemengd.28 Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Correcte behandeling van een gebruikte batterij uit dit product
(Van toepassing op de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen met afzonderlijke inzamelingssystemen
voor accu’s en batterijen)
Dit merkteken op de batterij, gebruiksaanwijzing of verpakking geeft aan dat de batterij in dit product aan het
einde van de levensduur niet samen met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden weggegooid.
De chemische symbolen Hg, Cd of Pb geven aan dat het kwik-, cadmium- of loodgehalte in de batterij hoger is dan
de referentieniveaus in de Richtlijn 2006/66/EC. Indien de gebruikte batterij niet op de juiste wijze wordt behandeld,
kunnen deze stoffen schadelijk zijn voor de gezondheid van mensen of het milieu. Ter bescherming van de natuurlijke
hulpbronnen en ter bevordering van het hergebruik van materialen, verzoeken wij u afgedankte accu’s en batterijen
te scheiden van andere soorten afval en voor recycling aan te bieden bij het gratis inzamelingssysteem voor accu’s en
batterijen in uw omgeving.
De oplaadbare batterij in dit product kan niet door de gebruiker worden vervangen. Neem contact op met uw
serviceprovider voor informatie over vervanging.
Vrijwaring
Bepaald materiaal en bepaalde services die via dit apparaat beschikbaar zijn, zijn het eigendom van derden en worden
beschermd door het auteursrecht, patenten, handelsmerken en/of andere wetgeving met betrekking tot intellectueeleigendomsrecht. Dergelijk materiaal en dergelijke services worden alleen voor persoonlijke, nietcommerciële doeleinden
beschikbaar gesteld. Het is verboden om materiaal of services te gebruiken op een manier die niet door de eigenaar van
het materiaal of de leverancier van de service is toegestaan. Zonder het voorafgaande te beperken, is het verboden om
enig materiaal of enige services die via dit apparaat worden weergegeven, via welk medium en op welke manier dan
ook aan te passen, te kopiëren, opnieuw te publiceren, te uploaden, op het web te plaatsen, te verzenden, te verkopen,
daarvan afgeleide werken te maken, het te exploiteren of te distribueren, tenzij uitdrukkelijk toegestaan door de
desbetreffende materiaaleigenaar of serviceleverancier.Veiligheidsvoorschriften 29
“MATERIAAL EN SERVICES VAN DERDEN WORDEN GELEVERD IN DE STAAT WAARIN DEZE VERKEREN. SAMSUNG GEEFT MET
BETREKKING TOT HET MATERIAAL EN DE SERVICES DIE WORDEN GELEVERD GEEN ENKELE GARANTIE WAT BETREFT GESCHIKTHEID
VOOR ENIG DOEL, UITDRUKKELIJK NOCH GEÏMPLICEERD. SAMSUNG ONTKENT UITDRUKKELIJK ELKE GEÏMPLICEERDE GARANTIE,
INCLUSIEF MAAR NIET BEPERKT TOT GARANTIES VAN VERKOOPBAARHEID OF GESCHIKTHEID VOOR EEN BEPAALD DOEL.
SAMSUNG GEEFT GEEN ENKELE GARANTIE MET BETREKKING TOT DE NAUWKEURIGHEID, GELDIGHEID, ACTUALITEIT, LEGALITEIT
OF VOLLEDIGHEID VAN ENIG MATERIAAL OF ENIGE SERVICE DIE VIA DIT APPARAAT BESCHIKBAAR WORDT GESTELD EN SAMSUNG
KAN ONDER GEEN ENKELE OMSTANDIGHEID, INCLUSIEF NALATIGHEID, AANSPRAKELIJK WORDEN GESTELD VOOR ENIGE DIRECTE,
INDIRECTE, INCIDENTELE OF SPECIALE SCHADE OF GEVOLGSCHADE, ADVOCATENHONORARIA, ONKOSTEN OF ENIGE ANDERE
SCHADE DIE VOORTVLOEIT UIT, OF IN VERBAND STAAT MET, ENIGE INFORMATIE HIERIN, OF ALS GEVOLG VAN HET GEBRUIK VAN ENIG
MATERIAAL OF ENIGE SERVICE DOOR U OF EEN DERDE, ZELFS NIET WANNEER WIJ VAN DE KANS OP DERGELIJKE SCHADE OP DE
HOOGTE ZOUDEN ZIJN GESTELD.”
Services van derden kunnen op elk gewenst moment door Samsung worden beëindigd en Samsung geeft geen enkele
garantie dat enig materiaal of enige service gedurende een bepaalde periode beschikbaar zal zijn. Materiaal en services
worden door derden verzonden via netwerken en verzendfaciliteiten waarover Samsung geen controle heeft. Zonder
de algemeenheid van deze verklaring van vrijwaring te beperken, wijst Samsung uitdrukkelijk alle verantwoordelijkheid
of aansprakelijkheid van de hand met betrekking tot enige onderbreking of staking van enig materiaal of enige service
die via dit apparaat beschikbaar wordt gesteld. Samsung is verantwoordelijk noch aansprakelijk voor klantenservice
met betrekking tot het materiaal en de services. Alle vragen en serviceverzoeken met betrekking tot het materiaal of de
services dienen rechtstreeks aan de leveranciers van het materiaal of de services te worden gericht.De conformiteitsbeoordelingsprocedure waarnaar wordt
verwezen in Artikel 10 en die wordt beschreven in Bijlage [IV]
van Richtlijn 1999/5/ EC is uitgevoerd in samenwerking met de
volgende aangemelde instantie(s):
BABT, Forsyth House,
Churchfield Road,
Walton-on-Thames,
Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Kenmerk: 0168
De technische documentatie wordt beheerd door:
Samsung Electronics QA Lab.
en wordt op verzoek ter beschikking gesteld.
(Vertegenwoordiging in de EU)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager
(plaats en datum van uitgifte) (naam en handtekening van bevoegde
persoon)
* Dit is niet het adres van het Samsung Servicecenter. Voor het adres
of het telefoonnummer van het Samsung Servicecenter raadpleegt
u het garantiebewijs of neemt u contact op met de detailhandel
waar u het product hebt aangeschaft.
Conformiteitsverklaring
(R&TTE-richtlijn)
Wij, Samsung Electronics
verklaren onder onze eigen verantwoordelijkheid dat het
product
Mobiele GSM WCDMA WiFi-toestel : GT-P7100
waarop deze verklaring van toepassing is, voldoet aan de
volgende standaarden en/of andere normatieve documenten.
Veiligheid EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009
SAR EN 50371 : 2002
EN 62311 : 2008
IEC 62209-2 : 2010
Aanbeveling van de Raad 1999/519/EC
EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008)
EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009)
EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007)
EN 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007
EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003
Radio EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03)
EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03)
EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12)
Hierbij verklaren we dat [alle essentiële radiotests zijn
uitgevoerd en dat] bovengenoemd product voldoet aan
alle essentiële eisen die er in Richtlijn 1999/5/EC aan worden
gesteld.Printed in Korea
GH68-33611A
Dutch. 04/2011. Rev. 1.0
* Sommige beschrijvingen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing kunnen afwijken van uw apparaat. Dit is
afhankelijk van het land waar u het apparaat hebt gekocht, de geïnstalleerde software of uw
serviceprovider.
* Drukfouten voorbehouden.
www.samsung.com
GT-P7100
quick start guide2 Using this manual
Using this manual
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung mobile device. This device will provide you with high
quality mobile communication and entertainment based on Samsung’s exceptional technology
and high standards.
This user manual has been specially designed to guide you through the functions and features of
your device.
Read me first
• Please read all safety precautions and this manual carefully before using your device to ensure
safe and proper use.
• The descriptions in this manual are based on the default settings of your device.
• Images and screenshots used in this user manual may differ in appearance from the actual
product.
• Content in this user manual may differ from the product, or from software provided by service
providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. Refer to
www.samsung.com for the latest version of the user manual.Using this manual 3
• Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider.
• Formatting and delivery of this user manual is based on Google Android operating systems and
may vary depending on the user’s operating system.
• Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications.
Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by third-party applications.
• Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by user editing of
registry settings.
• Sound sources, wallpapers, and images provided in this device are licenced for limited use
between Samsung and their respective owners. Extracting and using these materials for
commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Samsung is not liable for
such copyright infringement by the user.
• Please keep this manual for future reference.
Copyright
Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics
This user manual is protected under international copyright laws.
No part of this user manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in
any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung
Electronics.4 Using this manual
Trademarks
• SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics.
• Google, the stylized Google logo, Android, and the stylized Android logo are trademarks of
Google Inc.
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide.
• Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
• Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.Contents 5
Contents
Your device and accessories ................................................................ 6
What’s in the box ................................................................................................................ 7
Getting to know your device ........................................................................................... 8
Inserting the SIM card .................................................................................................... 11
Charging your device ...................................................................................................... 12
Turning the device on and off ...................................................................................... 15
Safety precautions ............................................................................... 176 Your device and accessories
Your device and accessories
Your GALAXY Tab 10.1v™ device comes with a number of accessories, including a headset,
PC data cable, and adapter. This guide describes the parts of your device, how to charge the
battery, how to turn the device on and off, and other useful information.
For more information, refer to www.samsung.com.
In this section
What’s in the box on page 7
Getting to know your device on page 8
Inserting the SIM card on page 11
Charging your device on page 12
Turning the device on and off on page 15Your device and accessories 7
What’s in the box
Check your product box for the following items:
• Mobile device
• USB power adapter
• PC data cable
• Headset
• Quick start guide
• The items supplied with your device may vary depending on the software and accessories
available in your region or offered by your service provider.
• You can obtain additional accessories from your local Samsung dealer.
• The supplied accessories perform best for your device.
• Accessories other than the supplied ones may not be compatible with your device.8 Your device and accessories
Getting to know your device
Power button
3.5mm headset jack
Speaker
Light sensor
Touchscreen
Multifunction jack
Front-facing camera
LEDYour device and accessories 9
Volume button
Microphone
Camera flash
Rear camera lens
Internal antenna
SIM card slot
Speaker10 Your device and accessories
Before you use the device for the first time, you must charge the battery.
(See “Charging your device” on page 12.)
Your carrier’s support site and the user manual (available from www.samsung.com) describe basic
features of the device, including turning it on for the first time.
Be sure to keep the front and back camera lenses clean with lint-free cloth; smudges and
fingerprints will distort your pictures. The back camera’s LED flash is next to the lens. Taking
pictures and shooting videos is described in the user manual.
› About the touch screen
Your device’s touch screen lets you easily select items or perform functions.
• To avoid scratching the touch screen, do not use sharp tools.
• Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic
discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction.
• Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with water. The touch screen may
malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water.Your device and accessories 11
• For optimal use of the touch screen, remove the screen protection film before using your device.
• Your touch screen has a layer that detects small electrical charges emitted by the human body.
For best performance, tap the touch screen with your fingertip. The touch screen will not react
to touches of sharp tools, such as a stylus or pen.
Inserting the SIM card
You must insert a SIM before you use the device.
1 Open the cover to the SIM card slot on the side of the device.
2 Insert the SIM card and close the cover of the SIM card slot.12 Your device and accessories
Charging your device
Your device has a built-in battery. Before you can use your device, you must charge it fully.
• Use only Samsung-approved chargers. Unauthorised chargers can cause batteries to
explode or damage your device.
• When your battery is low, the device will emit a warning tone and display a low battery
message. The battery icon will also be empty and turn red. If the battery level becomes
too low, the device will automatically power off. Recharge your battery to continue using
your device.Your device and accessories 13
› Charge the device
1 Connect the PC data cable to the USB power adapter and then plug the end of the PC data
cable into the multifunction jack.
Improperly connecting the travel adapter can cause serious damage to the device. Any
damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.14 Your device and accessories
2 Plug the USB power adapter into a power outlet.
• You can use the device while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the
battery.
• While the device is charging, the touch screen and the touch keys may not function due
to an unstable power supply. If this happens, unplug the USB power adapter from the
power outlet or unplug the PC data cable from the device.
• While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your device’s
lifespan or performance.
• If your device is not charging properly, bring your device and the charger to a Samsung
Service Centre.
3 When the device is fully charged, disconnect it from the adapter.Your device and accessories 15
Turning the device on and off
You use the Power button to turn the device on and off.
Power button
› Turn on the device
If you turn on your device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device.16 Your device and accessories
› Unblock a SIM
If you enter the wrong SIM-unlock PIN three times, the SIM card is blocked and you can’t use your
device. You must obtain a PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) from your carrier to unblock the SIM and set
a new PIN.
› Turn off the device
Press and hold the Power button and then select OK.
For more about working with the touchscreen and menus, see the user manual.Safety precautions 17
Safety precautions
To prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your device, read all of the following information before using your
device.
Warning: Prevent electric shock, fire, and explosion
Do not use damaged power cords or plugs, or loose electrical sockets
Do not touch the power cord with wet hands, or disconnect the charger by pulling on the cord
Do not bend or damage the power cord
Do not use your device while charging or touch your device with wet hands
Do not short-circuit the charger or the battery
Do not drop or cause an impact to the charger or the battery
Do not charge the battery with chargers that are not approved by the manufacturer
Do not use your device during a thunderstorm
Your device may malfunction and your risk of electric shock is increased.
Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery
For safe disposal of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your nearest authorised service centre.18 Safety precautions
Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care
• Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers specifically designed for your device. Incompatible batteries and
chargers can cause serious injuries or damage to your device.
• Never dispose of batteries or devices in a fire. Follow all local regulations when disposing of used batteries or devices.
• Never place batteries or devices on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may
explode when overheated.
• Never crush or puncture the battery. Avoid exposing the battery to high external pressure, which can lead to an internal
short circuit and overheating.
Protect the device, batteries, and chargers from damage
• Avoid exposing your device and batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures.
• Extreme temperatures can cause the deformation of the device and reduce the charging capacity and life of your device
and batteries.
• Prevent batteries from contacting metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your
batteries and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage.
• Never use a damaged charger or battery.
Caution: Follow all safety warnings and regulations when using your device in
restricted areas
Turn off your device where prohibited
Comply with all regulations that restrict the use of a mobile device in a particular area.
Do not use your device near other electronic devices
Most electronic devices use radio frequency signals. Your device may interfere with other electronic devices.Safety precautions 19
Do not use your device near a pacemaker
• Avoid using your device within a 15 cm range of a pacemaker if possible, as your device can interfere with the
pacemaker.
• If you must use your device, keep at least 15 cm away from the pacemaker.
• To minimise the possible interference with a pacemaker, use your device on the opposite side of your body from the
pacemaker.
Do not use your device in a hospital or near medical equipment that can be interfered with by
radio frequency
If you personally use any medical equipment, contact the manufacturer of the equipment to ensure the safety of your
equipment from radio frequency.
If you are using a hearing aid, contact the manufacturer for information about radio interference
Some hearing aids may be interfered with by the radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer to ensure the
safety of your hearing aid.
Turn off the device in potentially explosive environments
• Always comply with regulations, instructions and signs in potentially explosive environments.
• Do not use your device at refuelling points (service stations), near fuels or chemicals, and at blasting areas.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts,
or accessories.
Turn off your device when in an aircraft
Using your device in an aircraft is illegal. Your device may interfere with the electronic navigation instruments of the aircraft.20 Safety precautions
Electronic devices in a motor vehicle may malfunction due to the radio frequency of your device
Electronic devices in your car may malfunction due to radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer for more
information.
Proper care and use of your mobile device
Keep your device dry
• Humidity and all types of liquids may damage device parts or electronic circuits.
• When wet, turn off your device. Dry your device with a towel and take it to a service centre.
• Liquids will change the colour of the label that indicates water damage inside the device. Water damage to your device
can void your manufacturer’s warranty.
Do not use or store your device in dusty, dirty areas
Dust can cause your device to malfunction.
Do not store your device on slopes
If your device falls, it can be damaged.
Do not store your device in hot or cold areas. Use your device at -20 °C to 45 °C
• Your device can explode if left inside a closed vehicle, as the inside temperature can reach up to 80 °C.
• Do not expose your device to direct sunlight for extended periods of time (such as on the dashboard of a car).
• Store the battery at -20 °C to 45 °C.Safety precautions 21
Do not store your device with such metal objects as coins, keys and necklaces
• Your device may become deformed or malfunction.
• If the battery terminals are in contact with metal objects, it may cause a fire.
Do not store your device near magnetic fields
• Your device may malfunction or the battery may discharge from exposure to magnetic fields.
• Magnetic stripe cards, including credit cards, phone cards, passbooks, and boarding passes, may be damaged by
magnetic fields.
• Do not use carrying cases or accessories with magnetic closures or allow your device to come in contact with magnetic
fields for extended periods of time.
Do not store your device near or in heaters, microwaves, hot cooking equipment, or high pressure
containers
• The battery may leak.
• Your device may overheat and cause a fire.
Do not drop your device or cause impacts to your device
• The screen of your device may be damaged.
• If bent or deformed, your device may be damaged or parts may malfunction.
Do not use a flash close to the eyes of people or animals
Using a flash close to the eyes may cause temporary loss of vision or damage to the eyes.22 Safety precautions
Ensure maximum battery and charger life
• Avoid charging batteries for more than a week, as overcharging may shorten battery life.
• Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use.
• Disconnect chargers from power sources when not in use.
• Use batteries only for their intended purposes.
Use manufacturer-approved batteries, chargers, accessories and supplies
• Using generic batteries or chargers may shorten the life of your device or cause the device to malfunction.
• Samsung cannot be responsible for the user’s safety when using accessories or supplies that are not approved by
Samsung.
Do not bite or suck on the device or the battery
• Doing so may damage the device or cause explosion.
• If children use the device, make sure that they use the device properly.
When using the device:
• Speak directly into the mouthpiece.
• Avoid contact with your device’s internal antenna. Touching the antenna may cause the device to transmit more radio
frequency than necessary.
• Hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, use special features that reduce the number of keys you have
to press (such as predictive text), and take frequent breaks.Safety precautions 23
Protect your hearing
• Excessive exposure to loud sounds can cause hearing damage.
• Exposure to loud sounds while driving may distract your attention and cause an accident.
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source and use only the
minimum volume setting necessary to hear your conversation or music.
Use caution when using the device while walking or moving
Always be aware of your surroundings to avoid injury to yourself or others.
Do not carry your device in your back pockets or around your waist
You can be injured or damage the device if you fall.
Do not disassemble, modify, or repair your device
• Any changes or modifications to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. For service, take your device to a
Samsung Service Centre.
• Do not disassemble or puncture the battery, as this can cause explosion or fire.
Do not paint or put stickers on your device
Paint and stickers can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. If you are allergic to paint or metal parts of the
product, you may experience itching, eczema, or swelling of the skin. When this happens, stop using the product and
consult your physician.24 Safety precautions
When cleaning your device:
• Wipe your device or charger with a towel or a rubber.
• Do not use chemicals or detergents.
Do not use the device if the screen is cracked or broken
Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to have it
repaired.
Do not use the device for anything other than its intended use
Avoid disturbing others when using the device in public
Do not allow children to use your device
Your device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt themselves and others, damage the device.
Install mobile devices and equipment with caution
• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted.
• Avoid placing your device and accessories near or in an air bag deployment area. Improperly installed wireless
equipment can cause serious injury when air bags inflate rapidly.
Allow only qualified personnel to service your device
Allowing unqualified personnel to service your device may result in damage to your device and will void your
manufacturer’s warranty.Safety precautions 25
Handle SIM cards with care
• Do not remove a card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data and/or
damage to the card or device.
• Protect cards from strong shocks, static electricity, and electrical noise from other devices.
• Do not touch gold-coloured contacts or terminals with your fingers or metal objects. If dirty, wipe the card with a soft
cloth.
Be sure to back up important data
Samsung is not responsible for data loss.
Do not distribute copyright-protected material
Do not distribute copyright-protected material that you have recorded to others without the permission of the content
owners. Doing this may violate copyright laws. The manufacturer is not liable for any legal issues caused by the user’s illegal
use of copyrighted material.26 Safety precautions
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) certification information
Your device conforms to European Union (EU) standards that limit human exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy emitted
by radio and telecommunications equipment. These standards prevent the sale of mobile devices that exceed a maximum
exposure level (known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR) of 2.0 W/kg.
During testing, the maximum SAR recorded for this model was 0.939 W/kg. In normal use, the actual SAR is likely to be
much lower, as the device has been designed to emit only the RF energy necessary to transmit a signal to the nearest base
station. By automatically emitting lower levels when possible, your device reduces your overall exposure to RF energy.
The Declaration of Conformity statement at the back of this manual demonstrates your device’s compliance with the
European Radio & Terminal Telecommunications Equipment (R&TTE) directive.
When carrying the product or using it while worn on the body maintain a distance of 5 mm from the body to
ensure compliance with RF exposure requirements.Safety precautions 27
Correct disposal of this product
(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories
(e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their
working life.
To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for
details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and
its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
This EEE is compliant with RoHS.28 Safety precautions
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be
disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life.
Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or
lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can
cause harm to human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle
them through your local, free battery return system.
The rechargeable battery incorporated in this product is not user replaceable. For information on its replacement,
please contact your service provider.
Disclaimer
Some content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent,
trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal
noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorised by the content
owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorised by the applicable content owner or
service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit,
or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
“THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT CONTENT OR SERVICES
SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF
ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING Safety precautions 29
NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN
CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE BY
YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.”
Third party services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that
any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by
means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this
disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any content or
service made available through this device.
Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request
for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article
10 and detailed in Annex[IV] of Directive 1999/5/EC has been
followed with the involvement of the following Notified
Body(ies):
BABT, Forsyth House,
Churchfield Road,
Walton-on-Thames,
Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Identification mark: 0168
The technical documentation kept at :
Samsung Electronics QA Lab.
which will be made available upon request.
(Representative in the EU)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2011. 02. 14 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager
(place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person)
* It is not the address of Samsung Service Centre. For the address or
the phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty
card or contact the retailer where you purchased your product.
Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE)
We, Samsung Electronics
declare under our sole responsibility that the product
Portable GSM WCDMA Wi-Fi Device : GT-P7100
to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the
following standards and/or other normative documents.
SAFETY EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11 : 2009
SAR EN 50371 : 2002
EN 62311 : 2008
IEC 62209-2 : 2010
Council Recommendation 1999/519/EC
EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008)
EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009)
EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007)
EN 55022 : 2006 + A1 : 2007
EN 55024 : 1998 + A1 : 2001 + A2 : 2003
RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (2009-03)
EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (2009-03)
EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (2010-03)
EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (2008-12)
We hereby declare that [all essential radio test suites have been
carried out and that] the above named product is in conformity
to all the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.Printed in Korea
GH68-33610A
English (EU). 03/2011. Rev. 1.0
Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your device depending on the software of
the device or your service provider.
www.samsung.com
GT-P7100
GebruiksaanwijzingDeze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken
2
Deze gebruiksaanwijzing
gebruiken
Gefeliciteerd met uw aankoop van het mobiele Samsung-apparaat.
Met dit krachtige apparaat, dat u overal kunt gebruiken, hebt u
het beste van het web en mobiel computergebruik in handen. Een
lichtgewicht, uiterst veelzijdig platform dat past bij een actieve
levensstijl. Het mobiele Samsung-apparaat is ontworpen met het
Android-besturingssysteem van Google en geeft u toegang tot
duizenden handige en onderhoudende applicaties zodat u nog
meer kunt genieten van mobiel internet.
Dankzij de geïntegreerde draadloze toegang en een gevoelig
aanraakscherm kunt u onderweg boeken en kranten lezen, op de
hoogte blijven van het laatste nieuws, sport en weer, uw zakelijke
en multimediabestanden beheren en op internet zoeken naar
kaarten, bedrijfslocaties en meer.
Lees dit eerst
● Lees alle veiligheidsinformatie en deze gebruiksaanwijzing
zorgvuldig door zodat u verzekerd bent van veilig en correct
gebruik voordat u het apparaat in gebruik neemt.
● De beschrijvingen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing zijn gebaseerd op
de standaardinstellingen van het apparaat.
● Afbeeldingen en screenshots die in deze gebruiksaanwijzing
worden gebruikt, kunnen er anders uitzien dan het
daadwerkelijke product.
● De inhoud van deze gebruiksaanwijzing kan van product
tot product verschillen of anders zijn dan de software die
door serviceproviders wordt geleverd en is onderhevig aan
wijzigingen zonder voorafgaande mededelingen. Ga naar
www.samsung.com voor de meest recente versie van deze
gebruiksaanwijzing.Deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken
3
● Welke functies en extra diensten beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk
van het apparaat, de software en uw provider.
● De opmaak en presentatie van deze gebruiksaanwijzing is
gebaseerd op het Android-besturingssysteem van Google en
kan verschillen afhankelijk van het besturingssysteem van de
gebruiker.
● Applicaties en de bijbehorende functies kunnen per land, regio
of hardwarespecificatie verschillen. Samsung is niet aansprakelijk
voor prestatieproblemen die worden veroorzaakt door
applicaties van derden.
● Samsung is niet aansprakelijk voor prestatie- of
compatibiliteitsproblemen die worden veroorzaakt door
het bewerken van de instellingen in het register of door het
gebruik van aangepaste besturingssysteemsoftware. Wanneer
u probeert het besturingssysteem aan te passen, kan dit ertoe
leiden dat uw apparaat en applicaties niet meer correct werken.
● U kunt de software voor uw mobiele apparaat upgraden door
naar www.samsung.com te gaan.
● Software, geluidsbronnen, achtergronden, afbeeldingen en
andere inhoud in dit apparaat zijn onder licentie verstrekt met
beperkte gebruiksrechten tussen Samsung en de betreffende
eigenaren. Het overnemen en gebruiken van deze materialen
voor commerciële of andere doeleinden maakt inbreuk op de
copyrightwetgeving. Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor
inbreuk op het copyright door de gebruiker.
● Bewaar de gebruiksaanwijzing, zodat u deze later kunt
raadplegen.Deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken
4
Symbolen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing
Bekijk voordat u begint de symbolen die in deze
gebruiksaanwijzing zijn opgenomen:
Waarschuwing—situaties die letsel kunnen veroorzaken
bij u of anderen
Let op—situaties die schade aan het apparaat of andere
apparatuur kunnen veroorzaken
Opmerking—opmerkingen, gebruikstips of aanvullende
informatie
► Raadpleeg: pagina's met verwante informatie,
bijvoorbeeld: ► p. 12 (betekent “zie pagina 12“)
→ Gevolgd door: de volgorde van de opties of menu's die u
moet selecteren om een stap uit te voeren, bijvoorbeeld:
open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Over
tablet (staat voor Instellingen, gevolgd door Over tablet)Deze gebruiksaanwijzing gebruiken
5
Copyright
Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics
Deze snelstartgids is beschermd onder internationale
auteursrechtwetten.
Geen enkel onderdeel van deze snelstartgids mag worden
gereproduceerd, gedistribueerd, vertaald of verzonden in welke
vorm dan ook of op welke elektronische of mechanische wijze
dan ook, inclusief door deze te fotokopiëren, op te nemen of op te
slaan in een systeem voor het opslaan en ophalen van informatie,
zonder voorafgaande schriftelijke toestemming van Samsung
Electronics.
Handelsmerken
● SAMSUNG en het SAMSUNG-logo zijn geregistreerde
handelsmerken van Samsung Electronics.
● Het Android-logo, Google™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™,
YouTube™, Google Play™ Store, en Google Talk™ zijn
handelsmerken van Google, Inc.
● Bluetooth® is wereldwijd een geregistreerd handelsmerk van
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
● Windows Media Player
® is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van
Microsoft Corporation.
● Wi-Fi
®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, het
Wi-Fi CERTIFIED-logo en het Wi-Fi-logo zijn geregistreerde
handelsmerken van de Wi-Fi Alliance.
● Alle overige handelsmerken en auteursrechten zijn het
eigendom van de betreffende eigenaren.Inhoud
6
Het apparaat in elkaar zetten ....................................... 9
Uitpakken .......................................................................................... 9
De SIM-kaart of USIM-kaart plaatsen ...................................... 10
De batterij opladen ...................................................................... 10
Aan de slag ..................................................................... 13
Het toestel in- en uitschakelen .................................................. 13
Kennismaken met het toestel .................................................... 14
Het aanraakscherm gebruiken .................................................. 18
Het startscherm ............................................................................. 20
Applicaties openen ....................................................................... 23
De instellingen van het apparaat aanpassen ......................... 24
Tekst ingeven ................................................................................. 28
Web ................................................................................. 30
Browser ............................................................................................ 30
Pulse ................................................................................................. 34
Play Store ........................................................................................ 35
YouTube ........................................................................................... 36
Maps ................................................................................................. 36
Latitude ........................................................................................... 38
Plaatsen ........................................................................................... 38
Navigatie ......................................................................................... 39
Communiceren .............................................................. 40
Google Mail .................................................................................... 40
E-mail ............................................................................................... 42
Talk ................................................................................................... 44
Google+ ........................................................................................... 45
Messenger ...................................................................................... 45
InhoudInhoud
7
Entertainment ............................................................... 46
Play Music ....................................................................................... 46
Camera ............................................................................................ 48
Galerij ............................................................................................... 54
Movie Studio .................................................................................. 55
Persoonlijke gegevens ................................................. 58
Personen ......................................................................................... 58
Agenda ............................................................................................ 60
Connectiviteit ................................................................ 62
Pc-verbindingen ............................................................................ 62
Wi-Fi .................................................................................................. 63
Wi-Fi Direct ..................................................................................... 65
Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 66
Mobiel netwerk delen .................................................................. 68
GPS ................................................................................................... 70
VPN-verbindingen ........................................................................ 71
Hulpmiddelen ............................................................... 73
Klok ................................................................................................... 73
Calculator ........................................................................................ 74
Downloads ...................................................................................... 74
Zoeken ............................................................................................. 74
Quickoffice HD ............................................................................... 75
Instellingen .................................................................... 77
Het menu Instellingen openen .................................................. 77
Wi-Fi .................................................................................................. 77
Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 77
Datagebruik ................................................................................... 77
Meer... ............................................................................................... 78
Geluid ............................................................................................... 79Inhoud
8
Weergave ........................................................................................ 80
Opslagruimte ................................................................................. 80
Accu .................................................................................................. 80
Apps ................................................................................................. 80
Accounts & synchronisatie .......................................................... 81
Locatieservices .............................................................................. 81
Beveiliging ...................................................................................... 81
Taal en invoer ................................................................................. 82
Back-up maken en opnieuw instellen ..................................... 85
Datum en tijd ................................................................................. 85
Toegankelijkheid ........................................................................... 86
Opties voor ontwikkelaars .......................................................... 86
Over tablet ...................................................................................... 87
Problemen oplossen .................................................... 88
Veiligheidsvoorschriften ............................................. 92
Index ............................................................................ 102Het apparaat in elkaar zetten
9
Het apparaat in elkaar zetten
Uitpakken
Controleer of de doos de volgende onderdelen bevat:
● Mobiel apparaat
● Aan de slag-gids
Gebruik alleen door Samsung goedgekeurde software.
Gekraakte of illegale software kan schade of storingen
veroorzaken die niet worden gedekt door de garantie van de
fabrikant.
● De bijgeleverde onderdelen bij uw apparaat en de
beschikbare accessoires kunnen verschillen, afhankelijk
van uw regio of serviceprovider.
● Bij de plaatselijke Samsung-dealer kunt u extra accessoires
kopen.
● De meegeleverde accessoires werken het beste met uw
toestel.
● Accessoires die niet door de fabrikant worden verstrekt,
zijn mogelijk niet compatibel met het toestel.Het apparaat in elkaar zetten
10
De SIM-kaart of USIM-kaart plaatsen
Wanneer u bij een provider een abonnement afsluit, ontvangt
u een SIM-kaart (Subscriber Identity Module). Hierop zijn uw
abonnementsgegevens opgeslagen, zoals de PIN-code en
optionele diensten. Voor het gebruik van UMTS- of HSDPA-services
kunt u een USIM-kaart (Universal Subscriber Identity Module)
kopen.
De SIM-kaart of USIM-kaart plaatsen:
1 Open het klepje van de SIM-kaartsleuf.
2 Plaats de SIM- of USIM-kaart met de goudkleurige
contactpunten naar beneden gericht.
3 Sluit het klepje voor de SIM-kaart.
De batterij opladen
Het toestel heeft een ingebouwde batterij. Voordat u het apparaat
voor het eerst gaat gebruiken of als de batterij langere tijd niet is
gebruikt, moet u de batterij opladen.
Gebruik alleen door Samsung goedgekeurde opladers. Bij
gebruik van niet-goedgekeurde opladers bestaat het risico
dat batterijen ontploffen of dat het toestel schade oploopt.Het apparaat in elkaar zetten
11
● Laad de batterij alleen op met een oplader. U kunt de
batterij niet opladen met de USB-kabel.
● Als de batterij bijna leeg is, laat het toestel een
waarschuwingstoon horen en wordt er een bericht
weergegeven. Het batterijpictogram is ook leeg. Als de
batterij zo zwak is dat het toestel niet meer kan worden
gebruikt, wordt het toestel automatisch uitgeschakeld.
Laad de batterij op als u het apparaat weer wilt gebruiken.
● Als de batterij volledig leeg is, kunt u het apparaat
niet inschakelen zelfs als de USB-stroomadapter is
aangesloten. Laat een batterij die volledig leeg is enige
minuten opladen voordat u probeert het apparaat in te
schakelen.
1 Steek de USB-kabel in de USB-voedingsadapter en steek het
uiteinde van de USB-kabel vervolgens in de multifunctionele
aansluiting.
De vorm van de USB-adapter kan verschillen afhankelijk van
uw regio.
Als u de USB-kabel onjuist aansluit, kan dit grote schade
aan het apparaat of de USB-stroomadapter veroorzaken.
Schade veroorzaakt door verkeerd gebruik valt niet onder de
garantie.Het apparaat in elkaar zetten
12
2 Sluit de USB-stroomadapter op een stopcontact aan.
● U kunt het toestel tijdens het opladen van de batterij
blijven gebruiken. Hierdoor kan het echter wel langer
duren voordat de batterij volledig is opgeladen.
● Het is mogelijk dat het aanraakscherm tijdens het opladen
niet werkt wegens een onregelmatige stroomvoorziening.
Koppel in dat geval de USB-stroomadapter los van het
stopcontact of koppel de USB-kabel van het apparaat los.
● Tijdens het opladen kan het toestel warm worden. Dit is
normaal en heeft geen nadelige invloed op de levensduur
of prestaties van het toestel.
● Als uw toestel niet goed oplaadt, kunt u met het toestel en
de oplader naar een Samsung Servicecenter gaan.
3 Wanneer de batterij volledig is opgeladen, haalt u eerst
de USB-voedingsadapter en USB-kabel uit het toestel en
vervolgens trekt u de stekker uit het stopcontact.
Om energie te besparen, koppelt u de USB-stroomadapter
los wanneer deze niet wordt gebruikt. De USBstroomadapter heeft geen aan/uit-schakelaar, dus u moet
de USB-stroomadapter uit het stopcontact halen wanneer
de adapter niet wordt gebruikt om energieverspilling te
voorkomen. Het apparaat moet in de buurt blijven van het
stopcontact tijdens het opladen.13
Aan de slag
Aan de slag
Het toestel in- en uitschakelen
Houd de aan/uit-toets ingedrukt om het apparaat in te schakelen.
Als u het toestel voor het eerst inschakelt, volgt u de instructies op
het scherm om het toestel in te stellen.
Om het apparaat uit te schakelen, houdt u de Aan/uittoets
ingedrukt en selecteert u OK.
● Volg alle waarschuwingen en aanwijzingen van
geautoriseerd personeel op plaatsen waar het gebruik
van draadloze apparatuur onderhevig is aan beperkingen,
bijvoorbeeld in vliegtuigen en ziekenhuizen.
● Als u alleen gebruik wilt maken van de diensten waarvoor
geen netwerk vereist is, activeert u de vliegmodus.
›Naar de vliegmodus overschakelen
Met de vliegmodus (offline-modus) schakelt u de draadloze
functies van het toestel uit, zodat u op plaatsen waar geen
draadloze apparatuur mag worden gebruikt (bijvoorbeeld in
vliegtuigen en ziekenhuizen), kunt werken met functies waarvoor
geen netwerk nodig is.
Om de vliegmodus in- of uit te schakelen gaat u naar Instellingen
→Meer... en selecteert u het selectievakje naast Vliegmodus.14
Aan de slag
Kennismaken met het toestel
›Indeling
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
9
10
4
11
12
13
1415
Aan de slag
Nummer Functie
1 Lichtsensor
2 Aan/uit/reset/vergrendelingstoets
3 Headsetaansluiting
1
4 Luidspreker
5 LED
6 Cameralens voorzijde
7 Aanraakscherm
8 Multifunctionele aansluiting
9 Cameralens achterzijde
10 Interne antenne
11 SIM-kaartsleuf
12 Microfoon
13 Volumetoets
14 Flitser
› Toetsen
Toets Functie
Aan/uit/
reset
2
/
vergrendelen
Het toestel inschakelen (ingedrukt
houden); het apparaat resetten (8-10
seconden ingedrukt houden); het
aanraakscherm vergrendelen.
Volume Het volume van het toestel regelen.
2. Als er fatale fouten optreden, de verbinding wordt verbroken of uw
apparaat vastloopt, moet u het apparaat mogelijk resetten voordat u
het weer kunt gebruiken.
1. Als u een headset incorrect aansluit op het toestel, kan de
headsetaansluiting of de headset worden beschadigd.16
Aan de slag
› Pictogrammen
Welke pictogrammen op het scherm worden weergegeven,
is afhankelijk van de regio en provider.
Pictogram Betekenis
Geen signaal
Signaalsterkte
GPRS-netwerkverbinding
EDGE-netwerkverbinding
UMTS-netwerkverbinding
Open Wi-Fi-toegangspunten beschikbaar
Wi-Fi-toegangspunt verbonden
Bluetooth ingeschakeld
GPS ingeschakeld
Gesynchroniseerd met het web
Bezig met gegevens uploaden
Bezig met gegevens downloaden
Verbonden met computer
USB-tethering ingeschakeld
Wi-Fi-tethering ingeschakeld
Nieuw e-mailbericht
Nieuw Google Mail-bericht17
Aan de slag
Pictogram Betekenis
Roaming (buiten het gebruikelijke servicegebied)
Vliegmodus (offline-modus) ingeschakeld
Muziek wordt afgespeeld
Fout opgetreden of voorzichtigheid vereist
Batterijlading
3
Huidige tijd
3. Als u een oplader gebruikt die niet is goedgekeurd door Samsung,
wordt dit symbool niet weergegeven.18
Aan de slag
Het aanraakscherm gebruiken
Met het aanraakscherm van het toestel kunt u eenvoudig items
selecteren en functies uitvoeren. Hier krijgt u informatie over het
aanraakscherm.
● Raak het aanraakscherm niet met uw vingertoppen aan en
gebruik geen scherpe voorwerpen op het aanraakscherm.
Dit kan het aanraakscherm beschadigen of ervoor zorgen
dat dit niet meer goed werkt.
● Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet in aanraking komt met
andere elektrische apparaten. Door elektrostatische
ontladingen kan het aanraakscherm worden beschadigd.
● Zorg dat het aanraakscherm niet met water in
aanraking komt. Het aanraakscherm kan in vochtige
omstandigheden of door water beschadigd raken.
● Laat het aanraakscherm niet op standby staan voor
langere periodes. Dit kan resulteren in echo-afbeeldingen
of ghosting. Schade veroorzaakt door verkeerd gebruik
valt niet onder de garantie.
● Om het aanraakscherm optimaal te kunnen gebruiken,
moet u de beschermende folie verwijderen voordat u het
apparaat gebruikt.
● Het aanraakscherm heeft een laag die kleine elektrische
ladingen die door het menselijk lichaam worden
veroorzaakt, detecteert. Voor de beste prestaties tikt u met
uw vingertop op het aanraakscherm. Het aanraakscherm
reageert niet als het door scherpe hulpmiddelen zoals een
stylus of een pen wordt aangeraakt.
U gebruikt de volgende technieken om het aanraakscherm te
bedienen:
● Tikken: eenmaal met uw vinger aanraken om een menu, optie of
applicatie te selecteren of starten.
● Aangeraakt houden: tik op een item en blijf dit langer dan
2 seconden aanraken.
● Slepen: tik met uw vinger en veeg hiermee omhoog, omlaag,
naar links of naar rechts om items in lijsten te verplaatsen.19
Aan de slag
● Verslepen: raak een item aan en verschuif uw vinger om het item
te verplaatsen.
● Dubbeltikken: tik tweemaal snel achtereen met uw vinger om
tijdens het weergeven van foto’s of webpagina’s in of uit te
zoomen.
● Samenknijpen: plaats twee vingers ver uit elkaar en breng ze
naar elkaar toe.
›Het aanraakscherm draaien
Het toestel beschikt over een bewegingssensor waarmee de
oriëntatie van het toestel wordt gedetecteerd. Als u het toestel
draait, wordt het scherm automatisch naar de desbetreffende
stand overgeschakeld.
Als u wilt instellen dat de interface de oriëntatie behoudt, tikt u
op de rechterkant van de systeembalk en tikt u vervolgens op
de digitale klok om het meldingenpaneel te openen. Sleep de
schuifbalk naar AAN naast het Scherm automatisch draaien.
›Het aanraakscherm vergrendelen of ontgrendelen
Wanneer u het toestel gedurende een ingestelde tijdsduur niet
gebruikt, wordt het aanraakscherm automatisch uitgeschakeld
en vergrendeld om onbedoelde invoer te voorkomen. Druk op de
aan/uit-toets om het aanraakscherm handmatig te vergrendelen.
Om te ontgrendelen schakelt u het scherm in door op de aan/uittoets te drukken, aangeraakt te houden ( ) en naar ( ) rechts te
slepen.
U kunt de functie voor het vergrendelen van het scherm
inschakelen om te voorkomen dat andere gebruikers
uw persoonlijke gegevens en informatie op uw toestel
gebruiken of openen. ► p. 2620
Aan de slag
Het startscherm
Wanneer het toestel zich in de standby-stand bevindt, ziet u het
startscherm. Op het startscherm kunt u pictogrammen, widgets,
snelkoppelingen naar applicaties en andere items bekijken. Scroll
naar links of rechts naar een paneel van het startscherm.
1 2
3
Het bovenstaande scherm kan er anders uitzien, afhankelijk
van uw regio of serviceprovider.
Nummer Functie
1
Zoek naar applicaties en bestanden op het
apparaat en specifieke gegevens op het web met
de widget Google Search.
2 De lijst met applicaties openen.
3 Systeembalk (zie volgende gedeelte).21
Aan de slag
Systeembalk
Via de systeembalk kunt u snel door schermen navigeren,
applicaties openen, systeemgegevens weergeven en meer.
3
2
1 4
Nummer Functie
1 Teruggaan naar het vorige scherm.
2 Teruggaan naar het startscherm.
3 De lijst met recente applicaties openen.
4
Symbolen en de huidige status van uw toestel
weergeven; het meldingenvenster openen.
› Een applicatiesnelkoppeling aan het startscherm
toevoegen
1 Open de applicatielijst en houd een applicatiepictogram vast.
2 Verplaats het pictogram naast de gewenste locatie of verplaats
het naar een ander paneel van het startscherm.22
Aan de slag
› Een widget aan het startscherm toevoegen
Widgets zijn kleine applicaties op het startscherm die handige
functies en informatie verschaffen.
● Voor sommige widgets wordt verbinding met webservices
gemaakt. Als u een webwidget gebruikt, worden er
mogelijk extra kosten in rekening gebracht.
● Welke widgets beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van uw regio
of serviceprovider.
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer WIDGETS om het
widgetpaneel te openen.
2 Scroll naar links of rechts op het widgetpaneel.
3 Blijf een widget aanraken om het toe te voegen aan het
startscherm.
›Items verplaatsen op het startscherm
1 Blijf een item dat u wilt verplaatsen, aanraken tot het raster van
het startscherm wordt weergegeven.
2 Sleep het item naar de gewenste plek.
› Een item op het startscherm verwijderen
1 Tik op het gewenste item en blijf het even aanraken.
verschijnt boven aan het startscherm.
2 Sleep het item naar .
3 Wanneer het item rood kleurt, laat u het los.23
Aan de slag
›Werken met het meldingenpaneel
Tik vanuit het startscherm of tijdens het gebruiken van de
applicatie op de rechterkant van de systeembalk en tik vervolgens
op de digitale klok om het meldingenpaneel te openen. Selecteer
een optie op het meldingenpaneel.
U kunt de huidige status van het toestel zien en de volgende
opties gebruiken:
● Vliegmodus: de vliegmodus (offline-modus) in- en uitschakelen.
● Wi-Fi: de Wi-Fi-functie in- en uitschakelen.
● Scherm automatisch draaien: de functie voor automatisch
draaien aan- en uitzetten.
● (Helderheid): de helderheid van het scherm aanpassen.
● Meldingen: instellen dat het toestel u waarschuwt voor
verschillende gebeurtenissen.
● Instellingen: het menu Instellingen openen.
Welke opties beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van uw regio of
serviceprovider.
Applicaties openen
1 Selecteer in het startscherm om de lijst met applicaties te
openen.
2 Scroll naar links of naar rechts naar een ander scherm.
3 Selecteer een applicatie.
Kies WIDGETS om het widgetspaneel weer te geven.
4 Selecteer om terug te gaan naar het vorige scherm.
Selecteer om terug te gaan naar het startscherm.
› Onlangs gebruikte applicaties openen
1 Selecteer om de applicaties weer te geven die u onlangs
hebt gebruikt.
2 Selecteer een applicatie.
Om een applicatie uit de lijst te verwijderen houdt u deze
aangeraakt → Verwijderen uit lijst.24
Aan de slag
De instellingen van het apparaat aanpassen
Haal meer uit uw toestel door dit aan uw voorkeuren aan te
passen.
›De schermtaal wijzigen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→Taal
en invoer→Taal.
2 Selecteer de gewenste taal.
›De huidige tijd en datum instellen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→
Datum en tijd.
2 Selecteer de tijdzone, stel de tijd en datum in en pas eventueel
andere instellingen aan.
›De aanraaktoon in- of uitschakelen
Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→Geluid
→Touch-geluiden.
›Het volume van het apparaat aanpassen
1 Druk de volumetoets omhoog of omlaag.
2 Selecteer en sleep de schuifregelaars om het volumeniveau
voor elk geluid aan te passen.25
Aan de slag
› Een achtergrond voor het startscherm selecteren
1 Blijf het startscherm op een willekeurig plaats aanraken.
2 Selecteer een optie.
● Achtergronden: achtergrondafbeeldingen die standaard
aanwezig zijn op het apparaat.
● Galerij: foto’s die u heeft genomen of van internet
gedownloade afbeeldingen.
● Live achtergronden: geanimeerde afbeeldingen die bij het
apparaat worden geleverd.
3 Selecteer een item.
4 Selecteer Achtergrond instellen.
Als u een item heeft geselecteerd van Galerij, verplaats dit
of wijzig eventueel de grootte door het blauwe kader te
verslepen en selecteer vervolgens BIJSNIJDEN.
Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor het gebruik van
standaardafbeeldingen of -achtergronden op uw toestel.
›De helderheid van het scherm aanpassen
Uw apparaat bevat een lichtsensor, waarmee het niveau van het
omgevingslicht kan worden vastgesteld en de helderheid van het
scherm automatisch kan worden aanpast. U kunt de helderheid
van het scherm ook automatisch instellen.
Als het scherm op een hoog helderheidsniveau is ingesteld,
raakt de batterij van het toestel sneller leeg.
Instellen dat het apparaat de helderheid automatisch
aanpast
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→
Weergave→Helderheid.
2 Schakel het selectievakje naast Automatische helderheid in.
3 Selecteer OK.
Het apparaat verhoogt automatisch de helderheid in
een omgeving met veel licht en verlaagt de helderheid
automatisch in een omgeving met weinig licht.26
Aan de slag
De helderheid automatisch aanpassen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→
Weergave→Helderheid.
2 Schakel het selectievakje naast Automatische helderheid in.
3 Sleep de schuifregelaar om de helderheid aan te passen.
4 Selecteer OK.
› Schermvergrendeling instellen
U kunt het aanraakscherm met een ontgrendelpatroon of
wachtwoord vergrendelen om te voorkomen dat anderen het
toestel zonder uw toestemming gebruiken.
● Wanneer u een schermvergrendeling hebt ingesteld, zal
het toestel telkens bij het inschakelen of het ontgrendelen
van het scherm om dit patroon vragen.
● Als u uw PIN-code of wachtwoord vergeet, moet u het
toestel bij een Samsung Servicecenter laten resetten.
● Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor verlies van
beveiligingscodes of privégegevens of andere schade die
door illegale software wordt veroorzaakt.
Een ontgrendelingspatroon instellen
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→
Beveiliging→Schermvergrendeling→Patroon.
2 Volg de instructies en voorbeeldpatronen op het scherm en
selecteer Volgende.
3 Teken een patroon door met uw vinger te vegen en zo
ten minste 4 punten met elkaar te verbinden en selecteer
Doorgaan.
4 Teken het patroon nogmaals om het te bevestigen en selecteer
Bevestigen.27
Aan de slag
Een ontgrendelings-PIN-code instellen
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→
Beveiliging→Schermvergrendeling→PIN.
2 Geef een nieuwe PIN-code (numeriek) in en selecteer
Doorgaan.
3 Geef de PIN-code nogmaals in en selecteer OK.
Een ontgrendelingswachtwoord instellen
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→
Beveiliging→Schermvergrendeling→Wachtwoord.
2 Geef een nieuw wachtwoord (alfanumeriek) in en selecteer
Doorgaan.
3 Geef het wachtwoord nogmaals in en selecteer OK.
›De SIM- of USIM-kaart vergrendelen
U kunt het toestel vergrendelen door de PIN-code die u bij de SIM-
of USIM-kaart hebt gekregen, te inschakelen.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→
Beveiliging→SIM-vergrendeling instellen→SIM-kaart
vergrendelen.
2 Geef uw PIN-code in en selecteer OK.
Als de PIN-blokkering is ingeschakeld, moet u telkens bij het
inschakelen van het toestel de PIN-code ingeven.
● Als u te vaak een onjuiste PIN-code ingeeft, wordt de SIM-
of USIM-kaart geblokkeerd. In dat geval moet u een PUKcode (PIN Unlock Key) ingeven om de blokkering van de
SIM- of USIM-kaart op te heffen.
● Als u een onjuiste PUK-code voor de SIM- of USIMkaart ingeeft, moet u de blokkering van de kaart bij de
serviceprovider laten opheffen.28
Aan de slag
Tekst ingeven
U kunt tekst invoeren door tekens op het virtuele toetsenbord te
selecteren of woorden in de microfoon in te spreken.
In sommige talen kunt u geen tekst ingeven. Als u tekst
wilt ingeven, moet u de schrijftaal wijzigen in een van de
ondersteunde talen.
› Tekstinvoer met het Android-toetsenbord
Geef tekst in door alfanumerieke toetsen te selecteren en u kunt
de volgende toetsen gebruiken:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
8
9
Nummer Functie
1
De cursor verplaatsen naar het volgende
tekstinvoerveld.
2
Hiermee kunt u wisselen tussen de cijfer-/
symboolstand en de ABC-stand.
3
Wisselen tussen hoofdletters en kleine letters;
tekstinvoer in hoofdletters vergrendelen
(dubbeltikken).
4
De tekstinvoermethode wijzigen;
keyboardinstellingen openen.
5
Een emoticon invoegen; open de lijst met
emoticons (tikken en vasthouden).
6 Uw invoer wissen.
7 Een nieuwe regel beginnen.29
Aan de slag
Nummer Functie
8
Tekst via spraak ingeven. Deze functie is
alleen beschikbaar wanneer u de functie voor
spraakinvoer activeert.
9 Een spatie invoegen.
› Tekst kopiëren en plakken
U kunt uit een tekstveld tekst kopiëren en plakken in een andere
applicatie.
1 Blijf een deel van de tekst aanraken.
2 Sleep of om de tekst te selecteren die moet worden
gekopieerd.
3 Selecteer KOPIËREN of KNIPPEN om de tekst op het klembord
te plaatsen.
4 In een andere applicatie klikt u op het punt waar de tekst moet
worden ingevoegd en houdt u dit vast.
5 Selecteer PLAKKEN om de tekst van het klembord in het
tekstveld te plakken.Web
30
Web
Browser
Leer hoe u uw favoriete webpagina's kunt openen en opslaan.
● Er worden mogelijk extra kosten in rekening gebracht
voor het gebruik van internet en het downloaden
van mediabestanden. Neem contact op met uw
serviceprovider voor informatie.
● Het webbrowsermenu kan afhankelijk van uw regio of
serviceprovider een andere naam hebben.
● Welke pictogrammen beschikbaar zijn, is afhankelijk van
uw regio of serviceprovider.
›Webpagina’s bekijken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser om uw
startpagina te openen.
Als u een specifieke webpagina wilt openen, selecteert u het
URL-invoerveld en voert u het webadres van de webpagina in.
2 Navigeer door webpagina's met de volgende toetsen:
Het bovenstaande scherm kan er anders uitzien, afhankelijk
van uw regio of serviceprovider.Web
31
Nummer Functie
1 Het huidige tabblad sluiten.
2
Terug- of vooruitgaan naar webpagina's in de
geschiedenis.
3
De huidige webpagina opnieuw laden; als
webpagina’s worden geladen, wordt dit
pictogram gewijzigd in .
4 Een nieuw venster openen.
5 Zoeken naar informatie.
6 Een lijst met webbrowseropties openen.
7
Een lijst met opgeslagen favorieten en de
recente browsergeschiedenis openen.
8 De huidige webpagina instellen als favoriet.
Gebruik tijdens het browsen van een webpagina de volgende
opties:
● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het scherm
en beweegt u ze uit elkaar (beweeg uw vingers naar elkaar toe
om uit te zoomen).
Als u kantelbewegingen hebt geactiveerd, kunt u in- of
uitzoomen door twee punten te blijven aanraken met
uw vingers en het toestel naar voren en naar achteren te
kantelen.
● Als u de huidige webpagina opnieuw wilt laden, selecteert u
→Vernieuwen.
● Als u achteruit of vooruit naar webpagina’s in de
browsergeschiedenis wilt, selecteert u →Volgende.
● Om een nieuw tabblad te openen selecteert u →Nieuw
tabblad.
● Als u een nieuw tabblad wilt openen waarin geen cookies
worden opgeslagen, selecteert u →Nieuw incognitotabblad.Web
32
● Als u het webadres van de webpagina naar anderen wilt
verzenden, selecteert u →Pagina delen.
● Als u naar tekst op de webpagina wilt zoeken, selecteert u →
Zoeken op pagina.
● Als u wilt overschakelen naar de desktopweergave, selecteert u
→Desktopversie opvragen.
● Als u de huidige webpagina wilt opslaan en later offline wilt
lezen, selecteert u →Opslaan voor offline lezen.
● Als u de details van een pagina wilt weergeven, selecteert u →
Pagina-infomatie.
● Als u de browserinstellingen wilt aanpassen, selecteert u →
Instellingen.
›Met spraak informatie zoeken
De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser.
2 Selecteer het URL-invoerveld.
3 Selecteer en spreek een trefwoord in de microfoon van het
apparaat.
Er wordt naar informatie en webpagina's gezocht die met het
trefwoord samenhangen.
›Meerdere pagina's openen
U kunt meerdere pagina's openen en schakelen tussen deze
pagina's.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser.
2 Selecteer om een nieuw tabblad te openen.
3 Open een andere webpagina in het nieuwe venster.
4 Als u wilt schakelen tussen de geopende vensters, selecteert u
de titel van een venster.Web
33
› Favoriete webpagina's opslaan
Als u het webadres van de webpagina kent, kunt u dit handmatig
als favoriet toevoegen.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser.
2 Voer een webadres in of navigeer naar een webpagina.
3 Selecteer om de huidige pagina als favoriet toe te voegen.
4 Voer een naam in voor de favoriet.
5 Voer het webadres in voor uw favoriete webpagina en kies
vervolgens een locatie om de favoriet toe te voegen (indien
noodzakelijk).
6 Selecteer OK.
Als u opties voor favorieten wilt gebruiken, selecteert u en blijft
u een favoriet aanraken:
● Selecteer Openen om de webpagina in het huidige venster te
openen.
● Selecteer Openen op nieuw tabblad om de webpagina in een
nieuw venster te openen.
● Selecteer Bladwijzer bewerken om de favoriet te bewerken.
● Als u een snelkoppeling naar de favoriet wilt toevoegen aan
het startscherm, selecteert u Snelkoppeling naar startpagina
toevoegen.
● Als u het webadres (de URL) van de webpagina naar anderen
wilt verzenden, selecteert u Link delen.
● Als u het webadres (de URL) van de webpagina wilt kopiëren,
selecteert u Link-URL kopiëren.
● Als u de favoriet wilt verwijderen, selecteert u Bladwijzer
verwijderen.
● Als u de webpagina wilt gebruiken als startpagina van de
browser, selecteert u Instellen als startpagina.Web
34
› Recente geschiedenis openen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Browser.
2 Selecteer →GESCHIEDENIS.
3 Selecteer een webpagina die u wilt openen.
Pulse
Zo leest u nieuwsartikelen op uw apparaat en voegt u feeds toe
voor uw favoriete nieuwsonderwerpen.
› Feeds lezen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Pulse.
2 Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, selecteert u Okay en
tikt u op het scherm om de hint te wissen.
3 Selecteer om feeds bij te werken.
Als u de feeds wilt lezen die u hebt toegevoegd aan uw lijst
met favorieten, selecteert u .
4 Scroll omhoog of omlaag om een feedbron te selecteren.
5 Scroll naar links of rechts en selecteer een feed.
Gebruik bij het lezen van de feed de volgende opties:
● Selecteer om de feed aan uw favorietenlijst toe te voegen.
● Selecteer of om de feed naar sociale netwerksites te
uploaden.
● Als u de feed naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u .
● Als u wilt teruggaan naar een feedlijst, selecteert u .
› Feedbronnen beheren
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Pulse.
2 Selecteer om de lijst met feedbronnen weer te geven.
3 Selecteer of om een feedbron toe te voegen of te
verwijderen.Web
35
Play Store
U kunt de functionaliteit van uw apparaat uitbreiden door extra
applicaties op basis van het Android-platform te installeren. Met
Play Store kunt u makkelijk en snel games en mobiele applicaties
aanschaffen.
De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
› Een applicatie downloaden en installeren
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Store.
U kunt ook WINKEL in de rechterbovenhoek van de lijst met
applicaties selecteren.
2 Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, selecteert u
Accepteren.
3 Zoek een applicatie en download deze naar het apparaat.
Wanneer de download is voltooid, installeert het apparaat de
applicatie automatisch.
› Een applicatie verwijderen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Store.
2 Selecteer .
3 Selecteer het item dat u wilt verwijderen.
4 Selecteer Verwijderen→OK.Web
36
YouTube
Leer hoe u video's via YouTube kunt bekijken en uploaden.
De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
› Video's kijken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer YouTube.
2 Selecteer een video.
3 Tik op een videoscherm en selecteer om een volledig
scherm weer te geven.
4 Regel het afspelen met de virtuele toetsen.
› Video's uploaden
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer YouTube.
2 Selecteer ACCOUNT.
3 Selecteer uw Google-account als dit is gekoppeld aan YouTube.
U kunt ook Account toevoegen selecteren en een account
instellen om u aan te melden bij YouTube.
4 Selecteer UPLOADEN en selecteer een video.
5 Geef de details voor de upload in en selecteer Uploaden.
Maps
Leer hoe u met Google Maps™ uw locatie zoekt, op de kaart naar
straten, steden of landen zoekt en een routebeschrijving krijgt.
● De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
● U moet locatieservices inschakelen om uw locatie te
vinden en op de kaart te kunnen zoeken. ► p. 70Web
37
› Zoeken naar een specifieke locatie
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Maps.
De kaart geeft uw huidige locatie weer.
2 Selecteer .
3 Geef een trefwoord voor de locatie in.
Als u een locatie wilt zoeken met uw stem, selecteert u .
4 Selecteer de locatie waarvoor u de details wilt weergeven.
● Selecteer Zoekresultaten om alle zoekresultaten weer te
geven.
● Als u uw huidige locatie wilt weergeven, selecteert u .
● Als u een plaats in de buurt wilt zoeken, selecteert u .
● Als u een routebeschrijving naar een specifieke bestemming
wilt ophalen, selecteert u .
● Als u lagen aan de kaart wilt toevoegen, selecteert u .
● Als u een lijst met andere opties wilt openen, selecteert u .
● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het
scherm en breng ze langzaam bij elkaar of verder uit
elkaar. U kunt ook dubbeltikken op het scherm. Als u wilt
terugkeren naar het oorspronkelijk formaat, dubbeltikt u op
het scherm.
● Als u een ster aan de locatie wilt toevoegen, selecteert u de
ballon met de locatienaam → .
› Routebeschrijvingen naar een specifieke
bestemming opvragen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Maps.
2 Selecteer .
3 Geef het adres van de startlocatie en de eindbestemming in.
Als u een adres uit uw contactenlijst of plaatsen met een ster
wilt invoegen of de locatie op de kaart wilt aanwijzen, selecteer
dan → een optie.Web
38
4 Selecteer een reismethode (auto, bus of lopen) en selecteer
Tonen.
De route wordt aangegeven op de kaart. Afhankelijk van de
geselecteerde reismethode kunnen meerdere routes worden
weergegeven.
5 Wanneer u klaar bent, selecteert u →Kaart wissen.
Latitude
Leer hoe u uw locatie met uw vrienden kunt delen en locaties van
vrienden kunt bekijken via Google Latitude™.
De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Latitude.
Het toestel meldt zich automatisch bij Latitude aan.
2 Selecteer →Vrienden toevoegen→ een optie.
3 Selecteer een vriend die u wilt toevoegen of geef een
e-mailadres in en selecteer Ja.
Wanneer uw vriend de uitnodiging accepteert, kunt u locaties
delen.
4 Selecteer een vriend in de lijst.
De locaties van uw vrienden worden op de kaart gemarkeerd
door hun foto’s.
Plaatsen
Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u een plaats in de buurt kunt
zoeken.
De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Plaatsen.
2 Selecteer een categorie.
Uw toestel zoekt naar plaatsen in de buurt van uw huidige
locatie, die betrekking hebben op de categorie.Web
39
3 Selecteer een plaatsnaam om de details te bekijken.
Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het bekijken van gegevens:
● Selecteer om de plaats op de kaart weer te geven.
● Selecteer om de route naar die plaats weer te geven.
● Als u het telefoonnummer van de plaats wilt weergeven,
selecteert u .
Navigatie
Hier leest u hoe u het GPS-navigatiesysteem kunt gebruiken om
met uw stem uw bestemming te zoeken en weer te geven.
● Navigatiekaarten, uw huidige locatie en andere
navigatiegegevens kunnen afwijken van uw
werkelijk locatiegegevens. U moet altijd letten op de
omstandigheden op de weg, verkeer en andere factoren
die mogelijk invloed hebben op uw rijden, en alle
veiligheidswaarschuwingen en regels volgen tijdens het
rijden.
● De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Navigatie.
2 Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, selecteert u
Accepteren.
3 Geef met een van de volgende methoden uw bestemming in:
● Bestemming inspreken: spreek uw bestemming in,
bijvoorbeeld “Navigeren naar bestemming“.
● Bestemming typen: voer uw bestemming in met het
virtuele toetsenbord.
● Contacten: selecteer uw bestemming met een adres van uw
contacten.
● Plaatsen met ster: selecteer uw bestemming in de lijst met
plaatsen met een ster.
4 Volg de instructies op het scherm om de navigatieservice te
gebruiken.Communiceren
40
Communiceren
Google Mail
U kunt nieuwe e-mailberichten van Gmail™ naar uw Postvak IN
downloaden. Wanneer u deze applicatie opent, verschijnt het
scherm van het Postvak IN. In de titelbalk wordt het totale aantal
ongelezen berichten weergegeven en de ongelezen berichten
worden vet weergegeven.
● De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
● Het menu Google Mail kan, afhankelijk van uw regio of
serviceprovider, een andere naam hebben.
› Een e-mailbericht verzenden
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Google Mail→ .
2 Selecteer het ontvangersveld en geef een e-mailadres in.
3 Selecteer het onderwerpveld en geef een onderwerp in.
4 Selecteer het tekstveld en geef de e-mailtekst in.
● Selecteer om een foto bij te sluiten.
● Selecteer rechts van een bijlagenaam om de foto in de
bijlage te verwijderen.
5 Selecteer VERZENDEN om het bericht te verzenden.
Als u offline bent of zich buiten het servicegebied bevindt,
wordt het bericht in de berichtenthread bewaard totdat u
weer online en in uw servicegebied bent.Communiceren
41
› Een e-mailbericht weergeven
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Google Mail.
2 Selecteer om de berichtenlijst bij te werken.
3 Selecteer een e-mailbericht.
In de berichtweergave hebt u de volgende opties:
● Als u een nieuw bericht wilt opstellen, selecteert u .
● Als u een e-mailonderwerp wilt zoeken, selecteert u .
● Als u het bericht wilt archiveren, selecteert u .
● Als u het bericht wilt verwijderen, selecteert u .
● Als u een label aan het bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u .
● Scroll naar links of rechts om naar de volgende of de vorige
pagina te gaan.
● Als u het bericht wilt beantwoorden, selecteert u .
● Als u uw antwoord naar alle ontvangers van het bericht wilt
sturen, selecteert u .
● Als u het bericht naar anderen wilt doorsturen, selecteert u .
● Als u een ster aan het bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u .
● Als u een bijlage wilt weergeven, selecteert u WEERGEVEN.
Als u het bericht op uw apparaat wilt opslaan, selecteert u
OPSLAAN.
● Als u het bericht op ongelezen wilt zetten, selecteert u →
Markeren als ongelezen.
● Als u het bericht wilt markeren als belangrijk, selecteert u →
Markeren als belangrijk.
● Als u het bericht wilt verbergen, selecteert u →Negeren.
● Als u het bericht wilt registreren in de spamlijst, selecteert u →
Spam rapporteren.
● Als u de berichten opnieuw wilt laden, selecteert u →
Vernieuwen.
● Als u een label aan een bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u →
Labels beheren.
● Als u de e-mailinstellingen wilt aanpassen, selecteert u →
Instellingen.
Beschikbare opties kunnen verschillen afhankelijk van de
account.Communiceren
42
E-mail
Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u e-mailberichten via uw
persoonlijke of zakelijke e-mailaccount kunt verzenden en bekijken.
› Een e-mailaccount instellen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer E-mail.
2 Geef uw e-mailadres en wachtwoord in.
3 Selecteer Volgende (voor algemene e-mailaccounts) of
Handmatig instellen (voor e-mailaccounts van andere
bedrijven).
4 Volg de instructies op het scherm.
5 Als u meer e-mailaccounts wilt toevoegen, selecteert u →
Instellingen→ACCOUNT TOEVOEGEN en herhaalt u stap 2-4.
Als u klaar bent met het instellen van de e-mailaccount, worden
de e-mailberichten naar uw toestel gedownload. Als u meer dan
twee accounts hebt gemaakt, kunt u kiezen welke e-mailaccount u
gebruikt. Selecteer linksboven in het scherm een accountnaam en
selecteer de account waarvoor u de berichten wilt ophalen.
› Een e-mailbericht verzenden
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer E-mail→ .
2 Voeg ontvangers van uw bericht toe.
Geef e-mailadressen handmatig in en scheid ze van elkaar met
een puntkomma.
3 Selecteer + CC/BCC en voeg meer ontvangers toe.
4 Selecteer het onderwerpveld en geef een onderwerp in.
5 Selecteer het tekstveld en geef uw berichttekst in.
6 Selecteer → bestand om toe te voegen.
7 Selecteer VERZENDEN om het bericht te verzenden.
Als u offline bent of zich buiten het servicegebied bevindt,
wordt het bericht in het Postvak UIT bewaard totdat u weer
online en in uw servicegebied bent.Communiceren
43
› Een e-mailbericht weergeven
Wanneer u een e-mailaccount opent, kunt u eerder opgehaalde
e-mailberichten offline bekijken of verbinding met de e-mailserver
maken om nieuwe berichten te bekijken. Nadat u e-mailberichten
hebt opgehaald, kunt u ze offline bekijken.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer E-mail.
2 Selecteer om de berichtenlijst bij te werken.
3 Selecteer een e-mailbericht.
In de berichtweergave hebt u de volgende opties:
● U gaat naar het vorige of volgende bericht door Nieuwer of
Ouder te selecteren.
● Als u een nieuw bericht wilt opstellen, selecteert u .
● Als u een e-mailonderwerp wilt zoeken, selecteert u .
● Als u het bericht wilt verwijderen, selecteert u .
● Om het bericht naar een andere map te verplaatsen selecteert u
→ een map.
● Als u het bericht wilt beantwoorden, selecteert u .
● Als u uw antwoord naar alle ontvangers van het bericht wilt
sturen, selecteert u .
● Als u het bericht naar anderen wilt doorsturen, selecteert u .
● Als u een ster aan het bericht wilt toevoegen, selecteert u .
● Als u het bericht op ongelezen wilt zetten, selecteert u →
Markeren als ongelezen.
● Als u de berichten opnieuw wilt laden, selecteert u →
Vernieuwen.
● Als u de e-mailinstellingen wilt aanpassen, selecteert u →
Instellingen.
● Selecteer het tabblad bijlage om een bijlage weer te geven
of op te slaan. Als u een bijlage wilt weergeven, selecteert u
WEERGEVEN. Als u het bericht op uw apparaat wilt opslaan,
selecteert u OPSLAAN.
De beschikbare opties kunnen verschillen in de liggende en
staande weergave.Communiceren
44
Talk
Chat met vrienden en familie via Google Talk™.
De beschikbaarheid van deze functie is afhankelijk van uw
regio of serviceprovider.
›Uw status instellen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Talk.
2 Voeg uw Google-account toe (indien noodzakelijk).
3 Pas uw status, afbeelding en weergavebericht aan.
› Vrienden aan de vriendenlijst toevoegen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Talk→ .
2 Geef een e-mailadres van de vriend in en selecteer GEREED.
Wanneer uw vriend de uitnodiging accepteert, wordt de vriend
aan uw vriendenlijst toegevoegd.
› Een chatsessie starten
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Talk.
2 Selecteer een vriend uit de vriendenlijst. Het chatscherm wordt
geopend.
3 Geef een bericht in en verstuur het.
● Om meer vrienden aan een chatsessie toe te voegen
selecteert u →Toevoegen aan chat.
● Selecteer in de vriendenlijst een vriend om tussen actieve
chatsessies om te schakelen.
● Als u videochatten wilt gebruiken, selecteert u .
● Als u chatten wilt gebruiken, selecteert u .
● Om de chatsessie te beëindigen, selecteert u →Chat
beëindigen.Communiceren
45
Google+
Hier vindt u informatie over het gebruik van de sociale
netwerkservice Google. U kunt groepen maken en chatberichten
verzenden en ontvangen en uw foto's te uploaden.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Google+.
Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, volgt u de
instructies op het scherm om de accountinstellingen te
voltooien.
2 Selecteer een functie voor sociale netwerken.
Messenger
Hier vindt u informatie over chatten met vrienden en familie via de
chatservice Google+.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Messenger.
Als u deze applicatie voor het eerst start, volgt u de
instructies op het scherm om de accountinstellingen te
voltooien.
2 Geef een bericht in en verstuur het.46
Entertainment
Entertainment
Play Music
Zo luistert u met Play Music naar uw favoriete muziek als u
onderweg bent.
● Afhankelijk van de software in uw toestel worden
bepaalde bestandsindelingen niet ondersteund.
● Als een bestand groter is dan het beschikbare geheugen,
kan er een fout optreden bij het openen van het bestand.
● De afspeelkwaliteit kan verschillen afhankelijk van het
inhoudstype.
● Sommige bestanden kunnen mogelijk niet goed worden
afgespeeld, afhankelijk van de manier waarop ze zijn
gecodeerd.
›Muziekbestanden op uw apparaat zetten
U moet eerst bestanden overzetten naar uw toestel:
● Draadloos downloaden van internet. ► p. 30
● Ontvangen via Bluetooth. ► p. 67
● Synchroniseren met Windows Media Player 11. ► p. 62
›Muziek afspelen
Nadat u muziekbestanden hebt overgezet naar uw toestel:
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Music.
2 Selecteer een muziekcategorie.
U kunt de weergavemodus boven aan het scherm wijzigen.47
Entertainment
3 Selecteer een muziekbestand.
4 Regel het afspelen met de volgende symbolen:
Pictogram Functie
De shufflestand inschakelen.
De herhaalstand wijzigen (uit, een
bestand herhalen of alle bestanden
herhalen).
Het afspelen opnieuw starten; ga terug
naar het vorige bestand (dubbeltikken).
Het afspelen onderbreken. Selecteer
om door te gaan met afspelen.
Ga verder naar het volgende bestand.
Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het afspelen van muziek:
● Als u een geluidseffect wilt kiezen, selecteert u →
Geluidseffecten.
● Als u een muziekbestand wilt toevoegen aan een afspeellijst,
selecteert u →Toev. aan afspeellijst.
● Als u het muziekbestand wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →
Verwijderen.
› Een afspeellijst maken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Play Music.
2 Selecteer een muziekcategorie → een muziekbestand.
3 Selecteer →Toev. aan afspeellijst→Nieuwe afspeellijst.
4 Geef een titel voor uw nieuwe afspeellijst in en selecteer OK.48
Entertainment
Camera
Hier wordt beschreven hoe u foto's en video's kunt maken en
weergeven.
● De camera wordt automatisch uitgeschakeld wanneer u
deze een bepaalde tijd niet gebruikt.
● De geheugencapaciteit kan variëren naar gelang
de opnameomstandigheden of de scène die wordt
opgenomen.
› Een foto nemen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Camera.
2 Richt de lens op het onderwerp en pas eventueel de
compositie aan.
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
Nummer Functie
1 Statusinstelling weergeven.
2
De image-viewer openen om de foto’s en
video’s te bekijken die u heeft gemaakt.
3
Wisselen tussen de cameralens aan de
voorzijde en aan de achterzijde.
4 Een foto nemen.
5 De camera-instellingen wijzigen.49
Entertainment
Nummer Functie
6
In- of uitzoomen.
● Om in te zoomen schuift u omhoog naar
.
● Om uit te zoomen schuift u omlaag naar
.
7
Overschakelen naar de camcorder of
panoramamodus.
3 Selecteer de blauwe knop om een foto te maken.
De foto wordt automatisch opgeslagen.
› Een panoramafoto maken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Camera.
2 Selecteer het panoramapictogram om naar panoramamodus
over te schakelen.
3 Richt de lens op het punt waar u wilt beginnen met het maken
van een panoramafoto.
4 Selecteer de groene knop om te gaan opnemen en verplaats
de lens langzaam in één richting tot deze het eindpunt van het
panorama heeft bereikt.
5 Selecteer de groene knop opnieuw om de opname te stoppen.
De foto wordt automatisch opgeslagen.
Nadat de foto is gemaakt, selecteert u de afbeeldingsviewer om
deze weer te geven.
● Als u de foto direct naar de anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u
een optie aan de rechterkant van het scherm.
● Tik nogmaals op het scherm of selecteer het pictogram van de
image-viewer aan de rechterkant om meer foto’s weer te geven.
Als u meer foto’s wilt zien, scrollt u naar links of rechts. U kunt
ook op het scherm tikken en de miniaturen van foto’s onder aan
het scherm selecteren.50
Entertainment
● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het scherm
en breng ze langzaam bij elkaar of verder uit elkaar. U kunt ook
dubbeltikken op het scherm. Als u wilt terugkeren naar het
oorspronkelijk formaat, dubbeltikt u op het scherm.
● Als u een foto naar anderen wilt verzenden om te delen,
selecteert u → een optie.
● Als u een foto wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen.
● Als u een diashow wilt starten, selecteert u →Diavoorstelling.
Klik op het scherm om de diashow te stoppen.
● Als u de foto wilt bewerken met de afbeeldingseditor, selecteert
u →Bewerken.
● Als u de afbeelding linksom wilt draaien, selecteert u →
Linksom draaien.
● Als u de afbeelding rechtsom wilt draaien, selecteert u →
Rechtsom draaien.
● Als u een gedeelte uit de afbeelding wilt snijden, selecteert u
→Bijsnijden.
● Als u de afbeelding als achtergrond of afbeelding voor een
contact wilt instellen, selecteert u →Foto instellen als.
● Als u details van een foto wilt weergeven, selecteert u →
Details.
› Camera-instellingen wijzigen
Selecteer voor het maken van een foto en selecteer een van de
volgende pictogrammen om de camerainstellingen aan te passen:
Pictogram Optie Functie
Flitsmodus
De flitserinstelling wijzigen. U kunt de
flitser handmatig in- of uitschakelen.
Witbalans
De kleurbalans aan de
lichtomstandigheden aanpassen.
Belichting
De belichtingswaarde aanpassen om
de helderheid te wijzigen.
Scène
modus
De scènestand wijzigen. 51
Entertainment
Pictogram Optie Functie
Camerainstellingen
● Locatie opslaan: locatiegegevens
opnemen bij de foto's.
● Grootte van foto: selecteer de
grootte van uw foto’s.
● Scherpstelmodus: een
scherpstelmodus selecteren. U
kunt close-ups maken, of instellen
dat de camera automatisch op het
onderwerp of menselijke gezichten
scherpstelt.
● Standaardwaarden herstellen:
de camera-instellingen resetten.
Selecteer OK om de camerainstellingen te resetten.
Selecteer om terug te keren naar het voorbeeldscherm.
› Een video opnemen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Camera.
2 Camcorderpictogram om naar camcordermodus over te
schakelen.
3 Richt de lens op het onderwerp en pas eventueel de
compositie aan.
1
2
3
4
5
652
Entertainment
Nummer Functie
1
De image-viewer openen om de foto’s en
video’s te bekijken die u heeft gemaakt.
2
Overschakelen naar de voorste camera en een
video van uzelf opnemen.
3 Een video opnemen.
4 De camera-instellingen wijzigen.
5
In- of uitzoomen.
● Om in te zoomen schuift u omhoog naar
.
● Om uit te zoomen schuift u omlaag naar
.
6
Schakel over naar de camera- of
panoramamodus.
4 Selecteer de rode knop om de opname te starten.
5 Selecteer de rode knop opnieuw om de opname te stoppen.
De video wordt automatisch opgeslagen.
Nadat een video is gemaakt, selecteert u de afbeeldingsviewer om
deze weer te geven.
● Als u de video direct naar de anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert
u een optie aan de rechterkant van het scherm.
● Tik nogmaals op het scherm of selecteer het pictogram van
de image-viewer aan de rechterkant om meer video’s weer te
geven. Als u meer video’s wilt zien, scrollt u naar links of rechts.
U kunt ook op het scherm tikken en de miniaturen van video’s
onder aan het scherm selecteren.
● Als u een video wilt afspelen, selecteert u .
● Als u een video naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u →
een optie.
● Als u een video wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen.
● Als u details van een video wilt weergeven, selecteert u →
Details.53
Entertainment
› Camcorderinstellingen aanpassen
Selecteer voor het maken van een video en selecteer een van
de volgende pictogrammen om de camerainstellingen aan te
passen:
Pictogram Optie Functie
Flitsmodus
De flitserinstelling wijzigen. U
kunt de flitser handmatig in- of
uitschakelen.
Witbalans
De kleurbalans aan de
lichtomstandigheden aanpassen.
Effecten Een speciaal effect toepassen.
Time-lapseinterval
Stelt de intervaltijd in voor het
opnemen van een serie video’s.
Videokwaliteit
Selecteer een optie voor
videokwaliteit.
Camerainstellingen
● Locatie opslaan: locatiegegevens
opnemen bij de foto's.
● Standaardwaarden herstellen:
de camera-instellingen resetten.
Selecteer OK om de camerainstellingen te resetten.
Selecteer om terug te keren naar het voorbeeldscherm.54
Entertainment
Galerij
Hier vindt u informatie over het bekijken van foto's en video's in
het geheugen van het toestel.
● Afhankelijk van de software in uw toestel worden
bepaalde bestandsindelingen niet ondersteund.
● Als een bestand groter is dan het beschikbare geheugen,
kan er een fout optreden bij het openen van het bestand.
● De afspeelkwaliteit kan verschillen afhankelijk van het
inhoudstype.
● Sommige bestanden kunnen mogelijk niet goed worden
afgespeeld, afhankelijk van de manier waarop ze zijn
gecodeerd.
› Een foto bekijken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Galerij.
2 Selecteer een map → een afbeelding.
Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het bekijken van een foto:
● Als u meer foto's wilt zien, scrollt u naar links of rechts.
● Als u wilt in- of uitzoomen, plaatst u twee vingers op het scherm
en breng ze langzaam bij elkaar of verder uit elkaar. U kunt ook
dubbeltikken op het scherm. Als u wilt terugkeren naar het
oorspronkelijk formaat, dubbeltikt u op het scherm.
Als u kantelbewegingen heeft geactiveerd, kunt u in- of
uitzoomen door twee punten aan te raken met uw vingers
en het apparaat naar voren en achteren te kantelen.
● Als u een foto naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u →
een optie.
● Als u een foto wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen.
● Als u een diashow wilt starten, selecteert u →Diavoorstelling.
Klik op het scherm om de diashow te stoppen.
● Als u de foto wilt bewerken met de afbeeldingseditor, selecteert
u →Bewerken.
● Als u de afbeelding linksom wilt draaien, selecteert u →
Linksom draaien.55
Entertainment
● Als u de afbeelding rechtsom wilt draaien, selecteert u →
Rechtsom draaien.
● Als u een gedeelte uit de afbeelding wilt snijden, selecteert u
→Bijsnijden.
● Als u de afbeelding als achtergrond of afbeelding voor een
contact wilt instellen, selecteert u →Foto instellen als.
● Als u details van een foto wilt weergeven, selecteert u →
Details.
› Een video afspelen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Galerij.
2 Selecteer een map → een video.
3 Regel het afspelen met de virtuele toetsen.
Gebruik de volgende opties tijdens het afspelen van een video:
● Als u een video naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u →
een optie.
● Als u een foto wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →Verwijderen.
● Als u details van een video wilt weergeven, selecteert u →
Details.
Movie Studio
U kunt video's bewerken en verschillende effecten toepassen.
● Sommige videobestanden in Galerij kunnen mogelijk niet
worden weergegeven afhankelijk van de videoresoluties
en codecs.
● De afspeelkwaliteit kan verschillen afhankelijk van het
inhoudstype.
● Sommige bestanden kunnen mogelijk niet goed worden
afgespeeld, afhankelijk van de manier waarop ze zijn
gecodeerd.56
Entertainment
› Een film maken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Movie Studio.
2 Selecteer Nieuw project maken.
3 Voer een naam in voor het project en selecteer OK.
4 Selecteer TOEVOEGEN→ een optie.
● Selecteer Een video opnemen om een nieuwe video te
maken.
● Als u een nieuwe foto wilt maken, selecteert u Een foto
maken.
● Selecteer Videoclip importeren om een videobestand toe
te voegen.
● Selecteer Afbeelding importeren om een afbeeldingsbestand
toe te voegen.
Selecteer om nog een video vóór of na een item toe te
voegen.
5 Gebruik de volgende opties om een item te bewerken:
● Selecteer om de tijdsruimte waarin een afbeelding verschijnt
te wijzigen de afbeeldingsminiatuur en sleep de blauwe
hendels naar links of rechts.
● Als u een segment van een video wilt bijsnijden tikt u op de
videominiatuur en versleept u de hendels aan beide kanten.
● Als u afbeeldingen of video's opnieuw wilt ordenen, blijft u
een item aanraken en sleept u het naar een nieuwe locatie.
● Om een titel aan een afbeelding of video toe te voegen tikt u
op een item een selecteert u TITEL→Titel toevoegen.
● Om effecten tussen afbeeldingen of video’s toe te voegen
tikt u op een item en selecteert u EFFECT→ een effectoptie.
U kunt ook overlangs effecten toevoegen door aan beide
zijden van het item te selecteren.
● Om een geluidsspoor aan uw film toe te voegen selecteert u
onder aan de tijdlijn.
● Om afbeeldingen of video’s te verwijderen klikt u op een
item en selecteert u vervolgens →Verwijderen.57
Entertainment
6 Selecteer GEREED (indien noodzakelijk) als u klaar bent.
7 Als u klaar bent met bewerken, selecteer dan →Film
exporteren.
8 Een resolutieoptie selecteren →Exporteren.
› Een film afspelen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Movie Studio.
2 Selecteer een geëxporteerde film.
3 Selecteer →Geëxporteerde film afspelen.
Als u de film naar anderen wilt verzenden tijdens het afspelen,
selecteert u → een optie.
› Een film delen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Movie Studio.
2 Selecteer een geëxporteerde film.
3 Selecteer →Film delen.Persoonlijke gegevens
58
Persoonlijke gegevens
Personen
Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u een lijst met uw persoonlijke
of zakelijke contacten kunt maken en beheren. U kunt voor
uw contacten namen, telefoonnummers, e-mailadressen,
verjaardagen en nog veel meer opslaan.
› Een contact maken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen.
2 Voeg uw Google-account toe (indien noodzakelijk).
3 Selecteer ALLE→ .
4 Selecteer OK als u het nieuwe contact wilt synchroniseren met
uw huidige account. Om het contact aan een andere account
toe te voegen selecteert u Nieuw account toevoegen en volgt
u de instructies op het scherm om een account toe te voegen.
Als u meer dan één account hebt, selecteert u de account
waaraan u het contact wilt toevoegen.
5 Geef de contactgegevens in.
6 Selecteer GEREED om een contact aan het geheugen toe te
voegen.
› Een contact zoeken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen.
2 Selecteer en voer de contactgegevens in het
tekstinvoerveld in.
3 Selecteer de naam van het contact.
Zodra u een contact hebt gevonden, kunt u de volgende opties
gebruiken:
● Als u het contact wilt instellen als favoriet, selecteert u .
● Als u de contactgegevens wilt bewerken, selecteert u .Persoonlijke gegevens
59
● Als u het contact naar anderen wilt verzenden, selecteert u →
Delen→ een optie.
● Als u de contactpersoon wilt verwijderen, selecteert u →
Verwijderen.
›Uw profiel instellen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen.
2 Selecteer ALLE→Mijn profiel instellen.
3 Geef uw persoonlijke gegevens op en selecteer GEREED.
› Een contactgroep maken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen.
2 Selecteer GROEPEN→ .
3 Voer een naam in voor de groep en zoek leden uit de
contactenlijst.
4 Selecteer GEREED wanneer u klaar bent.
› Contacten importeren of exporteren
U kunt bestanden (in vcf-indeling) importeren van of exporteren
naar het interne geheugen van uw apparaat.
Contactbestanden importeren
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen.
2 Selecteer →Importeren/exporteren→Importeren van
SIM-kaart of Importeren uit opslag.
3 Selecteer een account waar u het contact aan wilt toevoegen.
4 Selecteer een optie voor het importeren van één contact,
meerdere contacten of alle contacten en selecteer OK.
5 Selecteer de contacten die u wilt importeren en selecteer OK.Persoonlijke gegevens
60
Contactbestanden exporteren
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Personen.
2 Selecteer →Importeren/exporteren→Exporteren naar
opslag.
3 Selecteer OK ter bevestiging.
Agenda
Zo maakt en beheert u dagelijkse, wekelijkse of maandelijkse
gebeurtenissen.
› Een afspraak maken
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Agenda.
2 Voeg uw Google-account toe (indien noodzakelijk).
3 Selecteer .
4 Geef de details in voor de afspraak en selecteer GEREED.
›De weergavestand wijzigen
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Agenda.
2 Selecteer een weergavemodus boven in de agenda.
● DAG: blokken van een uur voor één hele dag.
● WEEK: blokken van een uur voor de dagen van één hele
week.
● MAAND: een volledige maand in een weergave.
● AGENDA: een lijst met alle afspraken en feestdagen die
gepland zijn voor een bepaalde periode.Persoonlijke gegevens
61
› Een gebeurtenis weergeven
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Agenda.
2 Selecteer een datum in de agenda.
3 Selecteer een afspraak om de details te bekijken.
● Selecteer om de gebeurtenis te bewerken.
● Selecteer →OK om de gebeurtenis te verwijderen.
› Een alarm voor een afspraak stoppen
Als u een herinnering instelt voor een agendagebeurtenis, wordt
er een alarm weergegeven op de ingestelde tijd.
1 Selecteer op de systeembalk.
2 Selecteer de afspraakmelding.
3 Selecteer een afspraak om de details te bekijken.
Als u het alarm voor een afspraak op de sluimerstand wilt
zetten of wilt uitschakelen, selecteert u 5 min. uitstellen of
Allemaal verwijderen.Connectiviteit
62
Connectiviteit
Pc-verbindingen
Hier vindt u informatie over hoe u het apparaat met de
meegeleverde USB-kabel in diverse USB-verbindingsstanden op
een pc kunt aansluiten. Door het apparaat op een PC aan te sluiten
kunt u bestanden met Windows Media Player synchroniseren en
gegevens direct van en naar het apparaat verzenden.
Als u pc-verbinding wilt gebruiken, moet u de modus voor USBfouten opsporen uitschakelen. Open de lijst met applicaties en
selecteer Instellingen→Opties voor ontwikkelaars en schakel
het selectievakje uit naast USB-foutopsporing.
Verwijder de USB-kabel niet uit een computer terwijl
het toestel bezig is met het overbrengen of openen van
gegevens. Hierdoor kunnen gegevens verloren gaan of kan
het toestel beschadigd raken.
Voor de beste resultaten sluit u de USB-kabel rechtstreeks
aan op een USB-poort op een computer. Bij gebruik van een
USB-hub kan de gegevensoverdracht mislukken.
› Synchroniseren met Windows Media Player
Controleer of Windows Media Player op de pc is geïnstalleerd.
1 Sluit de USB-kabel aan op de multifunctionele aansluiting van
het apparaat en op een pc met Windows Media Player.
Er wordt een pop-upbericht op de computer weergegeven
zodra de verbinding tot stand is gekomen.
2 Open Windows Media Player om muziekbestanden te
synchroniseren.
3 Bewerk of typ de naam van het apparaat in het pop-upvenster
(indien nodig).
4 Selecteer de gewenste muziekbestanden en sleep deze naar
de synchronisatielijst.
5 Start de synchronisatie.Connectiviteit
63
Wi-Fi
Hier vindt u informatie over het gebruik van de draadloze
netwerkvoorzieningen van uw toestel, waarmee u verbinding kunt
maken met elk draadloos LAN (WLAN) dat compatibel is met de
IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n-normen.
Overal waar er een draadloos toegangspunt of 'hotspot' aanwezig
is, kunt u verbinding met internet of andere netwerkapparaten
maken.
Het toestel gebruikt een niet-geharmoniseerde frequentie
en is bedoeld voor gebruik in alle Europese landen. Het
WLAN mag in de EU zonder beperkingen binnenshuis
worden gebruikt, maar kan niet buitenshuis worden
gebruikt.
›De Wi-Fi-functie inschakelen
Open de applicatielijst, selecteer Instellingen en sleep vervolgens
de schuifbalk naar AAN naast Wi-Fi.
Een Wi-Fi-functie die op de achtergrond wordt uitgevoerd,
verbruikt ook batterijvermogen. Activeer de functie daarom
alleen wanneer dit nodig is, om de batterij te sparen.
› Zoek een Wi-Fi-netwerk en maak hiermee
verbinding
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi.
Het apparaat zoekt automatisch naar beschikbare Wi-Finetwerken.
2 Selecteer een netwerk.
3 Voer het wachtwoord voor het netwerk in (indien
noodzakelijk).
4 Selecteer Verbinden.Connectiviteit
64
›Handmatig een Wi-Fi-netwerk toevoegen
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi→
NETWERK TOEVOEGEN.
2 Voer een SSID voor het netwerk in en selecteer het type
beveiliging.
3 Stel de beveiligingsinstellingen in, afhankelijk van het
geselecteerde beveiligingstype.
4 Selecteer Opslaan.
› Verbinding maken met een Wi-Fi-netwerk met
behulp van Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
U kunt via WPS verbinding maken met een beveiligd netwerk.
Verbinding maken via een WPS-knop
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi.
2 Selecteer een netwerk dat wordt aangegeven als WPS in de
lijst en schakel het selectievakje naast Geavanceerde opties
weergeven in.
3 Selecteer de vervolgkeuzelijst naast WPS en selecteer
vervolgens Knop indrukken→Verbinden.
4 Druk dan binnen 2 minuten op een WPS-knop op het
toegangspunt.
Verbinding maken via een WPS PIN
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi.
2 Selecteer een netwerk dat wordt aangegeven als WPS
en schakel het selectievakje naast Geavanceerde opties
weergeven in.
3 Selecteer de vervolgkeuzelijst naast WPS en selecteer
vervolgens Pincode van toegangspunt of Pincode van dit
apparaat.
4 Geef op het toegangspunt de PIN-code in en druk op de
startknop.Connectiviteit
65
› Statische IP-instellingen instellen
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi.
2 Selecteer een netwerk en schakel het selectievakje naast
Geavanceerde opties weergeven in.
3 Selecteer de vervolgkeuzelijst naast IP-instellingen in.
4 Selecteer passief.
5 Wijzig de IP-instellingen voor het netwerk, zoals IP-adres,
lengte van voorvoegsel voor netwerk, Gateway en DNS.
6 Selecteer Verbinden.
›Wi-Fi-instellingen aanpassen
1 Open de applicatielijst en selecteer Instellingen→Wi-Fi→
→Geavanceerd.
2 Wijzig de volgende opties:
Optie Functie
Netwerkmelding
Instellen dat u een melding ontvangt als
er een open Wi-Fi-netwerk beschikbaar is.
Wifi behouden in
slaapstand
Instellen of de Wi-Fi-functie ingeschakeld
moet blijven in de slaapstand.
MAC-adres
Het MAC-adres voor het apparaat
weergeven.
IP-adres
Het IP-adres van het huidige netwerk
weergeven.
Wi-Fi Direct
Hier vindt u informatie over het gebruik van de functie Wi-Fi Direct
waarmee u twee apparaten via Wi-Fi kunt verbinden zonder een
toegangspunt.
1 Open de lijst met applicaties en selecteer Instellingen→Meer...
2 Schakel het selectievakje naast Wifi Direct→OK.Connectiviteit
66
3 Selecteer een bestand of item, zoals een mediabestand of
webadres, in een geschikte applicatie.
4 Selecteer een optie voor het verzenden van gegevens via Wi-Fi.
De methode van datatransmissie kan per applicatie
verschillen.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth is een draadloze communicatietechnologie die werkt
over een korte afstand. Met Bluetooth kunt u gegevens uitwisselen
over een afstand van ongeveer 10 meter zonder dat er een fysieke
verbinding nodig is.
Bij Bluetooth is het niet nodig om de apparaten op elkaar te
richten. Als de apparaten zich binnen elkaars bereik bevinden,
kunnen er gegevens worden overgedragen, ook als de apparaten
zich in aparte ruimten bevinden.
● Samsung is niet verantwoordelijk voor het verlies, de
onderschepping of het misbruik van gegevens die via de
Bluetooth-functie zijn verzonden of ontvangen.
● Zorg altijd dat u gegevens deelt met en ontvangt van
vertrouwde apparaten die